LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. 
fV 76: 

She] ttJ~G _^ „ 



UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. 



A MANUAL 



OF 



AUSCULTATION AND PERCUSSION; 



EMBRACING THE 



PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS OF DISEASES OF THE LUNGS 



BY 

AUSTIN FLINT, M.D., 

PROFESSOR OF THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF MEDICINE AND OF 

CLINICAL MEDICINE IN THE BELLEVUE HOSPITAL 

MEDICAL COLLEGE, ETC. ETC. 

SECOND EDITION, REVISED. 




PHILADELPHIA: 

HENRY C. LEA. 

1880. 



ft , 

V 2 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1880, by 

HENRY C. LEA, 

in the Office of the Librarian of Congress. All rights reserved. 



COLLINS, PRINTER 



- 



PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 



This work contains the substance of the lessons which 
the author has for many years given, in connection with 
practical instruction in auscultation and percussion, to 
private classes composed of medical students and prac- 
titioners. 

In his courses of practical instruction his plan has 
been, 1st. To simplify the subject as much as possible, 
avoiding all needless refinements ; 2d. To consider the 
distinctive characters of the different physical signs as 
determined, not by analogies, nor by deductions from 
physics, but by analysis, and as based especially on 
variations in the intensity, pitch, and quality of sounds ; 
3d. To impress the fact that the significance of physical 
signs relates to certain physical conditions, and the im- 
portance of a familiar acquaintance with these conditions, 
as well as with the distinctive characters of the signs by 
which they are represented ; 4th. To enforce the neces- 
sity of sufficient study of the physical conditions and the 
signs of health, as a sine qua non for success in the 
study of the physical diagnosis of diseases ; and, 5th. 
To waive discussion of the mechanism of signs, when- 



IV PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 

ever this is open for discussion, taking the ground that 
our knowledge of the significance of signs rests solely on 
the constancy of their connection with the physical con- 
ditions which they represent. 

This plan, of which the utility has been confirmed by 
continued experience, has been followed throughout the 
present volume, and the favor with which the work has 
been received has seemed to show that no radical changes 
were required. In revising it for a second edition, there- 
fore, the author has confined himself to such additions as 
seemed likely to render it more useful not only to stu- 
dents engaged in the practical study of the subject, but 
also to practitioners as a hand-book for ready reference. 

New York, January, 1880. 



CONTENTS 



CHAPT ER I. 

INTRODUCTION. 

PAGE 

Definition of percussion and auscultation — The sounds obtained by 
these methods representing healthy and morbid physical condi- 
tions — Definition of signs — The basis of our knowledge of signs 
the constancy of association of certain sounds with certain phy- 
sical conditions in health and disease — The present state of per* 
fection of our knowledge of signs furnished by auscultation and 
percussion — Requirements for the successful study of these 
methods of exploration — The anatomy and physiology of the 
chest — An enumeration of the points relating thereto which are 
of especial importance — The physical conditions incident to the 
different diseases of the chest : the conditions relating to the re- 
spiratory system stated, and a summary of them — The distinctive 
characters of healthy and morbid signs ; variations in intensity, 
pitch, and quality, considered as the chief source of the cha- 
racters distinguishing the signs of disease from each other and 
from those of health — Other distinctions than those of intensity, 
pitch, and quality — The analytical method of the study of aus- 
cultation and percussion — The significance of the signs as regards 
the physical conditions which they severally represent — Morbid 
conditions, not individual diseases, represented by the morbid 
signs — Regional divisions of the chest — Anatomical relations of 
the regions severally to the parts within the chest ... 13 

CHAPTER II. 

PERCUSSION IN HEALTH. 

Percussion with the fingers or with a percussor and pleximeter — . 
The normal vesicular resonance on percussion ; its distinctive cha- 
racters relating to intensity, pitch, and quality — Variations in the 
characters of the normal vesicular resonance in different persons 



VI CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

— Relation of the pitch of resonance to the vesicular quality — 
Tympanitic resonance over the abdomen — Variations of the nor- 
mal resonance in the different regions of the chest — Enumeration 
of the regions in which the resonance on the two sides varies, 
and those in which it is identical in health — Influence of age on 
the normal resonance — Influence of the acts of respiration on the 
resonance — Rules in the practice of percussion .... 38 



CHAPTER III. 

PERCUSSION IN DISEASE. 

Enumeration of the signs of disease furnished by percussion — Re- 
quirements for a practical knowledge of these signs— The distinc- 
tive characters of, the morbid physical conditions represented by, 
and the different diseases into the diagnosis of which enter, these 
signs, severally, to wit, 1. Absence of resonance or flatness ; 2. 
Diminished resonance or dulness ; 3. Tympanitic resonance ; 4. 
Vesiculotympanitic resonance; 5. Amphoric resonance; 6. 
Cracked-metal resonance — Sense of resistance felt in the practice 
of percussion, as a morbid sign . ...... 54 

CHAPTER IV. 

AUSCULTATION IN HEALTH. 

Importance of the study of the auscultatory sounds in health — 
Immediate and mediate auscultation — Advantages of the binau- 
ral stethoscope — Rules to be observed in auscultation — Divisions 
of the study of auscultation in health — The normal laryngeal and 
tracheal respiration— The normal vesicular murmur ; its distinc- 
tive characters; and the variations in the different regions on the 
same side, and in corresponding regions on the two sides of the 
chest — The normal vocal resonance — The laryngeal and tracheal 
voice and whisper — The normal thoracic vocal resonance and fre- 
mitus ; the distinctive characters of each ; the variations in differ- 
ent regions on the same side, and in corresponding regions on 
the two sides of the chest — The normal bronchial whisper, with 
its variations in different regions on the same side, and in corres- 
ponding regions on the two sides of the chest ... 65 



CONTENTS. VI! 

CHAPTER V. 

AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

PAGE 

The respiratory signs of disease .-—Abnormal modifications of the 
normal respiratory sounds : — Increased vesicular murmur — Dimi- 
nished vesicular murmur — Suppressed respiratory sound — Bron- 
chial or tubular respiration — Broncho-vesicular respiration — 
Cavernous respiration — Broncho-cavernous respiration — Vesi- 
culocavernous respiration — Amphoric respiration — Shortened 
inspiration — Prolonged expiration — Interrupted respiration. 
Adventitious respiratory sounds or rales : — Laryngeal and tracheal 
rales — Moist bronchial rales, coarse, fine, and subcrepitant — 
Vesicular or crepitant rale — Cavernous or gurgling rale — Pleural 
friction rales, metallic tinkling and splashing. Indeterminate 
rales — The vocal signs of disease : — Bronchophony — Whispering 
bronchophony — iEgophony — Increased vocal resonance — In- 
creased bronchial whisper — Cavernous whisper — Pectoriloquy — 
Amphoric voice or echo — Diminished and suppressed vocal reso- 
nance — Diminished and suppressed vocal fremitus — Metallic tink- 
ling. Signs obtained by acts of coughing or tussive signs . . 85 



CHAPTEE VI. 

THE PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS OE DISEASES OF THE RESPIRATORY 
ORGANS. 

Affections of the larynx and trachea — Bronchitis seated in large bron- 
chial tubes — Bronchitis seated in small bronchial tubes, or capil- 
lary bronchitis — Collapse of pulmonary lobules — Lobular pneumo- 
nia — Asthma — Pulmonary or vesicular emphysema — Pleurisy, 
acute and chronic — Empyema — Hydrothorax — Pneumothorax — 
Pneumo-hydrothorax — Pneumo-pyothorax — Acute lobar pneumo- 
nia — Circumscribed pneumonia — Embolic pneumonia — Hemor- 
rhagic infarctus — Pulmonary apoplexy — Pulmonary gangrene — 
Pulmonary oedema — Carcinoma of lung — Tumor within the chest 
— Acute miliary tuberculosis — Pulmonary phthisis — Fibroid 
phthisis, interstitial pneumonia, or cirrhosis of lung — Diaphrag- 
matic hernia .......... 135 



Vlll CONTENTS. 



CHAPTER VII. 

THE PHYSICAL CONDITIONS OF THE HEART IN HEALTH AND 
DISEASE. THE HEART-SOUNDS AND CARDIAC MURMURS. 

PAGE 

Physical conditions of the heart in health : — Boundaries of the prae- 
cordia — Normal situation of the apex-beat — Boundaries of the 
deep and of the superficial cardiac space — Relations of the aorta 
and the pulmonary artery to the walls of the chest — The heart- 
sounds — Characters distinguishing the first and the second sound 
— Mechanism of the production of the heart-sounds — Ausculta- 
tion of the pulmonic and the aortic second sound separately — 
Movements of the auricles and ventricles in relation to each other 
— Physical conditions of the heart in disease: — Enlargement of 
the heart — Hypertrophy and dilatation — Abnormal impulses of 
the heart, and modifications of the apex-beat — Valvular lesions 
— Roughness of the pericardial surfaces — Liquid within the peri- 
cardial sac — Abnormal modifications of the heart-sounds — Redu- 
plication of heart-sounds — Cardiac murmurs — Normal and abnor- 
mal blood-currents within the heart, and their relations with the 
heart-sounds — Mitral direct murmur — Mitral regurgitant murmur 
— Mitral systolic non-regurgitant, or intra-ventricular murmur 
— Aortic direct murmur — Aortic regurgitant murmur, and an 
Aortic diastolic non-regurgitant murmur — Coexisting endocardial 
murmurs — Tricuspid direct murmur — Tricuspid regurgitant mur- 
mur — Pulmonic direct murmur — Pulmonic regurgitant murmur- 
Facts of practical importance in relation to endocardial murmurs 
— Pericardial or friction murmur ...... 180 



CHAPTER VIII. 

THE PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS OF DISEASES OF THE HEART AND OF 
THORACIC ANEURISM. 

Enlargement of the heart by hypertrophy and dilatation — Valvular 
lesions, mitral, aortic, tricuspid, and pulmonic — Fatty degenera- 
tion and softening of the heart — Endocarditis — Pericarditis — 
Functional disorders — Thoracic aneurism . ... . 215 



MANUAL 

OF 

AUSCULTATION AND PERCUSSION. 



CHAPTER I. 

INTRODUCTION. 



Definition of percussion and auscultation — The sounds obtained by these 
methods representing healthy and morbid physical conditions — Defini- 
tion of signs — The basis of our knowledge of signs the constancy of 
association of certain sounds with certain physical conditions in 
health and disease — The present state of perfection of our knowledge 
of signs furnished by auscultation and percussion — Requirements for 
the successful study of these methods of exploration — The anatomy 
and physiology of the chest — An enumeration of the points relating 
thereto which are of especial importance — The physical conditions 
incident to the different diseases of the chest : the conditions relating 
to the respiratory system stated, and a summary of them — The distinc- 
tive characters of healthy and morbid signs ; variations in intensity, 
pitch, and quality, considered as the chief source of the characters 
distinguishing the signs of disease from each other and from those of 
health — Other distinctions than those of intensity, pitch, and quality — 
The analytical method of the study of auscultation and percussion — 
The significance of the signs as regards the physical conditions which 
they severally represent — Morbid conditions, not individual diseases, 
represented by the morbid signs — Regional divisions of the chest — 
Anatomical relations of the regions severally to the parts within the 
chest. 

Physical Exploration. 

The physical exploration of the chest embraces six 
different methods, namely: auscultation, percussion, in- 
spection, palpation, mensuration, and succussion. Of 
these, auscultation and percussion, dealing with sounds, 
involve the sense of hearing. In percussion, the sounds 



11 INTRODUCTION. 

are produced by striking upon the walls of the chest ; in 
auscultation, they are caused by acts of breathing, speak- 
ing, and coughing. 

The sounds in auscultation and percussion are, 1st, 
normal or healthy sounds, being produced when there is 
no disease of the chest ; and, 2d, abnormal or morbid 
sounds, being produced when the chest is the seat of dis- 
ease. The sounds, healthy and morbid, constitute what 
are known as physical signs. Frequently, for the sake 
of brevity, the term signs, without the word physical, is 
used to denote these sounds. Conventionally, physical 
signs, or signs, are terms employed in a sense of contra- 
distinction from the term symptoms. The signs are dis- 
tinguished, of course, as normal or healthy and abnormal 
or morbid. 

The sounds which constitute signs represent certain 
physical conditions pertaining to the chest. The normal 
or healthy signs represent physical conditions existing 
when the organs are not affected by disease ; the abnor- 
mal or morbid signs represent physical conditions which 
are deviations from those of health, being incident to the 
various diseases of the chest. The physical conditions 
represented by signs may be distinguished as normal or 
healthy, and abnormal or morbid conditions. 

The representation of healthy and morbid physical 
conditions by certain healthy and morbid signs is estab- 
lished by having ascertained a constancy of association 
of the signs with the conditions. This constancy of as- 
sociation is ascertained by observation or experience. 
The sounds which are constantly obtained by percussion 
and auscultation in health are thereby established signs 
of healthy conditions, and the sounds which are only 
obtained in cases of disease are thereby established signs 



PHYSICAL EXPLORATION. 15 

of morbid conditions. Our knowledge of certain sounds 
as the signs of certain physical conditions can have no 
reliable basis other than the constancy of the connection 
of the former with the latter. This constancy of connec- 
tion is determined by the study of the sounds during life 
and examination of the organs after death. The exist- 
ence of certain conditions is not to be inferred from the 
characters of certain sounds until the connection of the 
sounds with the conditions has been ascertained by ex- 
perience ; then, and then only, are the sounds to be 
reckoned as signs of these conditions. So, also, it is not 
to be inferred from certain physical conditions found 
after death, that certain sounds must have been produced 
during: life, until the connection between the conditions 
and the sounds has been ascertained by experience. In 
other words, our knowledge of signs as representing 
physical conditions, can rest on no other than a purely 
empirical foundation. 

Our knowledge of the signs representing the physical 
conditions in health and disease, thanks to the labors of 
Laennec and of those who have followed in his footsteps, 
has been brought to great perfection. The practical 
object of this knowledge is to determine by means of 
auscultation and percussion, together with the other 
methods of exploration, the existence of either healthy 
or morbid physical conditions, and to discriminate the 
latter from each other ; that is to say, the practical object 
is diagnosis. The signs now known to represent physi- 
cal conditions, healthy and morbid, taken in connection 
with symptoms and pathological laws, render, for the 
most part, the diagnosis of diseases of the chest easy 
and positive. Hence, it becomes the duty of the medi- 
cal student and practitioner to give to auscultation and 



16 INTRODUCTION. 

percussion attention sufficient, at least, for their practi- 
cal application to the diagnosis of the diseases commonly 
met with in medical practice ; and this duty is the more 
imperative because it involves neither peculiar difficul- 
ties nor great labor. In entering upon the undertaking, 
it is important to consider the requirements for the suc- 
cessful study of this province of practical medicine. 
These requirements relate to : 1st, the anatomy and 
physiology of the chest; 2d, the morbid physical condi- 
tions incident to the different diseases of the chest ; 3d, 
the distinctive characters of healthy and morbid signs ; 
and 4th, the significance of the signs as regards the 
physical conditions which they severally represent. 

Anatomy and Physiology of the Respiratory Organs, 

The necessity of a certain amount of knowledge of 
the anatomy and physiology of the chest, as a require- 
ment for the study of auscultation and percussion, to- 
gether with the other methods of physical exploration, is 
too obvious to need any discussion. The physical con- 
ditions of health must be known as preparatory for ap- 
preciating the physical conditions of disease. It would 
be absurd to think of studying the latter until the former 
are known. The student, therefore, who is not acquainted 
^ith the anatomy and physiology of the chest, must defer 
entering upon the study of physical diagnosis until this 
requirement is fulfilled. Familiarity with the morbid 
physical conditions is necessary ; and for the advanced 
medical student or the practitioner, it is advisable to re- 
fresh the memory with a reviewal of certain anatomical 
and physiological points before beginning the study of 
auscultation and percussion. These points, relating 
especially to the physical conditions of health, cannot be 



ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY OF CHEST. 17 

considered in this work. A simple enumeration of them 
can only be introduced, the reader being referred for de- 
tails to treatises on anatomy and physiology. 

Important anatomical conditions relate to the bones 
of the chest, namely, the general conformation of the 
thorax ; the differences in respect of the obliquity of the 
ribs, from above downward ; the direction of the costal 
cartilages, their connection with the sternum, and the 
angles formed by the junction of the ribs and cartilages ; 
the differences in width of the intercostal spaces in the 
upper, middle, and lower portions of the anterior, lateral 
and posterior aspects of the thorax, together with the re- 
lations of the scapula and clavicle. The relative thick- 
ness of the muscular covering of the chest in different 
situations is to be considered, and, in women, the varying 
size of the mammae. The attachments of the diaphragm 
to the thoracic w r alls, and its relations to the organs be- 
low, as well as above it, are points of importance. 

Important physiological conditions relate to the parts 
which the ribs, costal cartilages, sternum, and diaphragm 
severally play in the movements of respiration. The 
differences, in respect of these movements, in tranquil 
and in forced breathing ; the contrast between the two 
sexes, and between early and advanced life are points to 
be studied. Other points are, the frequency of the 
respirations in health, and the relative duration, rapidity, 
and force of the inspiratory and the expiratory move- 
ments. 

Numerous anatomical and physiological points pertain 
to the organs within the chest. The more important of 
these, relating to normal physical conditions, are the fol- 
lowing : 1st, as regards the lungs, the connections of the 
pleura, and the smoothness of the pleural surfaces in 

2* 



18 INTRODUCTION. 

contact with each other ; the relations of the apex and 
base of each lung to the chest-walls, and the differences 
of the two lungs in this respect ; the relative spaces 
occupied respectively by the two lobes of the left, and 
the three lobes of the right lung ; the situation of the 
interlobar fissures in either side on the posterior, lateral, 
and anterior aspects of the chest ; the arrangement of the 
air vesicles, pulmonary lobules, and the different sized 
intra-pulmonary bronchial tubes ; the expansion of the 
air vesicles, and the movement of the current of air from 
larger to smaller bronchial tubes in the act of inspiration, 
the vesicles diminishing in size, and the current of air 
moving from smaller to larger tubes in the act of expira- 
tion ; the difference in respect of the relative proportion 
of air and solids at the end of inspiration and at the end 
of expiration; the extent to which the volume of the 
lungs may be diminished by a forced act of expiration, 
and increased by a forced act of inspiration ; the rela- 
tions of the apices to the subclavian arteries, and the 
variable extent to which the apex rises on either side 
above the clavicle. 2d, as regards the larynx, trachea, 
and the bronchial tubes without the lungs, the anatomy 
and physiology of the vocal chords, of the muscles con- 
cerned in the movements of respiration and of phonation, 
with the relations of each to the recurrent laryngeal 
nerve, the size of the rima glottidis in youth, after 
puberty, and relatively in the two sexes ; the difference 
in the amount of areolar tissue above the vocal chords in 
children and in adults ; the situation of the trachea, and 
the point of its bifurcation ; the length, direction, and 
size of the two primary bronchi contrasted with each 
other, and the secondary branches which penetrate the 
lungs. 3d, as regards the heart, the boundaries of the 



DISEASES OE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM. 19 

space which it occupies — that is, of the precordial space ; 
the relations of the aorta and pulmonic artery to the 
walls of the chest, the portions of the precordial space 
in which the heart is covered and uncovered by lung ; 
the situations of the auricles and ventricles respectively ; 
the relations of these to each other, and the arrangements 
of the valves ; the currents of blood through the orifices 
within the heart, and the relations of each of these to 
the heart-sounds ; the rhythmical succession of these 
sounds, and the differences which distinguish each from 
the other in respect of loudness, duration, tone, quality, 
extent of diffusion, and the situation in which each has 
its maximum of intensity ; the mechanism of these sounds, 
and the situation of the apex-beat. 

The foregoing are the anatomical and physiological 
points which especially claim attention with reference to 
normal physical conditions preparatory to entering on 
the study of abnormal physical conditions represented 
by the signs furnished by auscultation and percussion, 
together with the other methods of physical exploration. 

The Physical Conditions Incident to the Different Diseases 
of the Respiratory System. 

The numerous physical conditions incident to different 
diseases must be known, for it is the immediate object of 
auscultation, percussion, and the other methods of ex- 
ploration, to ascertain either the existence or the absence 
of these conditions. Knowledge of all the important 
conditions which are deviations from those of health, and 
the relations of each to different diseases, is, therefore, 
an essential requirement. 

Deviations from the normal conformation of the chest, 
and the various abnormal movements of respiration, be- 



20 INTRODUCTION. 

long properly among the physical signs obtained by in- 
spection, palpation, and mensuration. For the most part, 
these signs represent morbid physical conditions within 
the chest. Certain conditions relate to the presence of 
liquid, either serous, sero-fibrinous, or purulent, within 
the pleural sac. The quantity of liquid may be large 
enough to compress the lung into a solid mass, and to 
enlarge the affected side, at the same time restraining or 
annulling the respiratory movements ; the chest on the 
affected side, then, will contain only lung solidified by 
compression and liquid. In other cases the quantity of 
liquid is either small, moderate, or considerable, the 
lung, then, containing a lessened quantity of air, and its 
volume diminished in proportion to the amount of liquid. 
These conditions are incident to simple pleurisy with 
effusion, pyothorax or empyema, and hydrothorax. 

The pleural surfaces, in cases of pleurisy, may be 
more or less covered with recent fibrinous exudation, 
and, when not separated by the presence of liquid, they 
do not move upon each other smoothly and noiselessly. 
The friction of the opposed surfaces is still more pro- 
ductive of audible and sometimes tactile signs after the 
absorption of liquid, when the exudation has become more 
adherent and dense than when it is recent. 

The presence of air in the pleural space, either alone 
or with more or less liquid, in pneumothorax, may com- 
press the lung into a solid mass, also dilating the affected 
side, and restraining or annulling its movements; and 
the air, with or without liquid, when not in sufficient 
quantity to produce these effects, may diminish more or 
less the volume of the lung and the amount of air in the 
pulmonary vesicles. These conditions give rise to char- 
acteristic physical signs. The perforation of lung, usu- 



DISEASES OF RESPIRATORY SYSTEM. 21 

ally existing in cases of pneumothorax, occasions addi- 
tional signs which are .characteristic. 

Solidification of lung is an important physical condi- 
tion incident to several diseases, irrespective of the con- 
densation just referred to caused by the compression of 
liquid or air in the pleural sac, Complete consolidation 
of an entire lobe, or of two and even three lobes, exists 
in the second stage of lobar pneumonia. Certain physi- 
cal signs represent this condition of complete solidifica- 
tion. The different degrees of solidification, namely, 
slight, moderate, and considerable, occur during the stage 
of resolution in cases of pneumonia, and these gradations 
are severally represented by well-defined characters per- 
taining to physical signs. Solidification, circumscribed, 
forming nodules which vary in size and number, situated 
in the upper, lower, or middle portion of the lung, either 
on one side or on both sides, exists in phthisis, in broncho- 
pneumonia, and collapse of pulmonary lobules, in hydatids, 
in hemorrhagic infarctus and embolic pneumonia, in pul- 
monary gangrene, and in carcinoma. It exists, greater 
or less in degree and more or less extended, in inter- 
stitial pneumonia. In these different connections the 
existence of solidification, its degree and extent, its 
limitation to one situation or its existence at different 
points, are determinable by means of physical signs. 

A physical condition the opposite of solidification is 
an abnormal accumulation of air within the air vesicles 
of the lungs. This is incident to pulmonary or vesicular 
emphysema, arising from a morbid dilatation of the air 
vesicles. The permanent expansion and increased vol- 
ume of the upper lobes in some cases of this disease, 
occasion a characteristic deformity of the chest, together 
with certain deviations from the normal movements of 



22 INTRODUCTION. 

respiration, which are also characteristic. This condi- 
tion is represented by distinctive signs furnished by 
auscultation and percussion. The extravasation of air 
in the connective tissue, constituting interlobular and 
subpleural emphysema, in like manner gives rise to 
signs furnished by these methods of exploration. 

The presence of a viscid exudation within the air 
vesicles and bronchioles, is a morbid physical condition 
incident to lobar pneumonia, especially in its first stage, 
agglutinating the walls of the cells and bronchioles 
which may be brought into contact or close proximity at 
the end of the act of expiration. The separation of the 
walls thus agglutinated, in the act of inspiration, gives 
rise to an auscultatory sign (the crepitant rale) which is 
pathognomonic of that disease. 

An accumulation of serum within the air vesicles con- 
stitutes the condition called pulmonary oedema. This 
condition gives rise to signs furnished by auscultation 
and percussion. 

Liquid within the bronchial tubes (serum, pus, blood, 
or thin mucus) is a condition incident to pulmonary 
oedema, abscess either of the lung or situated elsewhere 
and evacuating through the bronchial tubes, phthisis, 
bronchorrhagia, pneumorrhagia, bronchorrhoea, and bron- 
chitis. The passage of air through the different varie- 
ties of liquid in the tubes, causes bubbling sounds which 
are appreciable in auscultation. The apparent size of 
the bubbles (coarseness or fineness) denotes the size of 
the tubes in which they are produced, and the pitch of 
the bubbling sounds denotes either solidification or other- 
wise of the pulmonary substance surrounding the tubes 
in which the bubbles are produced. Bubbling sounds 
more intense and on a larger scale are caused by the 



DISEASES OF RESPIRATORY SYSTEM. 23 

presence of liquid within the trachea and larynx, known 
as the tracheal rales or the death rattle. 

Diminished calibre of the bronchial tubes within the 
lungs, either localized or diffused, is a condition due to 
the presence of tenacious mucus, and the swelling of the 
mucous membrane in cases of bronchitis. In cases of 
so-called capillary bronchitis the condition may involve 
an alarming degree of obstruction. The same condition 
is incident to bronchial spasm in asthma, occasioning in 
this disease great suffering, but without immediate 
danger. The condition is represented by auscultatory 
signs which enable the auscultator to differentiate the 
obstruction due to capillary bronchitis from that due to 
bronchial spasm. Permanent obliteration of more or less 
of the bronchial tubes is an occasional condition. 

Obstruction of a bronchial tube, either within or with- 
out the lung, is a condition involving the loss of respira- 
tory sound within the area of the bronchial branches and 
vesicles not receiving air in consequence of the obstruc- 
tion. The obstruction may be temporary, being caused 
by a plug of mucus of sufficient size to prevent the pas- 
sage of air; the condition is then incident to bronchitis. 
One of the primary bronchi may be obstructed tempora- 
rily by a plug of mucus ; and obstruction of the larynx 
in childhood thus produced may be sufficient to cause 
death by suffocation. The inhalation of foreign bodies 
is another cause of obstruction within the larynx, trachea, 
or bronchi. A primary bronchus or the trachea may be 
pressed upon by an aneurismal or other tumor, and, in 
this way, more or less obstruction to the passage of air 
is produced. However produced, the situation of the 
obstruction and its degree are, in general, determinable 
by means of auscultatory signs. 



24 INTRODUCTION. 

Dilatation of bronchial tubes occasions two physical 
conditions differing as regards their auscultatory signs, 
namely, 1st, an enlargement of greater or less extent, 
the tubes preserving their cylindrical form ; and 2d, a 
sacculated enlargement. The former occurs generally 
in connection with solidification around the tubes from 
hyperplasia of the areolar tissue, and is thus incident to 
interstitial pneumonia. The latter may give rise to signs 
which represent pulmonary cavities. 

Sacculated dilatations of bronchial tubes, and the cavi- 
ties incident to phthisis, pulmonary abscess, and circum- 
scribed gangrene of lung, are represented by well-marked 
and highly distinctive signs furnished by auscultation 
and percussion. The signs denote either that cavities 
have flaccid walls which collapse in expiration, and ex- 
pand in inspiration, or that, owing to solidification of 
lung, they remain open during both acts of respiration. 

More or less of the space within the chest, which, nor- 
mally, is occupied by lung, may be encroached upon by 
aneurisms or other intra-thoracic tumors. This is a phy- 
sical condition giving rise to notably morbid signs fur- 
nished by auscultation and percussion. 

Finally, an extremely rare morbid physical condition 
is the presence of more or less of the hollow viscera of 
the abdomen within the chest, in consequence of a con- 
genital deficiency in the diaphragm, constituting dia- 
phragmatic hernia. 

The foregoing morbid physical conditions relate to the 
respiratory organs. Those relating to the heart are de- 
ferred, in order that they may precede more immediately 
an account of the signs of cardiac disease. As a re- 
quirement for the study of morbid physical signs, the 



DISEASES OF RESPIRATORY SYSTEM. 25 

foregoing morbid physical conditions must be understood 
and memorized. To assist the student in the latter, a 
summary of these conditions is appended. 

Summary of Morbid Physical Conditions Incident to 
Diseases of the Respiratory Organs. 

1. An accumulation of liquid, serous, sero-fibrinous, or 
purulent, sufficient to fill the affected side of the chest, and 
sometimes causing more or less enlargement. 

2. An accumulation of liquid partially filling the affected 
side of the chest, the quantity being either small, moderate, 
or considerable. 

3. Fibrinous exudation on the pleural surface. 

4. Air with liquid within the pleural cavity, and perfora- 
tion of lung. 

5. Air without liquid in the pleural cavity. 

6. Solidification of lung, either complete or approximat- 
ing to completeness. 

7. Solidification of lung;, slight or moderate in degree. 

8. Dilatation of the air vesicles, involving within them an 
abnormal accumulation of air. 

9. Extravasation of air within the pulmonary connective 
structure. 

10. Exudation within the air vesicles and bronchioles. 

11. Liquid in the air vesicles. 

12. Liquid (mucus, serum, pus, or blood) within bronchial 
tubes of large, medium, or small size. 

13. Liquid within bronchial tubes of minute size. 

14. Obstruction of the pulmonary bronchial tubes by 
mucus, swelling of the mucous membrane, and spasm of the 
bronchial muscular fibres. 

15. Obstruction of larynx, trachea, or bronchi exterior to 
the lungs, by plugs of mucus or foreign bodies. 

16. Obstruction of the trachea or a primary bronchus by 
aneurismal or other tumors. 

3 



28 INTRODUCTION. 

17. Dilatation of bronchial tubes, cylindrical or saccu- 
lated. 

18. Pulmonary cavities. 

19. Tumor within the chest. 

20. Diaphragmatic hernia. 

The Distinctive Characters of Healthy and Morbid Signs. 

For the practice of auscultation and percussion, it is 
essential to be able to recognize the signs severally 
which represent the different physical conditions in 
health and disease. It is essential to distinguish the 
morbid from the healthy signs, and to discriminate from 
each other the signs of disease. This recognition and 
discrimination of signs require a knowledge of the dis- 
tinctive characters belonging to each of them. In enter- 
ing upon the study of the signs, therefore, it is a neces- 
sary requirement to know whence their distinctive char- 
acters are derived. To this point of inquiry the atten- 
tion of the student is now invited. 

The signs being sounds, they are to be recognized and 
discriminated in the way in which we practically recog- 
nize and discriminate other sounds. It is not necessary, 
in order to do this, to study the science of acoustics. 
In becoming familiar with other sounds, for example, 
musical notes produced by different instruments, or the 
varieties of the human voice, we do not have recourse to 
that science. It suffices for all practical purposes to 
contrast the sounds, obtained by auscultation and per- 
cussion, with reference to very simple and obvious differ- 
ences ; and, yet, it is necessary to understand very 
clearly in what these differences consist, or, in other 
words, the sources of the distinctive characters of these 
sounds. The more important of the differences between 



HEALTHY AND MORBID SIGNS. 27 

the sounds obtained by auscultation and percussion relate 
to intensity, pitch, and quality. The distinctive charac- 
ters of most of the signs are derived from these three 
sources. In becoming practically acquainted with the 
signs, they are to be contrasted as regards intensity, 
pitch, and quality, precisely as we would bring other 
sounds into contrast in these three aspects. The dis- 
tinctive characters of the signs, severally, are especially 
derived from their differences in these respects. The 
distinctions expressed by the terms intensity, pitch, and 
quality, are, therefore, to be made clear. 

Differences in the intensity of sounds are easily under- 
stood. One sound is more intense than another sound 
when it is simply louder, and varying degrees of intensity 
are expressed by such terms as feeble or weak and loud, 
to which may be prefixed adjectives of quantity, like 
very, moderate, etc. This is all that need be said with 
reference to the first of the three aspects under which 
sounds are contrasted. It will be seen hereafter that 
intensity is an essential element in the distinctive char- 
acters of certain of the signs. 

Differences in the pitch of sounds are easily under- 
stood by those who have given any attention to music. 
The differences are expressed by the terms high and 
low, to which may be prefixed words denoting a greater 
or less degree of highness or lowness. A nice appreci- 
ation of variations in the pitch of musical notes, requires 
what is known as a "musical ear;" but a very nice 
appreciation is not essential in comparing, as regards 
pitch, the sounds studied in auscultation and percussion. 
For the most part, these sounds are not musical notes ; 
nevertheless, differences in pitch are readily perceived. 
A musical ear is undoubtedly an advantage in readily 



28 INTRODUCTION. 

distinguishing differences in pitch ; but it is by no means 
a sine qua non. For those who have given no attention 
to music, some difficulty may be at first experienced in 
judging correctly of differences in this regard ; but the 
difficulty disappears after a little practice. Differences 
in pitch now enter pretty largely into the distinctive 
characters of physical signs; but by Laennec, and those 
who immediately followed him, comparatively little at- 
tention was paid to the study of signs with reference to 
these differences. The writer was led to engage in this 
study a quarter of a century ago, and hereafter, in giv- 
ing an account of the different signs, he will claim to 
have been the first to have clearly indicated certain 
characters derived from this source. 1 

Differences relating to quality are apt, at first, to be 
confounded with those relating to pitch ; hence the dis- 
tinction between pitch and quality must be clearly under- 
stood. We may say of the quality of a sound, that it 
embraces whatever is not embraced in the terms intensity 
and pitch. This is true as a general statement. The 
sense of the term quality, in distinction from intensity 
and pitch, may be most readily made clear by an illustra- 
tion. Let it be supposed that we hear the notes of an 
instrument which is unseen — the performer, for example, 
being in another room. We recognize at once the in- 
strument by the notes, provided it be one with which we 
are familiar, such as a violin, a flute, a clarionet, etc. 
We do not need to see the instrument ; we recognize it 
by the sounds. Now, how do we recognize it ? Cer- 

1 Vide Prize Essay on "Variations of Pitch in Percussion and 
Respiratory Sounds, and their Application to Physical Diagnosis." 
Transactions of the American Medical Association, 1852. 



HEALTHY AND MORBID SIGNS. 29 

tainly not by the intensity of the sounds ; it matters not 
whether these be loud or weak, so that we hear them. 
Certainly not by the pitch ; for if a piece of music be 
performed, Ave get both high and low notes. We recog- 
nize the instrument by the quality of the sounds. Each 
musical instrument, owing to its peculiarity of construc- 
tion, yields sounds which are peculiar to it ; and after 
we have become familiar with the quality of sounds 
peculiar to any instrument, we immediately thereby 
recognize it. Precisely in the same way we may recog- 
nize certain sounds produced by auscultation and per- 
cussion in health and disease. The signs differ in quality 
according to the physical conditions which they severally 
represent ; and differences in quality will be found here- 
after to constitute essential and obvious distinctions by 
which the signs of health and disease are recognized and 
discriminated. This is a source of some of the most 
distinctive of the characters of certain of the physical 
signs. 

Of the peculiar quality of any particular sound one 
can form no definite idea otherwise than by direct obser- 
vation. That is to say, no one could describe to another 
the peculiar quality of a particular sound so that it would 
be clearly apprehended without the sound having been 
heard. Imagine the attempt to describe the sound of a 
violin to a person who had never listened to the notes 
from that instrument — it would be impossible to give a 
correct idea of it in language. The only way in which 
an approximative idea could be conveyed in words, would 
be by comparing the quality to that of some other in- 
strument to the notes of which there was some resem- 
blance — that is, by analogy. To attempt to describe the 
quality of sounds to one who had never heard them, 

3* 



30 INTRODUCTION. 

would be like describing colors to one blind. It will be 
seen hereafter that the quality of certain sounds obtained 
by auscultation and percussion is peculiar to them, and 
their distinctive characters in this respect can be known 
only by direct observation; they cannot be learned by 
means of any verbal description, nor by any comparisons 
— that is, by analogy. 

Appreciable variations in the quality of sounds are in- 
finite. This may be illustrated by the human voice. 
Almost every person may be recognized from a peculiar 
quality of the voice by one who is familiar with it ; and 
the voices of thousands of persons, if compared, would 
present shades of difference — in fact, as is well known, 
it is extremely rare for the voices of any two persons to 
be so nearly identical in quality that they cannot be dis- 
tinguished from each other. As the diversities in quality 
of different sounds cannot be described, so they can only 
be designated by names which are significant from cer- 
tain resemblances. Terms based on analogies which are 
used to denote qualities of the sounds furnished by aus- 
cultation and percussion are the following : rough, harsh 
and. rude, soft, blowing, hollow, musical, moist, dry, 
bubbling, gurgling, crackling, clicking, rubbing, grating, 
creaking, tubular, cracked metal, sibilant or whistling, 
sonorous or snorins;. All these names owe their sisniifi- 
cance to resemblances to other sounds. One sound fur- 
nished both by auscultation and percussion has a quality 
which is sui generis, and the term used to distinguish it 
is derived from its source, namely, the vesicular reso- 
nance, and the vesicular murmur of respiration. 

In addition to intensity, pitch, and quality, as sources 
of the distinctive characters of the signs furnished by 



HEALTHY AND MORBID SIGNS. 31 

auscultation and percussion, there are some other points 
of difference ; namely, the duration of certain sounds, 
their continuousness or otherwise, their apparent nearness 
to, or distance from, the ear, and their strong resemblance 
to particular sounds, such as the bleating of the goat, the 
chirping of birds, etc. These points of difference are of 
lesser importance, the more important relating to inten- 
sity, pitch, and quality. 

The study of the different sounds furnished by auscul- 
tation and percussion, with reference to distinctive char- 
acters relating especially to intensity, pitch, and quality, 
distinct signs being determined from points of difference 
as regards these characters, may be distinguished as the 
analytical method. It may be so distinguished in con- 
trast with the determination of signs by deductively 
taking as a standpoint either the physical conditions inci- 
dent to diseases or the sounds. If we undertake to decide, 
a priori, that certain sounds must be produced by auscul- 
tation and percussion when certain conditions are present, 
we shall be led into error; and so, equally, if we under- 
take to conclude from the nature of the sounds that they 
must represent certain conditions. The only reliable 
method is to analyze the sounds with reference to differ- 
ences relating especially to intensity, pitch, and quality, 
and to determine different signs by these differences, the 
import of each of the signs being then established by the 
constancy of association with physical conditions. It is 
by this analytical method only that the distinctive char- 
acters of signs can be accurately and clearly ascertained. 
This is to be borne in mind by the student in physical 
exploration. He is to become acquainted with the differ- 
ent signs, and to recognize them in practice, by acquiring 



32 INTRODUCTION. 

a knowledge of the distinctive characters of each, as de- 
rived mainly from differences relating to intensity, pitch, 
and quality. The individuality of the signs, severally, 
can rest on no other solid basis. 

The Significance of the Signs as regards the Physical 
Conditions which they severally represent. 

Knowledge of the significance of the physical signs is 
the complemental requirement in the study of auscultation 
and percussion. For the successful employment of these 
methods, in addition to the recognition of each sign by 
its distinctive characters, must be known its significance, 
that is, the physical condition which it represents. In 
this respect the signs may be compared to the substan- 
tives in language, each having a definite meaning. The 
signs furnished by these methods may be said to consti- 
tute a language with a very small vocabulary ; or, taking 
as the standpoint the things signified, the different phys- 
ical conditions manifest or express themselves by means 
of the signs. 

It is to be noted that the significance of the morbid 
signs relates immediately, not to diseases, but to the 
physical conditions incident thereto. Very few signs are 
directly diagnostic of any particular disease. They 
represent conditions not peculiar to one, but common to 
several, diseases. Thus, solidification of lung exists in 
pneumonia, phthisis, pleurisy with effusion, collapse, and 
pulmonary cancer; now, certain signs tell us that this 
condition exists, together with its situation, its degree, 
and its extent. With this information the diagnosis of 
the disease is made by connecting with it pathological 
laws, together with the history and symptoms. The 
student in physical exploration should by no means im- 



REGIONAL DIVISIONS OF THE CHEST. 33 

agine that, for the diagnosis of diseases, exclusive reli- 
ance is to be placed on the signs ; they are always to be 
taken in connection with pathological laws, the history, 
and the symptoms. Disconnected from these, the signs 
would often lead to error, and it is no disparagement to 
physical diagnosis that its reliability depends on other 
facts than those which belong exclusively to it. 

To repeat a statement already made more than once, 
the significance of the signs, as regards the conditions 
which they severally represent, is based on the constancy 
of their association with the latter, our knowledge of this 
association being derived from examinations during life 
and after death. 

Eegional Divisions of the Chest. 

Before entering on the study of physical exploration, 
the student should become acquainted with the divisions 
of the surfaces of the anterior, posterior, and lateral 
aspects of the chest into circumscribed spaces which are 
called regions. These divisions, deriving their bounda- 
ries and names from their anatomical relations, are suffi- 
ciently simple. 

Anteriorly the chest is divided into regions as follows : 
The supra or post-clavicular region extends from the 
clavicle upward a short distance, corresponding to the 
variable height to which the lung rises above this bone. 
The clavicular region embraces the space occupied by the 
clavicle. The infra-clavicular region embraces the space 
between the clavicle and the third rib. The mammary 
region is bounded above by the third and below by the 
sixth rib, and the infra-mammary region is the portion of 
the chest below the sixth rib. 

Posteriorly the divisions are into the scapular, the 



34 INTRODUCTION. 

infra-scapular, and inter-scapular regions. The scapular 
region is the space occupied by the scapula, and is divided 
by the spinous ridge into the upper and lower scapular 
space. The infra-scapular region is the portion below a 
horizontal line at the lower angle of the scapula. The 
inter-scapular region is the space between the posterior 
margin of the scapula and the spinal column. 

Laterally there are two regions, namely, the axillary 
and the infra-axillary. The axillary region is the space 
above a horizontal line extending from the lower border 
of the mammary region, i.e., the sixth rib. The infra- 
axillary region is the portion below the axillary region. 

The portion of the anterior surface occupied by the 
sternum is divided into the upper and the lower sternal 
region, the space above the sternal notch being the supra- 
sternal region. 

In order to become familiar with the foregoing regional 
divisions, it is recommended to the student to delineate 
them with ink on the chest of the living subject or a 
cadaver. 

It is advisable to study sections, extending from the 
surface to the centre of the chest, corresponding to the 
different regions, so as to become familiar with the rela- 
tion of each section to the parts contained within it. An 
enumeration of the more important of the anatomical 
relations of the different regions is as follows: — 

1. Supra- Clavicular Region. — This is relative to the 
upper extremity or apex of the lung which rises above 
the clavicle in different persons from half an inch to an 
inch and a half. The height is generally greater on one 
side, and this side is usually the left. 

2. Clavicular Region. — A small portion of the lung 



REGIONAL DIVISIONS OF THE CHEST. 35 

at or near the apex is contained in the section corre- 
sponding to this region. 

8. Infra-clavicular Region. — The parts situated here 
are the upper portion of the lung, the lower part of the 
trachea, with its bifurcation, and the primary bronchi. 
The bifurcation is on a level with the second rib. The 
differences between the two primary bronchi, as regards 
direction, size, and length, are important points in the 
study of this section. 

4. Mammary Region. — The differences between the 
two sides in the sections corresponding to this region are 
important. These differences relate especially to the 
prsecordia, and are involved in the physical diagnosis 
of enlargement of the heart. The commencement of 
the interlobular fissures are in this region. On the left 
side the fissure is between the fourth and fifth ribs. 
On the right side the fissure between the upper and 
middle lobes begins at the fourth costal cartilage, and 
between the middle and lower lobes a short distance 
below. The situations of the fissures, however, differ 
considerably during the acts of inspiration and expi- 
ration. 

5. Infra-mammary Region. — This region differs in its 
anatomical relations considerably on the two sides of the 
chest. On the right side the liver pushes upward the 
diaphragm nearly or quite to the upper boundary, name- 
ly, the sixth rib. On the left side the section correspond- 
ing to the region embraces, together with the anterior 
portion of the lower lobe of the lung, portions of the 
stomach, spleen, and the left lobe of the liver. The vari- 
able volume of the stomach at different times occasions 
considerable variations in the relative spaces occupied by 
these different parts. 



36 INTRODUCTION. 

6. Supra-sternal Region. — This region is in relation 
to the trachea. 

7. The Upper Sternal Region. — The bifurcation of 
the trachea is beneath the sternum at the centre of a line 
connecting the second ribs. Below this line the lungs on 
the two sides are nearly in contact at the mesial line, 
covering the primary bronchi. 

8. Loiver Sternal Region. — The sternum in this re- 
gion covers a large portion of the right and a little of the 
left ventricle. 

9. Scapular Region, — The sections corresponding to 
this region contains the posterior portion of the upper 
lobe and a portion of the upper part of the lower lobe of 
the lung. At the upper part of the lower scapular space, 
terminates the fissure separating the upper and the lower 
lobe. The line of this fissure pursues an oblique course 
to the fourth or fifth rib on the anterior aspect of the 
chest. 

10. Infra-scapular Region. — On the right side the 
lung extends from the upper boundary of this region to 
the eleventh rib, the liver rising to the latter point. On 
the left side the section contains a portion of the spleen. 

11. Inter -scapular Region. — The trachea extends in 
this section to the fourth dorsal vertebra, where it bifur- 
cates. Below this point, on the two sides, are situated 
the primary bronchi. 

12. Axillary Region. — The section corresponding to 
this region contains a portion of the upper lobe with 
large bronchial tubes. 

13. Infra-axillary Region. — This is in relation to the 
upper part of the liver on the right side, and on the left- 
side to a portion of the spleen and stomach, the remainder 
of the section occupied by lung. 



REGIONAL DIVISIONS OF THE CHEST. 37 

It is recommended to the student to become familiar 
with the sections corresponding to the different regions, 
by dissections for this purpose, and the study of anatom- 
ical illustrations. 

Asking the student's careful attention to the introduc- 
tory considerations which have been presented, ausculta- 
tion and percussion in health and disease, and the physical 
signs involved in the diagnosis of diseases of the respir- 
atory system and of the heart, will be considered as 
follows: Chapter II., Percussion in Health; Chapter 
III., Percussion in Disease; Chapter IV., Auscultation 
in Health; Chapter V., Auscultation in Disease; Chap- 
ter VI., The Physical Diagnosis of the Diseases of the 
Respiratory System; Chapter VII., The Physical Con- 
ditions of the Heart in Health and Disease; Chapter 
VIII., The Physical Diagnosis of Diseases of the Heart, 
and, as properly embraced in the scope of this treatise, 
Chapter IX. will be devoted to the Diagnosis of Thoracic 
Aneurisms. 



38 PERCUSSION IN HEALTH, 



CHAPTER II. 
PERCUSSION IN HEALTH. 

Percussion with the fingers or with a percussor andpleximeter — The nor- 
mal vesicular resonance on percussion ; its distinctive characters relat- 
ing to intensity, pitch, and quality — Variations in the characters of the 
normal vesicular resonance in different persons— Relation of the pitch 
of resonance to the vesicular quality — Tympanitic resonance over the 
abdomen — Variations of the normal resonance in the different regions 
of the chest — Enumeration of the regions in which the resonance on 
the two sides varies, and those in which it is identical in health — In- 
fluence of age on the normal resonance — Influence of the acts of res- 
piration on the resonance — Rules in the practice of percussion. 

Percussion may be performed with either the fingers 
or artificial instruments. The fingers suffice for the study 
and in ordinary practice. Instruments are preferable 
only when it is desired to produce sounds to be heard at 
some distance, as in class illustrations, and when, from 
the number of patients to be percussed, as in dispensary 
or hospital practice, the frequent repetition of the blows 
renders the fingers tender and painful. The instruments 
are a pleximeter and a percussor. The simplest and 
most convenient pleximeter is an oval disk of ivory or 
hard India-rubber, with projecting handles or auricles, 
sufficiently large and roughened on their outer aspect, so 
as to be conveniently held by the fingers. The author 
has lately used with satisfaction a pleximeter consisting 
of a piece of hard rubber bent upward at one extremity, 
and ending in a handle. The best percussor is a double 
cone of caoutchouc inclosed by a metallic ring, to which 
is attached a rod of metal with a handle of convenient 



NORMAL RESONANCE. 39 

length, weight, and size. This instrument is very dur- 
able. When percussion is performed with the fingers, 
the palmar surface of one or more of those of the left 
hand should be applied to the chest, with pressure suffi- 
cient to condense the soft structures, and the blows are 
given with one or more of the fingers of the right hand 
bent at the second phalangeal joint so as to form a right 
angle. In giving the blows, the movements should be 
limited to the wrist-joint, the ends, not the pulp, of the 
percussing fingers being brought into contact with the 
dorsal surface of the finger, or fingers, applied to the 
chest. The percussing fingers should be withdrawn in- 
stantly the blow is given. The type of perfect percus- 
sion is the movement of the hammers when the keys of a 
piano-forte are struck. The force of the percussion 
should never be sufficient to give pain to the patient ; 
generally either light, or moderately forcible blows suf- 
fice. The requisite tact in the performance of percussion 
is acquired by a little practice. 

The first object in the study of percussion is to become 
acquainted with the characters which are distinctive of 
the sound obtained thereby from the healthy chest. For 
this object the percussion may be made either in the in- 
fra-clavicular region of either side, or in the infra-scapu- 
lar region, the sound in these situations being louder 
than in other regions. Percussion being performed, a 
sound or a resonance is produced. This sound or reso- 
nance is now to be analyzed with reference to characters 
derived from intensity, pitch, and quality. What are 
these characters ? The intensity will depend, other 
things being equal, on the force of the blow ; the resonance 
is comparatively feeble with a slight, and loud with a 
strong, percussion. Other circumstances affect the in- 



40 PERCUSSION IN HEALTH. 

tensity, irrespective of the force of the blow, namely, 
the volume of the lung, the elasticity of the costal carti- 
lages, and the thickness of the soft parts which cover the 
chest. Owing to these circumstances, the intensity of 
the resonance is by no means similar, in the same situa- 
tion, in all healthy persons: it is comparatively feeble in 
some and loud in others. There is nothing distinctive of 
this normal resonance to be derived from intensity, and 
we say, therefore, that the intensity is variable. 

What is the pitch of this normal resonance ? The pitch 
of a sound is always relative ; and, comparing this reso- 
nance with all the morbid signs obtained by percussion, 
it is lower in pitch. We say, therefore, that the pitch of 
this normal resonance is low. The pitch, however, is 
found to vary in different healthy persons. 

What is the quality of this normal resonance ? It has 
a quality which is peculiar to it. In this respect it is not 
identical with any sound produced otherwise than by 
percussion over healthy lung either w T ithin or without the 
chest. The quality cannot, therefore, be learned by an- 
alogy, nor can it be described ; it can only be appreciated 
by direct observation. The peculiar quality is due to 
the fact that the resonance is from air contained in the 
pulmonary vesicles. This arrangement causes the pecu- 
liar quality, just as the construction of any particular 
musical instrument causes the quality of tone peculiar to 
that instrument ; hence, as it is convenient to give the 
quality a name, we call it the vesicular quality. This 
quality is not equally marked in all healthy persons, being, 
as a rule more marked in proportion to the intensity of 
the resonance. 

The normal resonance, then, obtained by percussion, 
may be thus defined : — 



VARIATIONS IN NORMAL RESONANCE. 41 

A resonance of variable intensity, low in pitch and 
having a peculiar quality called vesicular. The word 
vesicular is frequently embraced in the name of this 
healthy sign ; it is also called the normal resonance, the 
normal pulmonary resonance, or the normal vesicular res- 
onance. The last of these names is to be preferred. 

The normal vesicular resonance on percussion, as has 
been seen, is not uniform in all healthy persons ; not only 
is its intensity variable, but it varies in pitch and in the 
amount of vesicular quality. This may be easily illus- 
trated, by percussing successively in the same situation, 
and with the same force, a series of persons who are as- 
sumed to be free from disease. Is there not in this fact 
an obstacle in practically determining this healthy sign ? 
The fact occasions no embarrassment for this reason : we 
determine, in each case, that the resonance is normal by 
a comparison of the two sides of the chest, percussing in 
corresponding situations on the two sides and with the 
same force. There is no abstract standard of the normal 
vesicular resonance, but, by comparing the two sides of 
the chest, the standard of health proper to each person is 
obtained. The laws of disease are such that, for ail prac- 
tical purposes, the standard of health is in this way 
almost always available. Notwithstanding the variations 
within the range of health, the lowness in pitch and the 
vesicular quality are sufficiently distinctive of this normal 
sign as compared with the morbid signs. 

The pitch of the vesicular resonance and its vesicular 
quality are in a uniform relation to each other ; that is, 
the conditions giving rise to the peculiar quality, also ren 
der the pitch low. In proportion as the vesicular quality 
is marked, the pitch is lowered, and, conversely, with 
diminution of the vesicular quality the pitch is relatively 

4* 



42 PERCUSSION IN HEALTH. 

higher. This relation between the pitch and quality will 
be found to hold good in the resonance modified by dis- 
ease as well as in health. Another relation may be here 
stated, namely, whenever, in health or disease, a tym- 
panitic quality is combined with the vesicular, and in pro- 
portion as the former predominates, the pitch of the reso- 
nance is raised. 

The pitch and quality of the normal vesicular resonance 
may be readily illustrated by percussing successively 
over the chest and the abdomen. The different sections 
of the alimentary canal, generally containing more or less 
gas, a resonance is obtained by percussion over the abdo- 
men. This resonance is, of course, devoid of the vesicu- 
lar quality ; in contra-distinction to the latter its quality 
is called tympanitic. This tympanitic resonance is not 
uniform in all parts of the abdomen, but everywhere the 
quality is tympanitic, that is, non-vesicular, and the pitch 
is everywhere higher than that of the normal vesicular 
resonance. The tympanitic resonance over the stomach 
is generally high in pitch, and frequently has a ringing 
or metallic intonation. The gastric tympanitic resonance 
recognized by these characters, will be found to be in- 
volved frequently in sounds produced by percussing over 
the chest. Gas in the caecum gives a still higher pitch of 
resonance. Over the colon the resonance is lower than 
over the caecum and stomach, and it is still lower over the 
small intestines. In all these situations, bringing the 
tympanitic in contrast with the normal vesicular reso- 
nance, the peculiar quality of the latter and its lowness 
of pitch are rendered apparent. The term tympanitic 
resonance will be found to enter into the names of two of 
the morbid signs obtained by percussion. 



RESONANCE IN DIFFERENT REGIONS. 43 

Having studied the characters of the normal vesicular 
resonance, and become practically familiar with them by- 
percussing different healthy persons, the student should 
study the variations which this resonance presents in the 
different regions of the chest. In doing this he acquires 
more and more tact in the performance of percussion, and 
becomes more and more familiar with the characters in 
general of the normal vesicular resonance. 

Supra- or Post-clavicular Region. — The resonance 
here varies much in intensity in different persons. The 
vesicular quality is most marked in the central portions. 
Towards the sternal extremity the resonance acquires a 
tympanitic quality from the proximity to the trachea ; 
it becomes vesiculo- tympanitic, a term which will be ap- 
plied to one of the morbid signs . 

Clavicular Region. — Near the sternum the resonance 
is somewhat tympanitic from the proximity to the trachea. 
At the central portion the vesicular quality is more or 
less marked, and the intensity is diminished at the acro- 
mial extremity. 

Infra-clavicular Region. — The resonance in this re- 
gion is more intense than elsewhere, except in the axil- 
lary and the infra-scapular regions. The vesicular quality 
is combined with a tympanitic quality toward the sternum, 
the latter being derived from the primary and secondary 
bronchi. As always when the vesicular and the tympan- 
itic quality are combined, the pitch is raised. This com- 
bination in health and disease is recognized by the in- 
tensity, pitch, and quality. 

Scapular Region. — The resonance in this region is 
notably less intense than in the infra-clavicular region, 
owing to the presence of the scapula and its muscles. In 
proportion as the intensity is less, the vesicular quality 



44 PERCUSSION IN HEALTH. 

is less marked. The resonance in health, however, is 
quite sufficient for morbid signs to be available in this 
situation. 

Inter- scapular Region. — The resonance in this region 
is weak in comparison with other regions, owing to the 
muscles which here cover the chest. In the upper part 
of the region the resonance is somewhat tympanitic from 
the relation to the trachea and bronchi. 

Mammary Region. — The right and the left mammary 
region are to be studied with reference to differences re- 
lating to the liver and the heart. On the right side, 
from the fourth rib downward, the resonance is dimin- 
ished, the convex extremity of the liver extending up to 
this height. At or a little below the lower border of 
this region on the mammary line, that is, a vertical line 
passing through the nipple, resonance ceases, the lower 
lobe of the right lung not extending below this point. 
Between the third and fifth ribs on this side near the 
sternum, the resonance is diminished from the presence 
of a portion of the right auricle and ventricle. On 
the left side the resonance is diminished within the pre- 
cordial space. This space extends vertically from the 
third rib to the fifth intercostal space, and horizontally 
from the sternum to a point at or a little within the mam- 
mary line. The resonance is considerably diminished 
within what is called the superficial cardiac space. This 
space is represented by a right-angled triangle, the right 
angle formed by a vertical line drawn from a point on 
the median line intersected by a horizontal line connect- 
ing the fourth ribs, and a horizontal line intersecting 
the point of a'pex beat in the fifth intercostal space ; an 
oblique line drawn from the centre of the sternum on a 
level with the fourth rib and the point of apex beat 



RESONANCE IN DIFFERENT REGIONS. 45 

forms the hypothenuse of the right-angled triangle. 
Within this space the heart is in contact with the tho- 
racic wall. Without this space and within the prsecor- 
dia the heart is covered with lung, and the resonance 
on percussion is less diminished. It is a useful exer- 
cise for the student to observe the diminution of the 
area of the superficial cardiac space by a forced in- 
spiration, as determined by percussion. Aside from 
the presence of the heart and the convex extremity of 
the liver, the resonance over the mammary is less than 
in the infra-clavicular region, being diminished by the 
pectoral muscle which varies considerably in bulk in dif- 
ferent persons, and in women by the mammary gland, 
the size of the latter varying very much in different wo- 
men. The development of the mammae, however, is 
never so great as to preclude the useful employment of 
percussion in this region. 

Infra-mammary Region. — In this region, as in the 
region above it, the two sides present notable differences 
owing to the situation of organs below the diaphragm. 
On the right side, over the greater part, and sometimes 
the whole of this region, resonance is wanting, that is, 
percussion gives flatness. It is easy to delineate the 
boundary between the lower border of the right lung 
and the liver, or, as it is called, the line of hepatic flat- 
ness. It is also easy to distinguish above this line the 
height to which the lower extremity of the liver extends, 
or, as it is called, the line of hepatic dulness. The situ- 
ation of both these lines varies considerably in different 
healthy persons. The distance between the two lines is 
from one to two inches. Both lines are affected consid- 
erably by a forced inspiration and a forced expiration. 
A forced inspiration depresses the line of flatness about 



46 PERCUSSION IN HEALTH. 

one and a half inch. A forced expiration causes the 
line to rise from two and a half to five and a half inches. 
The distance, therefore, between this line at the end of 
a forced expiration, and at the end of a forced inspira- 
tion varies from four to seven inches. With reference 
to the practice of percussion, as well as for the purpose 
of verification, these points should be studied. Not in- 
frequently percussion over the right infra-mammary re- 
gion yields a tympanitic resonance due to the distension 
w T ith gas to the transverse colon. 

On the left side, the resonance in this region varies 
in different persons, in the same person at different times, 
and in different portions of the region at the same time, 
the variations depending on the organs below the dia- 
phragm. Flatness is caused by the extension of the left 
lobe of the liver into this region about two inches to the 
left of the median line. The left portion of the region 
is in relation to the spleen, an organ which varies con- 
siderably in size in health as well as disease, its average 
dimensions beina; about four inches in length and three 
inches in width. Between the spleen and the liver lies 
the stomach, the volume of which is constantly fluctua- 
ting, owing to its varying solid, liquid, and gaseous con- 
tents. Distension of the stomach with gas occasions a 
tympanitic resonance which frequently is transmitted 
above into the mammary region in health as well as in 
disease. The space corresponding to the spleen is de- 
termined by the vesicular resonance above and the tym- 
panitic resonance below, ihe latter boundary, however, 
not being very reliable on account of the ready conduc- 
tion of tympanitic resonance for a certain distance. The 
distension of the stomach with solid or liquid contents of 
course occasions flatness. The study of the infra-mam- 



RESONANCE IN DIFFERENT REGIONS. 47 

niary regions with reference to the variations in resonance 
arising from the relations to the organs below the dia- 
phragm, is of much utility from the practice, as well as 
the knowledge, which it involves. The exercise of en- 
deavoring to define the boundaries of these different 
organs in healthy persons, will be of great service to the 
student in acquiring tact in percussion, and in discrimi- 
nating differences in the sounds obtained by this method. 

Sternal Regions. — In the upper sternal region, that 
is, above the lower margin of the second rib, the reson- 
ance is non-vesicular, being derived from air in the tra- 
chea above the point of bifurcation. Being non-vesicu- 
lar, it is, of course, tympanitic, this term embracing all 
sounds which are devoid of the vesicular quality. Be- 
tween the second and third ribs, the inner borders of the 
two lungs approximating, the resonance has a vesicular 
quality more or less marked ; but owing to the remnant 
of the thymus gland, together with adipose substance, 
and the presence of the large vessels, the resonance is 
not intense in this situation. Below the third rib the 
resonance has modifications due to the combination of 
several different organs situated beneath the lower sternal 
region. On the right side of the mesial line is the inner 
border of the right lung, the greater part of the right 
and a portion of the left ventricle of the heart lying 
beneath ; a portion of the liver extends into the lower 
part of this region, and a portion of the stomach when 
distended. The resonance thus varies in different situa- 
tions, and often presents a mixed character. It is a use- 
ful exercise to endeavor to define by percussion the 
boundaries of the several organs which are here in juxta- 
position. 

Infra-scapular Regions. — The resonance below the 



48 PERCUSSION IN HEALTH. 

scapula is intense as compared with that over the scapula, 
and the vesicular quality is marked. The resonance ex- 
tends to the eleventh rib which is the lower boundary of 
the lung. On the right side, at or near this point, is the 
line of hepatic flatness, hepatic dulness extending from 
one to two inches above this line. The line of hepatic 
flatness and of hepatic dulness is lowered from one to two 
inches by a deep inspiration, and raised by a forced ex- 
piration. On the left side the resonance may receive 
a tympanitic quality from the presence of gas in the 
stomach. 

Lateral Regions. — In these regions the resonance is 
relatively intense, and notably vesicular. On the right 
side the line of hepatic flatness is at the eighth rib, 
hepatic dulness extending above this line as in front and 
behind. On the left side the resonance may be rendered 
somewhat dull by the presence of the spleen, but it 
oftener acquires a tympanitic quality from the presence 
of gas in the stomach. 

As has been stated, the normal vesicular resonance is 
not in all persons identical as regards intensity, pitch, 
and quality. There is, therefore, no fixed standard in 
these respects by which we can determine whether the 
resonance be normal or not. The standard proper to 
each person is to be ascertained by a comparison of the 
two sides of the chest; each person, in other words, 
furnishes his own standard of health. But, it is to be 
observed, that all the regions do not normally correspond 
in respect of the resonance on the two sides. In the 
following regions the resonance is notably dissimilar on 
the two sides: The mammary, the infra-mammary, the 
infra-axillary, and the infra-scapular. On the other 
hand, in the following regions the resonance on the two 



RESONANCE IN DIFFERENT REGIONS. 49 

sides is nearly or quite identical : The supra-clavicular 
clavicular and infra-clavicular, the scapular and inter- 
scapular, and the axillary. In some of the latter the 
resonance has normally some points of disparity, and it 
is of practical importance to note the small dissimilarity 
which thus belongs to health. This statement applies 
especially to the infra-clavicular region, a region which, 
as will be seen hereafter, is of great importance with 
reference to the signs of phthisis. In this region the 
resonance on the left side is somewhat more intense, 
more vesicular, and lower in pitch than the resonance on 
the right side; per contra, the resonance is less intense, 
less vesicular, and higher on the right side. This dis- 
parity is observable in all persons, but is more marked 
in some than in others. The student should become 
practically familiar with this normal difference between 
the two sides, and in becoming so, the practical experi- 
ence acquired in performing percussion will be of use. 

The normal resonance is aifected by age. In early 
life, when the costal cartilages are flexible and elastic, 
the resonance is more intense and lower in pitch than in 
old age when the cartilages are rigid, and the vesicular 
structure of the lung more or less atrophied. 

The resonance varies considerably in the different 
regions at the end of a full inspiration and at the end of 
a forced expiration. With regard to this disparity, the 
following is an extract from a work on physical explora- 
tion, published by the author in 1856: — 

"The percussion-sound may also be found to vary at 
different periods of an act of respiration in the same 
individual. The quantity of air contained within the 
air-cells, and consequently the relative proportion of air 
and solids, are by no means equal after a full inspiration 



50 PERCUSSION IN HEALTH. 

and after a forced expiration. This difference in lung 
expansion may occasion an appreciable disparity in reson- 
ance, according as the percussion is made at the conclu- 
sion of a full inspiration, or a forced expiration. The 
disparity is not appreciable uniformly in different persons. 
This fact I have ascertained by noting the results of 
examinations made with reference to the point. When 
it does exist, it usually consists, contrary to what might 
perhaps have been anticipated, and the reverse of what 
is usually stated in works on physical exploration, in 
diminished resonance and elevation of pitch at the con- 
clusion of inspiration. This is probably to be explained 
by the greater degree of tension of the lungs and thoracic 
walls produced by inspiration voluntarily prolonged and 
maintained — a condition presenting physical obstacles to 
sonorous vibrations more than sufficient to counterbalance 
the increased proportion of air within the cells. It is a 
curious fact, worthy of notice, that the two sides of the 
chest are not always found to be affected equally as 
regards the percussion-sound, at the conclusion of a full 
inspiration^ contrasted with that after a forced expira- 
tion. I have observed the contrast to be more striking 
on the risdrt than on the left side ; and in one instance 
on the left side, the resonance was less intense and some- 
what tympanitic after a full inspiration, while on the 
right side, the opposite effect was produced, and the 
sound became quite dull after a forced expiration. In 
view of these variations in a certain proportion of in- 
stances incident to different periods of a single act of 
respiration, in some cases of disease in which it is de- 
sirable to observe great delicacy in the correspondence 
of the two sides, pains should be taken to percuss cor- 
responding points at a similar stage of respiration, and 



RULES IN PRACTICE OF PERCUSSION. 51 

the close of a full inspiration is, perhaps, the period to 
be preferred. Ordinarily, the liability to error from 
this source is obviated, either by repeating a series of 
strokes, first on one side and next on the other, or by 
percussing both sides repeatedly in quick succession, in 
order mentally to obtain the average intensity and other 
characters of the sound during the successive stages of a 
respiration. The instances of disease, however, are ex- 
ceedingly rare, in which such nicety of discrimination is 
important." 

Prof. Da Costa has recently studied more fully the 
variations in this respect in the different regions in dis- 
ease as well as in health, and he has distinguished this 
as ''respiratory percussion." 1 

Rules in the Practice of Percussion. 

1. Prior to a comparison of the two sides of the chest, 
as regards the resonance on percussion, either in health 
or disease, an examination by inspection should be made, 
in order to determine whether there be any deviation 
from the normal conformation. In what has been stated 
concerning percussion in health, it is assumed that the 
chest is symmatrical. Want of symmetry may be due 
to congenital deformities, and to those caused by rachitis, 
chronic pleurisy, curvature of the spine, and injuries. 
Any deviation from the normal conformation will affect 
more or less the resonance in corresponding regions on 
the two sides. Due allowance is to be made for want of 
symmetry in determining morbid signs, and often the 
existence of these cannot be determined with positiveness 

1 Vide work on Diagnosis, fourth edition, 1870. 



52 PERCUSSION IN HEALTH. 

when there is considerable deformity. The signs ob- 
tained by auscultation are less affected, by want of sym- 
metry than those obtained by percussion. 

2. Attention to the position of the person examined is 
important with reference to the normal symmetry of the 
chest. If the person be standing or sitting, the position 
should be upright and the shoulders brought to a level. 
A little inclination of the body to one side, or a depres- 
sion of one shoulder, will be found to affect perceptibly 
the normal resonance, when the two sides are compared. 
If the body be recumbent, it should be as near as possible 
on a level plane. These conditions are indispensable 
for a nice comparison of the two sides either in health or 
disease. 

3. In making a nice comparison, the person who per- 
cusses should be, as nearly as possible, directly either in 
front or behind the person percussed. Percussion made 
by one standing or sitting by the side of the person per- 
cussed, is almost certain to produce disparity in resonance. 

4. Percussion made successively on one side, and the 
other side, must be in all respects the same, in regard to 
the mode, the force of the blow, and the situation. A 
light percussion on one side, and a strong percussion on 
the other side, will, of course, cause a disparity in the 
intensity of resonance. The percussion must be made in 
succession at points as nearly as possible equidistant from 
the median line, and from the summit or base of the chest. 
With reference to great nicety, the percussion, if made 
on the rib or intercostal space on one side, must be made 
on the rib or intercostal space on the other side. Great 
nicety of comparison also requires that, if the percussion 



RULES IN PRACTICE OF PERCUSSION. 53 

be made on one side during the act of inspiration, it 
should be made on the other side during this act. The 
signs of disease, however, are generally so well-marked, 
that very close attention to these points is not necessary. 

5. A series of blows in rapid succession (5 or 7) is to 
be preferred to one or two, in practising percussion, dif- 
ference in intensity, pitch, and quality being thereby 
better appreciated. 

6. Percussion may be made lightly or forcibly, the 
former being called superficial, and the latter deep per- 
cussion. With light blows the resonance comes from the 
superficies of the lung, and from within a limited area. 
With forcible blows the resonance is from a greater depth, 
and a wider space. The results of these different modes 
of practising percussion may be illustrated within the 
prgecordia in health. Comparing the resonance over the 
superficial cardiac space with that in a corresponding 
situation on the right side, dulness is more marked with 
light than with forcible blows, the resonance from the 
latter coming from a wider area. On the other hand, 
comparing the resonance over the deep cardiac spaee ? 
dulness is more marked with forcible than with light blows, 
owing to the presence of lung between the heart and the 
walls of the chest. This rule is of importance in its 
application to percussion in disease. 

7. Percussion over the anterior portion of the chest, 
the person percussed leaning against a door, a board par- 
tition, or a lathed wall, gives an increased intensity of 
resonance. It is often useful to resort to this procedure 
in the practice of percussion. 



54 PERCUSSION IN DISEASE 



CHAPTER III. 

PERCUSSION IN DISEASE. 

Enumeration of the signs of disease furnished by percussion — Require- 
ments for a practical knowledge of these signs — The distinctive charac- 
ters of, the morbid physical conditions represented by, and the different 
diseases into the diagnosis of which enter, these signs, severally, to wit, 
1. Absence of resonance or flatness ; 2. Diminished resonance or dul- 
ness;3. Tympanitic resonance ; 4. Vesiculotympanitic resonance ; 5. 
Amphoric resonance; 6. Cracked-metal resonance — Sense of resistance 
felt in the practice of percussion, as a morbid sign 

Percussion in disease furnishes signs which represent 
certain of the morbid physical conditions incident to the 
different pulmonary affections ; with these physical con- 
ditions and their relations to pulmonary affections the 
student is supposed to be familiar (vide page 19 et seq.). 

The signs of disease furnished by percussion are re- 
solvable into six, namely : 1. Absence of resonance or 
flatness; 2. Diminished resonance or clulness ; 3. Tym- 
panitic resonance ; 4. Vesiculo- tympanitic resonance ; 5. 
Amphoric resonance ; and 6. Cracked-metal resonance. 
The two last named signs are properly varieties of tym- 
panitic resonance, but it is most convenient to consider 
them as distinct signs. 

Knowledge of these six signs sufficient for their avail- 
ability in physical diagnosis requires, first, a practical 
acquaintance with the characters which distinguish each 
from the others, as well as from the normal resonance ; 
and second, a clear apprehension of the significance of 



ABSENCE OF RESONANCE OR FLATNESS. 55 

each, that is, the morbid physical conditions which they 
severally represent. Under these two aspects the signs 
will now be considered. 



1. Absence of Resonance or Flatness. 

This sign is sufficiently denned by its name. It is ab- 
sence of resonance or sound. Nothing is heard but a 
noise such as may be produced by percussing over a solid 
mass, for example a limb composed of muscle and bone, 
or over a collection of liquid, for example the abdomen 
in hydro-peritoneum or ascites. There being no reson- 
ance or sound, the sign has no characters pertaining to 
pitch or quality. It may be illustrated on the healthy 
chest by percussing in the right infra-mammary region 
below the line of hepatic flatness. 

There are four classes of morbid physical conditions 
giving rise to flatness on percussion, namely, 1st, a cer- 
tain quantity of liquid in the pleural sac, in the substance 
of the lungs, or in pulmonary cavities : 2d, liquid filling 
the air vesicles ; 3d, complete solidification of lung ; and 
4th, a tumor within the chest. Flatness on percussion 
always represents one of these morbid physical conditions. 

These conditions are incidents to different diseases, as 
follows : — ■ 

1st. Liquid in the pleural cavity is incident to pleurisy 
with effusion, empyema, and hydrothorax. A collection 
of liquefied exudation within the lungs is incident to 
phthisis. A collection of pus constitutes pulmonary 
abscess, and phthisical cavities, or those caused by cir- 
cumscribed gangrene, may become filled with morbid 
liquid products. 

2d. Serous effusion into the air vesicles constitutes 



56 PERCUSSION IN DISEASE. 

pulmonary oedema. Liquid blood extravasated charac- 
terizes hemorrhagic infarctus, pneumorrhagia or pulmo- 
nary apoplexy. Pus infiltrating more or less of the 
parenchyma may be derived from an abscess either within 
the lung, or elsewhere, for example the liver, and from 
the pleural cavity in empyema w T hen perforation of lung 
takes place. 

3d. Solidification of lung occurs in pneumonia from 
an exudation within the air cells ; it is produced by con- 
densation from compression by liquid or air in the pleural 
sac, the pressure of a tumor, and by collapse ; it exists 
in cases of phthisis, in interstitial pneumonia, and in 
carcinomatous infiltration of lung. 

4th. Tumors within the chest are of different kinds, 
for examples, aneurisms and cancerous growths. In 
proportion to their size they occupy space belonging to 
the lung, as well as condensing the latter by pressure. 
Flatness may also be caused by the encroachment of 
organs situated below the diaphragm upon the thoracic 
space, as in cases of enlargement of the liver and spleen. 

Flatness on percussion in all these conditions is the 
same. The sign alone does not enable us to discriminate 
the conditions from each other, nor to determine the exist- 
ing disease. 

Finding this sign present, the particular condition and 
the disease in each case are to be determined by the 
situation of the flatness, its extent, the associated physi- 
cal signs furnished by auscultation, together with the 
other methods of exploration, and by the symptomatic 
events. 



DIMINISHED RESONANCE OR DULNESS. 57 

2. Diminished Resonance or Dulness. 

The resonance on percussion is diminished, or there is 
dulness, when the solids or liquids within the chest are 
morbidly increased without increase in the quantity of air, 
he increased amount of solids or liquids not being suf- 
ficient to cause flatness. Diminution of air, without in- 
crease of either solids or liquids, as in collapse of pulmo- 
nary lobules, also gives rise to dulness. We may formu- 
larize the physical conditions by saying that they consist 
in an abnormal proportion of solids or liquids over the 
air in the pulmonary vesicles. 

Dulness varies in degree. It may be slight, moderate, 
considerable, or great. These adjectives of quantity ex- 
press sufficiently the variations in this regard. The 
degree of dulness corresponds to the amount of the rela- 
tive disproportion of solids or liquids over the air within 
the chest. 

The pitch of sound is higher than that of the normal 
resonance of the persons percussed. This is invariable; 
with dulness there is always more or less elevation of 
pitch. The quality is altered only in amount ; there is, 
of course, less vesicular quality in proportion as the 
intensity of the resonance is diminished. 

The characters which distinguish this sign, thus, are, 
lessened intensity of resonance, elevation of pitch, and 
weakened vesicular quality. 

The morbid conditions giving rise to this sign are those 
which, existing in a greater degree, give rise to flatness. 
Morbid products within the pleural sac, serum, pus, lymph, 
if not sufficient to cause flatness, give rise to dulness. 
The sign, therefore, occurs in pleurisy, empyema, and 
hydrothorax. The same is true of pulmonary oedema, 



58 PERCUSSION IN DISEASE. 

hemorrhagic infarctus, pneumorrhagia and purulent infil- 
tration of lung. Solidification of lung, when not COm- 
plete, occasions dulness ; hence, it is a sign in pneumo- 
nia, vesicular and interstitial, in phthisis, in condensation 
of lung from compression, in collapse of pulmonary lob- 
ules, and in carcinomatous infiltration. A tumor within 
the chest, not sufficiently large to cause flatness, gives 
rise to dulness. 

There are, however, some conditions giving rise to 
dulness, which are never sufficient to cause flatness. 
Pulmonary congestion limited to a lobe may diminish the 
resonance appreciably. Thus dulness may exist in the 
first stage of pneumonia, before solidification from pneu- 
monic exudation has taken place. A thin layer of lymph 
upon the pleural surfaces causes dulness after the liquid 
effusion in pleurisy has been removed, and after the 
vesicular exudation in pneumonia is absorbed. Dulness 
may also be caused by a considerable accumulation of 
mucus or coagulated blood within the intra-pulmonary 
bronchial tubes. 

The particular morbid condition which gives rise to 
dulness cannot be inferred from the characters of the 
sign : the sign only denotes that some one of the differ- 
ent conditions exists. The condition which exists in each 
case, and the disease, are to be determined by the situa- 
tion, extent, and degree of dulness, taken in connection 
with the information derived from other methods of ex- 
ploration than percussion, together with the history and 
symptoms. 

3. Tympanitic Resonance. 

Resonance is tympanitic whenever it is entirely devoid 
of the vesicular quality ; in other words, any resonance 



TYMPANITIC RESONANCE. 59 

•which is non-vesicular is tympanitic. The leading dis- 
tinctive character of the preceding sign (dulness) relates 
to intensity, whereas, the leading distinctive character 
of this sign relates to quality. Tympanitic resonance 
derives no distinctive character from intensity ; it may 
be either more or less intense than the resonance of 
health in the person percussed. This point is to be 
impressed, inasmuch as with many the idea of a tympan- 
itic resonance involves increased intensity of sound ; a 
resonance, be it never so feeble, if it be non-vesicular, 
is tympanitic. If, however, the resonance be quite fee- 
ble, it is not always easy to determine whether there be, 
or be not, any appreciable vesicular quality. The term 
used by Stokes, namely, "tympanitic dulness," is pro- 
perly enough applied to a resonance with diminished in- 
tensity, in which a vesicular quality cannot be appreci- 
ated. As regards pitch, a tympanitic resonance is higher 
than the normal vesicular resonance. If there be any 
exceptions to this rule, they are extremely infrequent. 
The tympanitic resonance over different parts of the ab- 
domen is always higher in pitch than the resonance over 
healthy lung. 

The following are the morbid physical conditions which 
give rise to tympanitic resonance : — 

1st. Air in the pleural cavity. It is, therefore, a 
sign of pneumothorax. Frequently, in this affection, the 
tympanitic resonance is more intense than the resonance 
of health, the pitch being more or less raised. 

2d. Pulmonary cavities containing air. It occurs 
therefore in cases of phthisis. In this disease the tym- 
panitic resonance is limited to a circumscribed space cor- 
responding to the site and size of the cavity, whereas, 



60 PERCUSSION lis DISEASE. 

in pneumothorax, it frequently exists over a considerable 
part or the whole of the affected side of the chest. 

3d. Complete solidification of the whole or a part of 
the upper lobe of a lung. The tympanitic resonance, 
under these circumstances, must be derived from the air 
in the lower part of the trachea and the bronchial tubes 
exterior to the lungs. This is the explanation of the 
sign in the second stage of pneumonia affecting an upper 
lobe, and in certain cases of phthisis prior to the stage 
of excavation. Dilatation of the intra-pulmonary bron- 
chial tubes, with solidification surrounding them, as in 
some cases of interstitial pneumonia or cirrhosis of lung, 
may give rise to tympanitic resonance. 

Ath. Conduction of resonance from the stomach or 
colon containing air or gas. A gastric tympanitic reso- 
nance is frequently conducted over a part, and sometimes 
over the whole, of the left side of the chest. This is 
more likely to occur when the left lung is solidified and 
rendered thereby a better conductor of sound. On the 
right side less frequently a tympanitic resonance may be 
conducted upward from the colon to a greater or less 
extent. 

4. Vesiculo-Tympanitic Resonance. 

This name was proposed by the author many years 
ago to denote a sign with the following distinctive char- 
acters : The resonance increased in intensity ; the 
quality, a combination of the vesicular with the tympan- 
itic, and the pitch high in proportion as the tympanitic 
quality predominates over the vesicular. 

This sign represents especially one morbid plrysical 
condition, namely, an abnormal accumulation of air in 



AMPHORIC RESONANCE. 61 

consequence of dilatation of the air vesicles, that is, pul- 
monary or vesicular emphysema. The sign also is pre- 
sent in interstitial or interlobular emphysema. The 
relation of the sign to these affections renders it of great 
value in physical diagnosis. 

A vesiculotympanitic resonance is obtained, when 
the pleural sac is partially filled with liquid, by percuss- 
ing over the lung on the affected side. Although the 
pressure of the liquid diminishes the volume of the lung, 
as a rule it yields this sign. The resonance is vesiculo- 
tympanitic above the liquid when the latter is sufficient 
to fill a third, a half, or even two-thirds of the intra- 
thoracic space. The sign is also obtained over the upper 
lobe when the lower lobe is solidified in the second stage 
of pneumonia, and over the lower lobe when the upper 
lobe is solidified. 

5. Amphoric Resonance. 

Resonance is said to be amphoric when it has a musi- 
cal intonation analogous to that produced by blowing 
over the mouth of an empty bottle. An amphoric sound 
is easily illustrated by filliping the cheek made tense, 
the mouth not completely closed, and the jaws separated, 
as is done when the sound of a liquid flowing from a 
bottle is imitated. By varying the size of the cavity of 
the mouth, the amphoric sound thus produced may be 
made to vary much in pitch. This illustration exempli- 
fies the mechanism of the sign in disease. 

The sign represents a pulmonary cavity which is gene- 
rally phthisical. The conditions, aside from the exist- 
ence of the cavity, are, rigidity of its walls, so that they 
do not collapse, the presence, of course, of air within the 
6 



62 PERCUSSION IN DISEASE. 

cavity, and free communications with the bronchial tubes. 
These accessory conditions are not constant, so that an 
amphoric resonance over a cavity is sometimes found, 
and other times wanting. Directly after having been 
wanting, it may be reproduced if the patient expectorate 
freely. 

When percussion is made with reference to this sign, 
the mouth of the patient should be open, and one or two 
rather forcible blows are better than a series of four or 
six. The amphoric sound may be often distinctly per- 
ceived if the ear be brought into close proximity to the 
patient's open mouth, when the sign is not appreciable 
otherwise. It may be rendered still more distinct by 
means of the binaural stethoscope, the pectoral extremity 
being close to the mouth of the patient. 

As a cavernous sign the amphoric resonance is very 
reliable ; but it does not invariably denote a pulmonary 
cavity. It is obtained in some cases of pneumothorax, 
the pleural space filled with air forming a cavity which 
communicates with the bronchial tubes through a perfor- 
ation of the lung situated above the level of the liquid. 
It is sometimes obtained over a solidified portion of lung 
situated in close proximity to a primary bronchus, the 
resonance being derived from the air within the latter. 
It is occasionally produced by percussing over the site 
of the primary bronchus in the second stage of pneu- 
monia affecting an upper lobe. In children, owing to the 
yielding of the costal cartilages, it may even be produced 
in health over a primary bronchus. In all these excep- 
tional instances, the associated signs and symptoms will 
prevent the error of attributing the sign to a pulmonary 
cavity. 

This sign is properly a variety of tympanitic resonance. 



CRACKED-METAL RESONANCE. 68 



6. Cracked-metal Resonance. 

The name of this sign, expressing an analogy to the 
sound produced by striking a cracked metallic vessel, 
denotes its peculiar character. It may be imitated by 
folding the hands so as to form a cavity and striking them 
upon the knee, in the familiar trick of producing in this 
way a sound as if metal coins were between the palms. 
This illustration, also, exemplifies the mechanism of the 
sign. Like the sign last described, it is a variety of 
tympanitic resonance. 

The cracked-metal, like the amphoric, resonance repre- 
sents generally a phthisical cavity. Percussion is to be 
made in the same way as for the production of the am 
phoric resonance, and, like the latter, the cracked-metal 
character is often perceived if the ear be brought close 
to the patient's mouth when otherwise it is not appre- 
ciable. 

The cracked-metal and the amphoric resonance are 
often associated ; and the statements made with respect 
to the exceptional instances in which the latter is pro- 
duced, without the existence of a pulmonary cavity, will 
apply equally to the former. 

In addition to the acoustic phenomena produced by 
percussion, with the fingers applied to the chest instead 
of a pleximeter, the percussor can appreciate an abnor- 
mal sense of resistance in certain conditions of disease. 
In health, with a somewhat forcible percussion, the 
walls of the chest are felt to yield in proportion as the 
costal cartilages are flexible. This yielding is dimin- 
ished or ceases when a collection of liquid in the pleural 
cavity, or liquid in the air vesicles, and solidification of 



64 PERCUSSION IN DISEASE. 

lung, offer a mechanical obstacle thereto. An abnormal 
sense of resistance on percussion, thus determinable by 
comparison of the two sides of the chest, is a sign repre- 
senting some one of the morbid physical conditions just 
named. This properly belongs among the signs obtained 
by palpation. The sign is to be taken in connection 
with other signs in determining the condition which exists 
in particular cases. 



AUSCULTATION IN HEALTH. 65 



CHAPTER IV. 

AUSCULTATION IN HEALTH. 

Importance of the study of the auscultatory sounds in health — Imme- 
diate and mediate auscultation — Advantages of the binaural stetho- 
scope — Rules to be observed in auscultation — Divisions of the study of 
auscultation in health — The normal laryngeal and tracheal respiration 

— The normal vesicular murmur; its distinctive characters; and the 
variations in the different regions on the same side, and in correspond- 
ing regions on the two sides of the chest — The normal vocal resonance 

— The laryngeal and tracheal voice and whisper — The normal thoracic 
vocal resonance and fremitus ; the distinctive characters of each ; the 
variations in different regions on the same side, and in corresponding 
regions on the two sides of the chest — The normal bronchial whisper, 
with its variations in different regions on the same side, and in corres- 
ponding regions on the two sides of the chest. 

The term auscultation, limited in its application to the 
respiratory system, denotes the act of listening to the 
normal and abnormal sounds produced by respiration, 
voice, and cough. In this and the next chapter, the 
method of exploration thus named will be considered in 
its application to the respiratory system ; it will be con- 
sidered subsequently, as applied to sounds relating to 
the circulatory system. 

The study of auscultatory sounds in health is essential 
as preparatory for the study of auscultation in disease. 
The student must be familiar with the normal sounds be- 
fore undertaking to become acquainted with those which 
represent morbid conditions. Ample time and attention 
should be given to the study of auscultation in health. 
The omission to do this is a frequent cause of difficulty 

6* 



66 AUSCULTATION IN HEALTH. 

and want of success in attaining to a satisfactory profi- 
ciency in physical diagnosis. The practical tact and 
skill required in diagnosis may be obtained in advance 
by devoting sufficient study to the healthy chest before 
entering on the study of the auscultatory signs of disease. 
Moreover, as will be seen, some of the most important 
morbid signs have their analogues in certain normal 
sounds pertaining to the respiratory system. 

Auscultation is either immediate or mediate. It is 
immediate when the ear is applied directly to the chest, 
which may be either denuded or covered with a cloth or 
more or less of the clothing. It is mediate when the 
sounds are conducted to the ear by means of an instru- 
ment called a stethoscope. The student should practise 
both immediate and mediate auscultation. The direct 
application of the ear to the chest suffices for diagnosis 
in many cases of disease ; but there are sometimes ob- 
jections to this by the patient on the score of delicacy, 
and by the auscultator on the score of the uncleanliness of 
the person examined. There are certain parts of the 
chest which can only be explored by a stethoscope, and 
this instrument has the advantage of circumscribing the 
space whence the auscultatory sounds are derived. More- 
over, by means of the stethoscope which is to be pre- 
ferred over the great variety of instruments heretofore 
in use, the sounds are heard much better than by imme- 
diate auscultation. 

The stethoscope which is to be preferred conducts the 
sounds into both ears, that is, it is binaural. In this con- 
sists its great superiority. At the present time what is 
known as Cammann's stethoscope 1 seems to combine more 

1 Invented by the late Dr. Cammann, of New York. 



AUSCULTATION IN HEALTH. 67 

recommendations than any other form of a binaural instru- 
ment. The conduction into both ears renders the sounds 
much louder and more distinct than when they are heard 
with one ear in either mediate or immediate auscultation. 
Another advantage is, the mind is not distracted by 
sounds entering the ear not employed in auscultation. 
The advantages, however, of Cammann's stethoscope are 
not appreciated until after some practice. At first, a 
humming sound is heard which divides the attention and 
thus obscures the intra-thoracic sounds. After a little 
practice this humming sound is not heeded, and it ceases 
to be any obstacle. Many who use the instrument only 
a few times are dissatisfied with it, and discontinue its 
use, when, if they had used it longer, they would not have 
been willing to dispense with it. The author's experi- 
ence with a large number of classes in private instruc- 
tion has been this : at first, most members of a class 
prefer the ear applied directly to the chest; but, before 
the course of instruction is ended, the binaural stetho- 
scope is so much preferred that it is difficult to enforce a 
fair proportion of practice in immediate auscultation. 

Another reason for the fact that this stethoscope is not 
sufficiently appreciated in this country is, many of the 
instruments sold are defectively made. Unless proper 
attention has been paid to all the nice points of the 
stethoscope as devised by Cammann, an instrument is 
worthless. An instrument must be very good, or it is 
without any value. The knobs which are to enter the 
ears must be of the right size ; if they enter too far they 
occasion pain. The curves at the aural extremity must 
be such that the aperture is in the direction of the meatus 
of the ear. The flexible tubes must not be stiff', and 
their movements must be noiseless. All the tubes must 



68 AUSCULTATION IN HEALTH. 

be unobstructed, for it is the air within the tubes which 
chiefly conducts the sounds. In the use of the instru- 
ment it should be applied to the chest without any inter- 
vening clothing. 1 

The rules to be observed in the practice of ausculta- 
tion, in health and disease, may be here introduced. 

In auscultation, as in percussion, corresponding situa- 
tions on the two sides of the chest are to be explored 
successively, and compared. When the stethoscope is 
used, the pectoral extremity must be applied on each side 
with the same degree of pressure ; this is especially 
essential in the comparison of vocal sounds. In imme- 
diate auscultation, the ear is to be applied with a certain 
degree of force, and a thin layer of clothing does not 
interfere materially with the perception of auscultatory 
sounds. The ear not applied to the chest may or may 
not be closed by the finger in listening to the respira- 
tory sounds ; it should be closed in listening to the vocal 
sounds, in order to prevent confusion from attention to 
the voice from the patient's mouth. In immediate aus- 
cultation, whenever practised, the auscultator should take 
a position which will not interfere with the sense of 
hearing, and not occasion a feeling of discomfort. These 
difficulties are in the way of auscultating with the body 
bent forward ; the sense of hearing is dulled by the de- 
tention of blood in the head, and the position cannot be 
maintained without discomfort. The person examined, 
if practicable, should be sitting, and the position for the 
auscultator is that of kneeling on one knee, and lowering, 
if necessary, the body, so that the head may be kept up- 
right. These points are less important if the binaural 
stethoscope be used. 

1 The stethoscopes made by Tiemaim & Co. are reliable. 



AUSCULTATION IN HEALTH. 69 

"When listening to respiratory sounds, it is generally 
desirable that the person examined should breathe with 
somewhat greater force than in ordinary breathing ; but 
it is important that the normal rhythm of respiration 
should be unchanged. Persons when requested to breathe 
with increased force are apt to err in breathing vio- 
lently, and sometimes too slowly. The readiest mode of 
obtaining what is desired, is for the examiner to illustrate 
it by his own breathing. A complete expiration is impor- 
tant in order to secure a satisfactory inspiration. It 
should, therefore, be made clear, by explanation and 
illustration, that each expiration should be finished be- 
fore the following inspiration. 

The ability to abstract the mind from thoughts and other 
sounds than those to which the attention is to be directed, 
is essential to success in auscultation. All persons do 
not possess equally this ability, and herein is an explana- 
tion in part of the fact that all are not alike successful. 
To develop and cultivate by practice the power of con- 
centration, is an object which the student should keep 
in view. Generally, at first, complete .stillness in the 
room is indispensable for the study of auscultatory 
sounds ; with practice, however, in concentrating the at- 
tention, this becomes less and less essential. 

The study of auscultation in health embraces the fol- 
lowing : — 

1. The sounds produced by respiration as heard over 
the larynx and trachea, or the normal laryngeal and 
tracheal respiration. 

2. The sounds heard over the chest in the acts of res- 
piration. These sounds, coming chiefly from the air- 



70 AUSCULTATION IN HEALTH. 

vesicles, constitute what is called the normal vesicular 
murmur. 

3. The resonance, as heard over the chest, and the 
vibration or thrill produced by the loud voice, or the 
normal vocal resonance and fremitus. 

4. The sounds, as heard over the chest with the whis- 
pered voice, or, inasmuch as these sounds are conducted 
chiefly by the air in the bronchial tubes, the normal 
bronchial whisper. 

These four normal signs will be considered in the fore- 
going order. 

Normal Laryngeal and Tracheal Respiration. 

For all practical purposes the laryngeal and the tracheal 
respiration may be considered to be identical, that is, the 
shades of difference between the sounds in these two situ- 
ations are not of importance as regards the application 
to physical diagnosis. The laryngeal respiration is more 
readily studied than the tracheal, and, for the study of 
both, the stethoscope is necessary. 

Applying the stethoscope over the side of the larynx, 
the person examined breathing with some increase of 
force, but without any alteration in rhythm, a sound is 
heard with each of the two acts of respiration. The 
inspiratory and the expiratory sound, studied separately 
and contrasted with each other, have the following char- 
acters relating to intensity, pitch, quality, duration, and 
rhythm: The inspiratory sound is of variable intensity. 
In ordinary breathing it varies much in different persons, 
and in different acts of breathing in the same person. 
It is always considerably intense in forced breathing. 
The pitch is high when compared with the inspiratory 



NORMAL LARYNGEAL RESPIRATION. 71 

sound as heard over the chest. The quality of the 
sound is well defined by the word tubular; the sound at 
once suggests a current of air through a tube. The 
duration of the sound is from the beginning to nearly, 
not quite, the end of the inspiratory act. The characters 
of the inspiratory sound, thus, are more or less intensity, 
a high pitch, a tubular quality, and a duration a little 
less than that of the act of inspiration. 

An expiratory sound is always heard with forced 
breathing. As regards duration, it is as long as, or 
longer than, the sound of inspiration. In general it is 
more intense than the sound of inspiration. The pitch 
is higher than that of the inspiratory sound. The quality 
is the same as that of the inspiratory sound, namely, 
tubular. 

Repeating the characters distinctive of the normal 
laryngeal respiration, they are as follows : The inspira- 
tory sound is of variable intensity, high in pitch, and 
tubular in quality. The expiratory sound is as long as, 
or longer than, the inspiratory sound; it is higher in 
pitch, and usually more intense. Owing to the inspira- 
tory sound not continuing quite to the end of the inspira- 
tory act, there is a very short ^interval between the two 
sounds. In this latter point consists the only variation 
between the rhythm of the acts of breathing and that of 
the sounds. 

The foregoing characters should not only be verified 
by the student, but he should become so familiar with 
them by practice that it requires no effort of the mind to 
recollect them. It will be seen hereafter that these 
characters of the normal laryngeal respiration are pre- 
cisely those which distinguish an important morbid phys- 
ical sign, namely, the bronchial or tubular respiration. 



72 AUSCULTATION IN HEALTH. 

Normal Vesicular Murmur. 

This is the name usually given to the respiratory 
sounds heard over the different regions of the chest. 
These sounds should be studied with the ear applied 
directly to the chest (immediate auscultation), as well 
as with the stethoscope. In commencing the study, the 
middle of the anterior surface of the chest on the ris;ht 
side, to avoid the sounds of the heart, or, still better, 
the posterior aspect below the scapula on either side, 
should be selected. The person examined should breathe 
somewhat more forcibly than in ordinary breathing, but 
not violently or quickly, nor too slowly, the normal 
rhythm being unchanged. Children are better than 
adults for this study, owing to the greater intensity of 
the murmur in early life. 

The characters which belong to the inspiratory and 
the expiratory sound in the normal vesicular murmur 
are as follows : The inspiratory sound is of variable in- 
tensity. There is a wide variation in different healthy 
persons. In some persons it is so feeble as scarcely to 
be appreciable even with the binaural stethoscope. The 
pitch of the sound, compared with the inspiratory sound 
in the normal laryngeal or tracheal respiration, is nota- 
bly low. The quality of the sound is peculiar; no dis- 
tinct idea of the quality can be formed by any com- 
parison. The name used to designate the quality is 
vesicular, this name only denoting that the air vesicles 
are in some way concerned in the production of the sound. 
This vesicular quality must be impressed upon the per- 
ception and memory by direct observation. The duration 
of the inspiratory sound is from the beginning to the end 
of the inspiratory act. 



NORMAL VESICULAR MURMUR. 73 

An expiratory sound is not always, although generally, 
appreciable. It is much less intense than the sound of 
inspiration. It is notably lower in pitch than the sound 
of inspiration. The quality of the sound is neither vesicu- 
lar nor tubular. It may be called simply a blowing 
sound, and may be imitated by blowing with the mouth 
partially opened. The duration is much shorter than 
that of the inspiratory sound. 

The characters, thus, which distinguish the normal 
vesicular murmur are, an inspiratory sound variable in 
intensity, low in pitch, and vesicular in quality ; an ex- 
piratory sound less intense than the inspiratory, still 
lower in pitch, non-vesicular and non-tubular, or simply 
blowing ; the inspiratory sound continuing from the be- 
ginning to the end of the inspiratory act, and the expira- 
tory sound beginning with the expiratory act but ending 
before this act is completed, its duration, relatively to 
the inspiratory sound, being variable, but averaging 
about a fifth. The inspiratory sound continuing to the 
end of inspiration, and the expiratory sound beginning 
with the act of expiration, it follows that there is no in- 
terval between the two sounds. It is to be remarked 
that an interval is not infrequently produced by the per- 
son examined holding the breath after inspiration is com- 
pleted. This variation in the rhythm of the acts, of 
course, produces a corresponding variation in sounds of 
breathing. 

The student should verify these characters, compare 
them with the characters of the normal laryngeal respir- 
ation, and become practically familiar with the differen- 
tial points. He should then proceed to study the normal 
vesicular murmur in the different regions of the chest. 
The murmur will be found to present variations in the 
7 



74 AUSCULTATION IN HEALTH. 

different regions on the same side, and in the correspond- 
ing regions on the two sides of the chest. The variations, 
within the range of health, in the latter are especially 
important. The following account of the murmur in the 
different regions embodies the results of the analysis of 
a series of recorded examinations of healthy persons. 

Right and Left Infra-clavicular Region. — -The mur- 
mur in this region, on either side, differs more or less 
from the murmur as heard in the anterior regions below, 
or in the infra-scapular region. The vesicular quality 
in the inspiration is less marked. The pitch is higher. 
The expiratory sound is longer, less feeble, and higher 
in pitch. The difference between the two sides in this 
region is especially important with reference to diagnosis. 
The intensity of the inspiratory sound is almost invaria- 
bly greater on the left side. Its vesicular quality is 
more marked, and the pitch is lower. Per contra, the 
inspiratory sound on the right side, in this region, is less 
intense, less vesicular, and higher in pitch than the in- 
spiratory sound on the left side. In forced breathing 
the intensity of the murmur is increased more on the 
left than on the right side. The expiratory sound is 
sometimes wanting on the left, when it is heard on the 
right side. On the right side, the expiratory sound is 
longer than on the left side. It may be prolonged on 
the right side to nearly or quite the length of the inspi- 
ratory sound. Sometimes on the right side the pitch of 
the expiratory is higher than that of the inspiratory on 
the same side, and it may have a tubular quality. A 
rare peculiarity is a prolonged, high, tubular expiratory 
sound on both sides, analogous to the laryngeal or tra- 
cheal expiration. When this is the case, the pitch of 



NORMAL VESICULAR MURMUR. 75 

the expiratory sound is higher on the left than on the 
right side. 

These several modifications of the respiratory murmur 
in the infra-clavicular region are marked in proportion as 
the sounds are studied near the sternum, that is, over the 
site of the primary bronchi. The respiratory murmur in 
this situation has been called the normal bronchial respira- 
tion, from its resemblance to the morbid sign so named. 
It may be more properly called a vesiculo-tubular, or the 
normal broncho-vesicular respiration, the characters being 
those of the morbid sign which, under the latter name, 
will be described in the next chapter. 

In the diagnosis of diseases, especially of phthisis, due 
allowance must be made for the points of disparity which 
exist normally between the two sides of the chest in the 
infra-clavicular region. Without a practical knowledge 
of these points of disparity, error in diagnosis can hardly 
be avoided. 

Right and Left Scapular Region. — As compared with 
the infra-clavicular region, the respiratory murmur heard 
over the scapula on either side is feeble, and the vesicu- 
lar quality is less marked. The inspiratory sound is 
generally weaker and the pitch higher on the right than 
on the left side. The expiratory sound is more con- 
stantly heard on the right than on the left side. It may 
be prolonged on the right side, and is sometimes higher 
in pitch than the inspiratory sound. Compared with the 
left side, the murmur on the right, in this region, thus 
may have vesiculo-tubular or broncho-vesicular charac- 
ters more or less marked. 

Right and Left Inter-scapular Region, — In the upper 
and middle portions of this region, the normal characters 
are the same as in the sterno-clavicular portion of infra- 



76 AUSCULTATION IN HEALTH. 

clavicular region. The same points of disparity between 
the two sides are more or less marked here as they are 
anteriorly over the site of the primary bronchi. 

Right and Left Infra-scapular Region. — The inten- 
sity of the murmur is greater than over the scapular re- 
gion. In most persons there is no notable disparity 
between the two sides ; when a disparity exists, the in- 
tensity is greater and the pitch lower on the left side. 
A prolonged, high pitched, bronchial expiratory sound 
is sometimes transmitted below the scapula on the right 
side. 

Rigid and Left Mammary and Infra-mammary Re- 
gions. — The inspiratory sound in these regions is less 
intense than in the infra-clavicular region ; the vesicular 
quality is more marked, and the pitch is lower. An ex- 
piratory sound is often wanting. 

Right and Left Axillary and Infra-axillary Re- 
gions. — The inspiratory sound in these regions is as in- 
tense as in any portion of the chest. The intensity is less 
in the infra-axillary than in the axillary region, and the 
pitch is lower. In some persons the murmur on the two 
sides presents no disparity, but in other persons the 
vesicular quality is somewhat more marked and the pitch 
is lower on the left than on the right side. An expira- 
tory sound is oftener heard than in the mammary and 
infra-mammary regions. 

Normal Vocal Resonance. 

Laryngeal and Trachea Voice. — It will prepare the 
student for the appreciation of the distinctive characters 
of the morbid signs pertaining to the voice, to study the 
vocal signs over the larynx and trachea. Applying the 



NORMAL VOCAL RESONANCE. 77 

stethoscope either over the broad surface of the thyroid 
cartilage, or just above the sternal notch, and requesting 
the person examined to count with a moderate intensity 
of voice, the auscultator perceives a strong resonance, with 
a sensation of concussion or shock, and a sense of vibra- 
tion, thrill, or fremitus. The voice seems to be concen- 
trated and near the ear. Sometimes the articulated words 
are transmitted so as to be heard more or less distinctly. 
The laryngeal or tracheal voice, thus (laryngophony, 
tracheophony) embraces different elements, namely, 1st, 
the vocal resonance : 2d, the concentration and nearness 
to the ear ; 3d, the vibration, thrill, or fremitus ; and 4th, 
the transmission of the speech, the latter corresponding 
to pectoriloquy. These different elements will be found 
to enter into the distinctive characters of morbid vocal 
signs. 

The sounds heard over the larynx and trachea when 
words are spoken in a whisper should be studied, inasmuch 
as important morbid signs relate to the whispered voice. 
Whispered words occasion little or no shock or thrill, but 
an intense, high pitched, tubular sound, with a sensation 
as if a current of air were directed into the ear through 
the stethoscope. This sound corresponds to the sound 
of expiration in laryngeal or tracheal respiration ; the 
two sounds are, in fact, identical if, as is the case with 
some exceptions, the person whisper with the expiratory 
breath. Articulated words are transmitted with more or 
less distinctness corresponding with the morbid sign called 
whispering pectoriloquy. 

Normal Thoracic Vocal Resonance and Fremitus. — 
The vocal resonance over the chest is to be studied both 
by means of the stethoscope and by immediate ausculta- 
tion. When the latter is employed, the ear not applied 

7* 



78 AUSCULTATION IN HEALTH. 

to the chest should be closed, in order to exclude the 
entrance of sound from the mouth of the person exam- 
ined. When the stethoscope is employed, care must be 
taken, in making a comparison between the two sides of 
the chest, or between different regions on the same side, 
that the pectoral extremity of the instrument be pressed 
with an equal amount of force against the chest. The 
intensity with which the vocal resonance is transmitted, 
is much affected by the degree of pressure with the 
stethoscope. 

The situations in which the student should commence 
the study of the normal vocal resonance are those selected 
for beginning the study of the normal vesicular murmur, 
namely, the middle of the anterior aspect, of the chest 
on the right side, and below the scapula behind. 

With the stethoscope or the ear directly applied in 
the situations just named, the person examined should 
be requested to count one, two, three, in a uniform tone, 
and with moderate force. The examiner should himself 
pronounce these numerals, in order to show the manner 
of counting. This is far better than asking a question 
and studying the resonance during the answer of the 
person examined. The objection to the latter mode is, 
the attention of the examiner is divided between the 
characters of the thoracic resonance and the idea con- 
veyed by the answer. The characters of the vocal 
resonance in these situations are as follows: — 

The voice is heard with an intensity which varies very 
much in different persons ; in some the resonance is 
feeble, and it may be almost inappreciable, while in 
others it is quite intense. The intensity depends greatly 
on the loudness and lowness in pitch of the voice of the 
person examined. The resonance is notably weaker in 



NORMAL VOCAL RESONANCE. 79 

women than in men. It is rarely attended with a sense 
of concussion or shock. It is diffused; that is, it does 
not seem to be concentrated, like the tracheal or laryn- 
geal vocal resonance. It evidently comes from a certain 
distance ; that is, the sound does not seem to be near the 
ear. This latter character is distinctly appreciable, and 
is highly distinctive of the normal resonance as com- 
pared with a morbid vocal sign (bronchophony). The 
resonance is accompanied by a sense of vibration, thrill, 
or fremitus, the intensity of which, like the resonance, 
varies much in different persons. This fremitus is prop- 
erly not an acoustic but a tactile sign. The normal vocal 
fremitus, together with its abnormal modifications, belongs 
to the method of physical exploration called palpation. 
It is, however, appreciated by the ear as well as by the 
touch, and may be studied in the practice of ausculta- 
tion. The student should practically distinguish from 
each other, and study separately, the vocal resonance 
and vocal fremitus. 

From the foregoing characters the normal vocal reson- 
ance may be defined as, diffused, distant, variable in 
intensity, and accompanied with more or less vibration, 
thrill, or fremitus. 

Having become practically familiar with these char- 
acters of the normal vocal resonance in the situations in 
which they are first to be studied, the next object of 
study relates to the normal variations in the different 
regions on the same side of the chest, and in correspond- 
ing regions on the two sides. In giving an account of 
these variations, based on a series of recorded examina- 
tions in healthy persons, the different regions will be 
considered in the same order as in the study of the 
variations of the respiratory sounds (vide p. 74 et seq.). 



80 AUSCULTATION IN HEALTH. 

Infra-clavicular Region. — The vocal resonance in this 
region on either side is more intense than in the anterior 
regions below, the intensity, however, in different per- 
sons being very variable ; irrespective of intensity, it is 
less diffused, nearer the ear, and the pitch is somewhat 
higher. These latter variations are marked chiefly in 
the sterno-clavicular extremity of the region, that is, 
over the site of the primary bronchi. In some persons 
the concentration, nearness to the ear and elevation of 
pitch, especially on the right side, are such as to approxi- 
mate the normal resonance to the morbid sign called 
bronchophony. The characters of this sign will be con- 
sidered in the next chapter ; but it is important to know 
that exceptionally these characters may be, in a measure, 
illustrated in health in the infra-clavicular region. The 
resonance might then be termed normal bronchophony. 

A comparison of the resonance in the region on the 
right and on the left side always shows a disparity. The 
resonance on the right side is invariably greater. The 
degree of difference between the two sides varies in dif- 
ferent persons. The resonance may be more or less 
marked on the right and nearly wanting on the left side. 
Allowance is to be made for the points of normal dis- 
parity between the two sides in the diagnosis of disease ; 
hence the student must become practically familiar with 
them. 

The vocal vibration or fremitus varies fully as much as 
the vocal resonance in different persons. Its intensity is 
not always proportionate to that of the resonance ; that 
is, the resonance may be comparatively weak when the 
fremitus is strong, and vice versa. The fremitus, like 
the resonance, is always greater on the right than on the 



NORMAL VOCAL RESONANCE. 81 

left side, the disparity, like that of the resonance, vary- 
ing considerably in different persons. 

Scapular Region. — The resonance in this region is 
notably less intense than in the infra-clavicnlar region. 
It is also more diffused and distant. The intensity is 
always greater on the right side. These statements are 
alike applicable to the vocal fremitus. 

Inter-scapular Region. — The intensity of the reso- 
nance here is nearly or quite as great as in the sterno- 
clavicular extremity of the infra-clavicular region. The 
resonance has in some persons in this region the charac- 
ters of bronchophony. The intensity is always greater 
on the right side. The fremitus is more or less marked, 
and always more marked on the right than on the left 
side. 

Infra- scapular Region. — As a rule, the resonance in 
this region is stronger than over the scapula. It is 
always characterized by diffusion and distance. As in 
all the regions it varies much in different persons, and is 
stronger on the right than on the left side. These state- 
ments are also applicable to fremitus. 

Mammary and Infra-mammary Regions. — The reso- 
nance is notably less than at the summit of the chest. 
The characters of bronchophony are never present. The 
intensity is greater on the right side. The same is true 
of fremitus. . 

Axillary and Infra-axillary Regions. — The reso- 
nance in these regions, and especially in the axillary 
region, is greater than over the mammary and infra- 
mammary regions. It is, of course, stronger on the 
right side. The characters, as contrasted with those of 
bronchophony, namely, distance and diffusion, are mark- 



82 AUSCULTATION IN HEALTH. 

ed. Fremitus is more or less marked, and, of course, 
more marked on the right than on the left side. 

Normal Bronchial Whisper. 

Prior to the publication of the author's work on the 
" Physical Exploration of the Chest," in 1856, signs in 
health and disease relating to the whispered voice had 
received but little attention. In that work, and more 
fully in the second edition, published in 1866, a series 
of signs accompanying whispered words were described 
and named. As a point of departure for the study of 
the morbid signs thus obtained, of course the signs in 
health must first be studied. The sounds which are 
heard over different parts of the chest in health I have 
embraced under the name, the normal bronchial whisper. 
The pertinency of this name is derived from the fact that 
the conduction of the sound produced by the whispered 
voice must be chiefly by the air contained in the bronchial 
tubes. The sound heard over the trachea and larynx 
may be distinguished as the laryngeal or tracheal whisper, 
the characters of which have been already stated (vide 
page 77). 

It will facilitate the study of the normal bronchial 
whisper, as well as of the morbid signs, to consider that 
the characters of the sounds produced with the whispered 
voice, are identical with those produced by the act of 
expiration, in all respects, save intensity. Whispered 
words are produced, as a rule, by an act of expiration, 
the sounds being more intense generally than those which 
accompany even forced breathing. Curiously enough, 
there are exceptions to this rule. Some persons insist 
upon whispering with the act of inspiration, and there 



NORMAL BRONCHIAL WHISPER. 83 

are some persons who have never acquired the ability to 
whisper. It will be at once evident that the pitch and 
quality of sounds produced by whispered words with the 
act of expiration, must be the same as those of the sounds 
of expiration in breathing. 

Selecting for beginning the study of the normal bron- 
chial whisper the same situations as in commencing the 
study of the normal respiratory murmur, and the normal 
vocal resonance, namely, the middle of the chest in front, 
on the right side, and the infra-scapular region behind, 
with the whispered voice in these situations is heard, in 
most persons, a feeble, low-pitched, blowing sound, these 
characters corresponding to those of the expiratory sound 
in forced breathing. The normal bronchial whisper in 
these situations is not in all persons appreciable. 

In the infra-clavicular region, the bronchial whisper is 
heard, with variable intensity, in most persons. It is 
somewhat higher in pitch than the whisper below this 
region. It is louder and higher in the sterno-clavicular 
than in the acromial extremity. In the former situation 
it has not infrequently a tubular quality. It is louder 
on the right than on the left side of the chest. It is 
sometimes heard on the right when it is inappreciable on 
the left side. When heard on both sides the pitch of the 
sound is higher on the left than on the right side. It 
will be observed that these variations correspond to 
those of the sound with expiration in the infra-clavicular 
region (vide page 75). Occasionally whispered words 
are partly transmitted, constituting incomplete whisper- 
ing pectoriloquy. 

In the scapular region the bronchial whisper is not 
infrequently wanting. It may be present on the right 



84 AUSCULTATION IN HEALTH. 

and not on the left side, and, if present on both sides, it 
is always louder on the right side. 

In the inter-scapular region, as a rule, it is nearly or 
quite as marked as over the site of the primary bronchi 
in front. The pitch is more or less high, and has a 
tubular quality. It is louder on the right and higher in 
pitch on the left side, and in this situation there may be 
incomplete pectoriloquy. 

In the infra-scapular region, it is not infrequently 
wanting. When present, it is generally feeble, the pitch 
being low and the quality non-tubular or having. It is 
oftener wanting on the left than on the right side, and, 
if present on both sides, it is louder on the right side. 

In the mammary and infra-mammary regions it is not 
infrequently wanting, and the statements just made with 
reference to the infra-scapular region are alike applicable 
to these, as, also, to the axillary and infra-axillary 



AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 85 



CHAPTER V. 
AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

The respiratory signs of disease: — Abnormal modifications of the normal 
respiratory sounds : — Increased vesicular murmur — Diminished vesicu- 
lar murmur — Suppressed respiratory sound — Bronchial or tubular 
respiration — Broncho- vesicular respiration — Cavernous respiration — 
Broncho-cavernous respiration — Vesiculo-cavernous respiration — Am- 
phoric respiration — Shortened inspiration — Prolonged expiration — 
Interrupted respiration. Adventitious respiratory sounds or rales: — 
Laryngeal and tracheal rales — Moist bronchial rales, coarse, fine, and 
subcrepitant — Vesicular or crepitant rale — Cavernous or gurgling rale 
— Pleural friction rales, metallic tinkling and splashing. Indetermi- 
nate rales — The vocal signs of disease : — Bronchophony — Whispering 
bronchophony — iEgophony — Increased vocal resonance — Increased 
bronchial whisper — Cavernous whisper — Pectoriloquy — Amphoric voice 
or echo — Diminished and suppressed vocal resonance — Diminished and 
suppressed vocal fremitus — Metallic tinkling. Signs obtained by acts 
of coughing or tussive signs. 

The importance of becoming perfectly familiar with 
the signs of health before entering upon the study of 
morbid signs, cannot be too strongly enforced. The 
auscultatory signs of disease, which are to be considered 
in this chapter, should not be studied until the student 
has made himself complete master of all the characters 
belonging to the normal signs obtained by auscultation. 

Auscultation in disease embraces the signs produced 
by respiration, by the voice, and by acts of coughing. 
The respiratory signs will be first considered. 



85 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

The Respiratory Signs of Disease. 

The signs produced by respiration may be classified 
as follows : 1st. Those which are abnormal modifications 
of the normal respiratory sounds. 2d. Those which 
have no analogues in health, being entirely new or ad- 
ventitious sounds. The latter are embraced under the 
name rales. 

Abnormal Modifications of the Normal Respiratory Sounds. 

In order to appreciate the distinctive characters of 
the signs embraced in this class, the characters which 
distinguish the normal vesicular murmur must be kept 
in mind. The abnormal modifications which characterize 
these morbid signs relate to intensity, pitch, and quality 
of sound, together with certain alterations in rhythm. 
Twelve modifications or signs are included under this 
heading, namely: 1. Increased vesicular murmur; 2. 
Diminished vesicular murmur ; 3. Suppression of respira- 
tory sound; 4. Bronchial or tubular respiration; 5. 
Broncho-vesicular respiration ; 6. Vesiculocavernous re- 
spiration; 7. Cavernous respiration; 8. Broncho- cavern- 
ous respiration ; 9. Amphoric respiration; 10. Shortened 
inspiration; 11. Prolonged expiration; and, 12. Inter- 
rupted inspiration or expiration. 

These signs are to be studied, first, with reference to 
their distinctive characters severally, each being con- 
tracted, as respects these characters, with the other 
morbid respiratory signs as well as with the normal 
vesicular murmur; and, second, with reference to the 
morbid physical conditions which the}' represent, that is, 
the diagnostic significance which belongs to each. 



MODIFICATIONS OF NORMAL SOUNDS. 87 

Increased Vesicular Murmur. — This si^n has but a 
single distinctive character, namely, increase of intensity. 
The murmur is abnormally loud, the characters of the 
normal vesicular murmur being in other respects not 
materially changed, that is, the pitch is low and the 
quality vesicular as in health. Now, it has been seen 
(vide page 73) that the intensity of the healthy murmur 
varies much in different persons ; there is no ideal 
standard of normal intensity by reference to which an 
abnormal increase is to be determined. Yet, the increase 
under certain conditions of disease is such that the fact 
is sufficiently evident. It occurs on the healthy side of 
the chest when the respiratory function on the other side 
is annulled or much compromised by disease. This takes 
place in cases of pleurisy with large effusion, pneumonia, 
especially if more than one lobe be affected, obstruction 
of one of the primary bronchi, and pneumothorax. The 
sign does not possess great diagnostic importance, inas- 
much as the nature and extent of the disease are ascer- 
tained by the signs obtained on the affected side. 

The sign has been called supplementary and puerile 
respiration. 

If the murmur be much intensified, it may possibly be 
mistaken for other morbid signs, namely, bronchial or 
broncho-vesicular respiration. This error, however, can 
never be made if the distinctive characters of these signs 
relating to pitch and quality have been correctly studied. 

Diminished Vesicular Murmur. — The intensity of 
the vesicular murmur may be on the one hand diminished, 
when it is evident that in other respects there is no 
material change, and the murmur, on the other hand, 
may become so feeble that characters aside from the 
intensity are not determinable. From the latter fact it 



88 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

follows that the murmur must sometimes be considered 
as only weakened, when, were the diminished intensity 
not as great, morbid changes in pitch and quality might 
be appreciable. 

The murmur is more or less weakened in cases of dila- 
tation of the air cells, or vesicular emphysema, the sign, 
in these cases, being often accompanied by changes in 
rhythm, namely, a shortened inspiration and a prolonged 
expiration. Simple weakness of the murmur may also 
be incident to partial blocking of the air vesicles with 
blood or serum in cases of pulmonary extravasation and 
oedema. A deficient expansion of the chest, either on 
one side or on both sides, occasions weakness of the res- 
piratory murmur. Deficient expansion of one side, or of 
both sides, may be caused by paralysis, bi-lateral, or 
unilateral, of the costal muscle 3. A similar effect is 
caused by paralysis of the diaphragm. The incomplete 
descent of the diaphragm from pain, as in peritonitis, or 
from mechanical obstacles, as in peritoneal dropsy, preg- 
nancy, and abdominal tumors, weakens the respiratory 
murmur, the increased action of the costal muscles not 
being fully compensatory. Unilateral deficiency of ex- 
pansion of the chest is caused by pain in intercostal neu- 
ralgia, pleurodynia, acute pleurisy, and pneumonia ; it 
is also caused by the presence of a stratum of liquid, air, 
or a thick layer of lymph between the lung and the chest- 
wall in pleurisy, hydrothorax and pneumothorax. Swell- 
ing of the bronchial mucous membrane in bronchitis 
affecting the larger tubes, must diminish somewhat the 
intensity of the murmur. In primary bronchitis, the 
murmur is diminished on both sides. In bronchitis affect- 
ing the smaller tubes, the murmur is greatly diminished, 
if not suppressed, on both sides. Incomplete obstruction 



MODIFICATIONS OF NORMAL SOUNDS. 89 

of bronchial tubes from the presence of mucus, serum, 
blood, or pus, has this effect over an area corresponding 
to the size of the tubes obstructed. Spasm of the bron- 
chial muscular fibres in paroxysms of asthma, diminishes, 
if it does not suppress, murmur on both sides. Another 
cause of diminution, unilateral, or within a limited space 
on one side, is the pressure of a tumor on bronchial tubes, 
as in cases of aneurism. A permanent contraction or 
stricture of bronchial tubes is another cause. Not in- 
frequently the pressure of an aneurismal tumor or an 
enlarged bronchial gland on a primary bronchus, occa- 
sions notable weakness of the murmur over the whole of 
one side ; and the pressure of a tumor on the trachea 
weakens the murmur, more or less, on both sides. A 
foreign body in one of the primary bronchi weakens it 
on one side. Diminution of the calibre of the trachea 
or larynx from morbid growths, the presence of foreign 
bodies, fibrinous exudation, accumulations of mucus, sub- 
mucous infiltration, spasm of the laryngeal muscles, and 
swelling of the mucous membrane, weakens, in propor- 
tion to the amount of obstruction, the murmur on both 
sides without any material change in its quality and 
pitch. 

Weakened murmur at the summit of the chest, with- 
out other appreciable abnormal characters, occurs in 
some cases of phthisis, due to obstructed bronchial tubes 
from coexisting circumscribed bronchitis, or to deficient 
superior costal movements of the chest, as well as to the 
presence of exudation in air vesicles. 

Diminished intensity of the vesicular murmur is thus 
seen to be a respiratory sign entering into the diagnosis 
of a considerable number of diseases, namely, emphy- 
sema, paralysis affecting the respiratory muscles, asthma, 

8* 



90 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

abdominal affections interfering with the diaphragmatic 
movements, intercostal neuralgia, pneumonia, hydro- 
thorax, bronchitis, asthma, aneurismal and other tumors, 
permanent constriction or stricture of bronchial tubes, 
laryngitis, oedema of the glottis, spasm of the glottis, the 
various lesions which occasion obstruction of the larynx 
or trachea, and phthisis. 

In determining a slight abnormal weakness of the res- 
piratory murmur at the summit of the chest on the right 
side, the normal disparity between the two sides in this 
situation is to be borne in mind. The vesicular murmur 
is normally less intense on the right than on the left side. 

This sign occurring in so many diseases, it is obvious 
that, taken alone, that is, independently of other signs, it 
has not any special diagnostic significance. It is, how- 
ever, often of value in diagnosis, when taken in connec- 
tion with other signs. It is chiefly useful when it 
exists either over the whole or in a part of the chest 
on one side. 

Suppressed Respiratory Sound. — This sign is easily 
defined, namely, absence of all respiratory sound, as 
the name signifies. It cannot, of course, have any char- 
acters relating to intensity, pitch, and quality. 

Suppression of respiratory sound represents the same 
physical conditions as dimininished vesicular murmur ; 
the physical conditions represented by the latter sign, 
existing in a greater degree, occasion absence of all 
sound. It suffices, therefore, to recapitulate the various 
conditions \nd diseases in connection with which the 
murmur may either be diminished or suppressed. Sup- 
pression over portions of the chest may be clue to dilata- 
tion of the air-cells in cases of emphysema. It occurs 
from the exclusion of air from the vesicles by the pre- 



MODIFICATIONS OF NORMAL SOUNDS. 91 

sence of blood and serum in cases of pulmonary extra- 
vasation and oedema. Respiratory sound is sometimes 
wanting over lung solidified in cases of pneumonia and 
phthisis. Paralysis of the muscles concerned in respira- 
tion may possibly involve feebleness of the respiratory 
acts sufficiently to render the murmur inappreciable. In 
intercostal neuralgia, pleurodynia, acute pleurisy, and 
pneumonia, the movements of the affected side may be 
so much restricted as to abolish the murmur. In pleu- 
risy with much effusion, empyema, hydrothorax, pneumo- 
thorax, the murmur is suppressed over either a part or 
the whole of the affected side, the extent of the suppres- 
sion corresponding to the quantity of serum, pus, or air 
within the pleural cavity. Swelling of the mucous mem- 
brane in cases of bronchitis affecting the larger bronchial 
tubes is never sufficient to suppress the murmur, but plug- 
ging of more or less of the tubes with mucus or other 
morbid products may have this effect. In cases of bron- 
chitis, the murmur is sometimes found to have disap- 
peared over a certain area, and to return after an act of 
expectoration. In bronchitis affecting the smaller tubes, 
suppression of the murmur is not infrequent. It occurs 
from spasm of the bronchial muscular fibres in cases of 
asthma. The pressure of a tumor, morbid growths, or 
deposits upon bronchi within the lungs, may abolish res- 
piratory sound over a portion of the chest, and perma- 
nent stricture or obliteration of bronchial tubes may have 
this effect. Respiratory sound may be suppressed over 
the whole of one side from the pressure of an aneurismal 
or some other tumor upon one of the primary bronchi. 
If the tumor press upon the trachea, the obstruction may 
be sufficient to suppress the murmur on both sides. A 
foreign body lodged in a primary bronchus may suppress 



92 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

the murmur on one side, and, lodged in the larynx or 
trachea, the murmur may be suppressed on both sides. 
The different affections of the larynx and trachea which, 
in proportion to the amount of obstruction, weaken the 
murmur, may render it inappreciable. 

Bronchial or Tubular Respiration. — The analogue of 
this sign is the normal laryngeal or tracheal respiration 
(vide page 70). The characters which distinguish the 
latter normal sign from the normal vesicular murmur, are 
those which are distinctive of the bronchial or tubular 
respiration. These characters, relating to the inspiratory 
and the expiratory sound, are as follows : The inspira- 
tory sound is of variable intensity. Intensity does not 
enter into the distinctive characters of this sign ; the 
sound may be either louder or weaker than the inspira- 
tory sound in health. The pitch of the inspiratory sound 
is high. The quality is expressed by the term tubular ; 
it is like the sound produced by blowing through a tube, 
this quality taking the place of that expressed by the 
term vesicular in the normal respiration. The expiratory 
sound is prolonged ; it is as long as, or longer than, the 
sound of expiration, and is usually louder. The pitch is 
still higher than that of the inspiratory sound. The 
quality, like that of the inspiratory sound, is tubular, 
this quality taking the place of the simple blowing quality 
of the expiratory sound in the normal vesicular murmur. 
With the normal rhythm of the respiratory acts, there is 
a very brief interval between the sounds of inspiration 
and expiration, due to the fact that the inspiratory sound 
ends a little before the end of the inspiratory act. 

The morbid physical condition represented by this im- 
portant sign is either complete or considerable solidifica- 
tion of lung. Whenever the chest is auscultated over 



MODIFICATIONS OF NORMAL SOUNDS. 93 

lung solidified, if there be not absence of respiratory 
sound, the sound is tubular. This significance renders 
the sis;n of diagnostic value in the diseases which involve 
solidification. The sign per se denotes simply this mor- 
bid physical condition ; the particular disease which ex- 
ists is ascertained by means of the associated signs and 
the symptoms. 

Solidification of lung is incident to several different 
diseases. In lobar pneumonia, it is due to a fibrinous 
exudation within the air vesicles. In phthisis it is caused 
by an exudation in the same situation. In chronic or 
fibroid pneumonia the lung is solidified by an interstitial 
growth. The compression of lung from either pleuritic 
effusion, an accumulation of air in the pleural cavity, or 
the pressure of a tumor, causes solidification by conden- 
sation. Collapse of pulmonary lobules also solidifies by 
condensation. Coagulation of blood within the air vesi- 
cles (hemorrhagic infarctus), and cancerous infiltration 
or growth, are other causes of solidification. In these 
different affections, if the solidification be complete or 
considerable, this sign is usually present ; it is always 
present if there be not suppression of respiratory sound. 

It is sometimes the case that either the inspiratory or 
the expiratory sound is wanting. The characters of the 
sign suffice for its recognition if either the inspiratory or 
the expiratory sound be alone present ; the pitch and 
the quality are distinctive. Both sounds are often so 
intense that they are diffused more or less without the 
limits of the solidified portion of lung. The expiratory 
sound, being more intense than the inspiratory, is trans- 
mitted further than the latter. This explains the con- 
junction sometimes of a vesicular inspiration with a 
tubular expiration; and a cavernous inspiration may be 



9-i AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

conjoined with a tubular expiration, showing the prox- 
imity of solidified lung in the former case to healthy 
lung, and, in the latter case, to a pulmonary cavity. 

The sound may seem near the ear or to come from a 
certain distance. The latter is appreciable in some cases 
of large pleuritic effusion ; the tubular respiration is more 
or less distant, and it is sometimes diffused over the 
whole of the side which is filled with liquid. 

Broncho-vesicular Respiration. — This name was intro- 
duced by me in 1856 to denote the combination, in vary- 
ing proportions, of the characters of the bronchial or 
tubular, and of the normal vesicular respiration. The 
name expresses such a combination. 

The sign represents the different degrees of solidifica- 
tion of lung, between an amount so slight as to occasion 
only the smallest appreciable modification of the respira- 
tory sound, and an amount so great as to approximate 
closely to the degree giving rise to bronchial or tubular 
respiration. In other words, all the gradations of re- 
spiratory modifications, caused by incomplete or an in- 
considerable solidification, which fall short of bronchial 
or tubular respiration, are embraced under the name 
broncho-vesicular. The gradations correspond to the 
amount of solidification, that is, they show the solidifica- 
tion to be either very slight, slight, moderate, or nearly 
sufficient to be considered as considerable or complete. 
The sign is therefore important as evidence, first, of the 
existence of solidification, and second, of the degree of 
solidification. 

Analyzing this sign, the most distinctive feature is the 
combination of the vesicular and the tubular quality in 
the inspiratory sound. These two qualities may be 
combined in variable proportions. The pitch of the 



MODIFICATIONS OF NORMAL SOUNDS. 95 

sound is raised in proportion as the tubular predominates 
over the vesicular quality. The expiratory sound is 
more or less prolonged, tubular in quality, and the pitch 
is raised. The prolongation of this sound, its tubular 
quality, and the highness of pitch, are proportionate to 
the predominance of the tubular over the vesicular 
quality in the inspiratory sound. If the solidification of 
lunor "be slight, the characters of the normal vesicular 
respiration predominate ; that is, the inspiratory sound 
has but a small proportion of the tubular quality, and is 
but little raised in pitch, the expiratory sound being not 
much prolonged, its tubularity not marked, the pitch not 
high. If, on the other hand, the solidification of lung 
be almost enough to give a bronchial respiration, the 
inspiratory sound has only a little vesicular quality, the 
tubular quality predominating, the pitch proportionately 
raised; and the expiratory sound is prolonged, tubular, 
and high, nearly to the same extent as in the bronchial 
respiration. The less the solidification the more the 
characters of the normal vesicular predominate over those 
of the bronchial respiration, and, per contra, the greater 
the solidification the more the characters of the bronchial 
predominate over those of the normal vesicular respira- 
tion. Daily auscultation in a case of lobar pneumonia 
during the stage of resolution, affords an opportunity to 
study all the gradations of this sign. After resolution 
has made some progress, the inspiratory sound is no 
longer purely tubular, but the ear appreciates a little 
admixture of the vesicular quality, and the pitch is 
slightly lowered. As resolution goes on, the vesicular 
quality increases, the pitch is correspondingly lowered, 
until, at length, no tubularity remains, and the pitch 
becomes normal. Meanwhile, as the vesicular quality 



96 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

increases in the inspiratory sound, the expiratory sound 
is less and less prolonged, high and tubular, until it 
becomes, as in health, short, low, and blowing. 

The broncho-vesicular respiration is an important diag- 
nostic sign in all the affections which involve partial 
solidification of lung. In lobar pneumonia, as just stated, 
it denotes the progress made from day to day in resolu- 
tion. It is found also in an earlier stage, before the 
solidification is sufficient to give rise to a purely bron- 
chial respiration. It is a valuable sign in phthisis, afford- 
ing evidence, not only of the fact of solidification, but 
of its degree and extent. The sign enters into the diag- 
nosis of interstitial pneumonia, hemorrhagic infarctus, 
condensation of lung from the pressure of either liquid, 
air, or a tumor, and from collapse of pulmonary lobules. 
It may be stated, with respect to this sign, that it is 
always present if the lung be partially solidified, pro- 
vided there be not either suppression of respiratory 
sound, or such a degree of feebleness that the distinctive 
characters are undeterminable. As with the bronchial 
respiration, so with the broncho-vesicular, either the in- 
spiratory or the expiratory sound may be wanting. The 
characters of the sign are then to be determined as they 
are manifested in the sound which is present, namely, 
the combination of the vesicular and the tubular quality, 
with more or less elevation of pitch, if only an inspira- 
tory sound may be heard, and the amount of prolongation, 
tubularity, and elevation of pitch, if there be only an 
expiratory sound. 

In determining the presence of this morbid sign, at 
the summit of the chest on the right side, it is to be 
borne in mind that the respiratory murmur on this side 
has, in health, as compared with the respiratory murmur 



MODIFICATIONS OF NORMAL SOUNDS. 97 

at the summit on the left side, more or less of the char- 
acters of the broncho-vesicular respiration (vide Normal 
Broncho-vesicular Respiration, page 94). 

Cavernous Respiration. — The modifications which con- 
stitute the distinctive characters of this sign, are produced 
by the entrance of air into a cavity with the act of inspi- 
ration, and its exit from the cavity with the act of expi- 
ration. This passage of air into and from a cavity can 
only take place where the walls of the cavity collapse 
more or less in expiration and expand in inspiration. 
Pulmonary cavities occur chiefly in cases of phthisis. 
They occur, but with comparative infrequency, as a result 
of circumscribed abscess and gangrene of lung. 

A well-marked cavernous respiration has characters 
which are highly distinctive when this sign is contrasted, 
on the one hand, with either the bronchial or broncho- 
vesicular respiration, and, on the other hand, with the 
normal vesicular murmur. These distinctive characters 
relate both to the inspiratory and the expiratory sound. 
The inspiratory sound is neither vesieular nor tubular in 
quality, and the pitch is low as compared with the bron- 
chial respiration. As regards quality, we may say of it, 
as of the expiratory sound in the normal vesicular respi- 
ration, it is simply a blowing sound. The expiratory 
sound has the same quality as the inspiratory, and it is 
lower in pitch. Its duration is variable. The intensity 
of both the inspiratory and the expiratory sound varies ; 
intensity does not enter into the distinctive characters of 
this sign more than into those of the bronchial and the 
broncho-vesicular respiration. These distinctive char- 
acters of the cavernous respiration, as regards pitch and 
quality, especially of the expiratory sound, were first 
9 



98 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

pointed out by me in 1852. 1 Prior to this date the 
bronchial and the cavernous respiration were considered 
as having identical characters, or, at all events, as not 
distinguishable from each other. With a practical knowl- 
edge of the foregoing characters distinctive of the cavern- 
ous respiration, there is no difficulty in discriminating 
this sign from the bronchial respiration. The sign is 
more likely to be confounded with the normal vesicular 
murmur, inasmuch as it differs from the latter only in the 
absence, in the inspiratory sound, of the vesicular quality. 
Against this error the student is to be cautioned. It is 
most likely to be made when the inspiratory sound is 
much weakened, and, consequently, the vesicular quality 
is less distinctly appreciable than when the sound is more 
or less intense. 

A cavernous respiration is limited to a space more or 
less circumscribed, the area corresponding to the site and 
the size of the cavity. Occurring, for the most part, in 
cases of phthisis, it is much oftener found at the summit 
than elsewhere over the chest. It is not constantly found 
where there is a cavity with flaccid w T alls. It may be 
temporarily suppressed by the presence of liquid within 
the cavity, and by obstruction of the orifices communi- 
cating with bronchial tubes, or of the latter. It may be 
wanting at one moment, and an act of expectoration may 
cause it to reappear. Hence absence of cavity cannot 
be predicated on the absence of the sign at a single ex- 
amination. Moreover, if a cavity be not situated near 
the pulmonary superfices, and solidified lung intervene 
between it and the walls of the chest, the cavernous sign 

1 Prize Essay on Variations of Pitch in the Sounds obtained by 
Percussion and Auscultation. Transactions of the American 
Medical Association, 1852. 



MODIFICATIONS OF NORMAL SOUNDS. 99 

may be drowned in a loud bronchial respiration. For 
this reason, while the cavernous sign is positive evidence 
of a cavity, the absence of the sign is not proof that a 
cavity does not exist. 

In some cases of perforation of lung with pneumo- 
thorax, the passage of air to and fro through the perfor- 
ation may give rise to the cavernous respiration. As a 
rule, however, under these circumstances, another sign 
is produced, namely, the amphoric respiration. 

Broncho- caver nous Respiration. — In this sign, as the 
name denotes, the characters of the bronchial and the 
cavernous respiration are combined. These characters 
may be combined in different ways, as well as in varia- 
ble proportions. If a cavity be situated in proximity to 
solidified lung, the quality and pitch of the inspiratory 
and the expiratory sound may show an admixture of the 
characters of the tw r o signs, and to a practised ear, the 
combination is distinctly recognizable. This is one of 
the forms of broncho-cavernous respiration ; the sounds 
are not sufficiently high and tubular for bronchial, nor 
sufficiently low and blowing for cavernous respiration. 
Another form consists of an inspiratory sound, the first 
part of which is tubular, and the latter part cavernous. 
Examples of this form are not extremely infrequent. 
Still another form is a cavernous inspiratory, with a 
bronchial or tubular expiratory sound. In the latter 
form, the bronchial expiration proceeds from solidified 
lung situated near the cavity, the intensity of the sound 
being sufficient to drown the cavernous expiration. 

When, as often happens, a cavity is situated in close 
proximity to, or, it may be, surrounded by solidified 
lung, the cavernous and the bronchial respiration are, 
as it were, in juxtaposition, and such instances offer an 



100 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

excellent opportunity to study the points distinguishing 
these signs from each other ; and, generally, at a short 
distance the normal vesicular murmur may be found, so 
that both morbid signs may be compared with the latter. 
Within a circumscribed area, sometimes, are exemplified 
the characters of the normal murmur, and of the two 
morbid signs just mentioned, together with those of the 
broncho-vesicular respiration. 

Vesiculocavernous Respiration. — It is sometimes evi- 
dent that the vesicular and the cavernous quality are 
combined in the inspiratory sound. This occurs when a 
cavity is surrounded, not by solidified, but by healthy 
lung. Under these circumstances, over the site of the 
cavity, the inspiratory sound may be as loud as, or louder 
than, that around the cavity, but the quality is not purely 
cavernous ; some vesicular quality is appreciable. A 
vesiculocavernous respiration, then, is a cavernous res- 
piration plus some vesicular quality derived from the air 
vesicles which are proximate to the cavity. This sign is 
corroborated by other associated signs showing the ex- 
istence of a cavity and its localization. 

Amphoric Respiration. — The term amphoric has a 
significance when applied to auscultatory sounds, analo- 
gous to that which it has in percussion ; it denotes a 
musical intonation which may be compared to the sound 
produced by blowing upon the open mouth of a decanter 
or phial. Whenever the respiratory sound has this in- 
tonation, it denotes a space containing air which is not 
expelled with the act of expiration. Air in the pleural 
cavity, with perforation of lung, is the physical condition 
most frequently represented by this sign. It is a valu- 
able diagnostic sign in cases of pneumothorax ; but it is 
not always present in that affection, certain accessory 



MODIFICATIONS OF NORMAL SOUNDS. 101 

conditions being requisite, namely perforation above the 
level of liquid, and an unobstructed communication of 
the bronchial tubes, through the opening, with the pleural 
space containing air. While, therefore, its presence is 
significant of pneumothorax, its absence is by no means 
sufficient to exclude this affection. Not infrequently, it is 
a sign of a phthisical cavity with rigid walls which do not 
collapse with the act of expiration. The same contingen- 
cies affect its production here as in cases of pneumo- 
thorax. Whenever amphoric respiration is present, if 
pneumothorax be excluded by the absence of the other 
signs which are diagnostic of this affection, the sign is 
proof of the existence of a pulmonary cavity, the walls 
of which are not flaccid. The sign then takes the place 
of the ordinary cavernous respiration which has been 
described. 

The amphoric sound may accompany either respiration 
or expiration, or both. 

Shortened Inspiration. — The inspiratory sound is 
somewhat shortened in bronchial or tubular respiration. 
This modification enters into the characters of that sign, 
the quality of the sound being tubular, and the pitch high. 
The shortening is due to the sound ending before the in- 
spiratory act ends ; the sound is said to be unfinished. 
Shortening of the sound occurs, however, when it is not 
an element in the bronchial respiration. The shortening 
is then due to the sound not beginning with the inspira- 
tory act ; this is distinguished as deferred inspiratory 
sound. A deferred inspiratory sound not tubular in 
quality, but more or less vesicular, and not notably raised 
in pitch, is a sign of pulmonary or vesicular emphysema. 
It is a sign of diagnostic value in that connection. 

9* 



102 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

The student should note the distinctions just stated 
which relate to pitch and quality. Suppose an inspira- 
tory sound to be present without an expiratory sound : — 
if the sound be shortened at the end of the inspiration, the 
pitch high and the quality tubular, it is bronchial respira- 
tion, denoting complete or considerable solidification of 
lung, but if the shortening be at the beginning of respi- 
ration, the pitch comparatively low, and vesicular quality 
be appreciable, the sign denotes emphysema. The differ- 
ential points thus are, the inspiratory sound unfinished or 
deferred, the pitch high or low, and the quality tubular 
or vesicular. Attention to these points is essential in 
order to avoid error in the interpretation of the sign. 

Prolonged Expiration. — The length of the expiratory 
sound in health varies in different persons. The sound 
is sometimes considerably prolonged ; it may be nearly as 
long as the sound of inspiration. There is no difficulty 
in recogonizing this as a normal peculiarity, from the 
fact that the murmur has the pitch and quality of health. 
An unusual length of the expiratory sound, within the 
range of health, is usually observed at the summit of the 
chest, and especially on the right side. It is important 
to bear in mind that at the summit of the chest on the 
right side, and sometimes also on the left side, a pro- 
longed expiratory sound, more or less raised in pitch, and 
tubular in quality, may be a normal peculiarity. It fol- 
lows that a prolonged, and even a high and tubular expi- 
ration at the summit of the chest, must not be reckoned 
as a morbid sign unless it be associated with other signs 
denoting disease. The laws of the disparity between the 
two sides of the chest at the summit are to be taken into 
account (vide p. 74). If the expiration be longer on 
the left than on the right side, it is abnormal ; so, also, 



MODIFICATIONS OF NORMAL SOUNDS. 103 

is a high-pitched tubular expiration heard on the left and 
not on the right side. 

The significance of an abnormally prolonged expira- 
tion depends on its pitch and quality. If it be high and 
tubular, it denotes solidification of lung. It is, in fact, 
bronchial respiration. As already stated, in bronchial 
or tubular respiration, the inspiratory sound is sometimes 
wanting, and the presence of the sign is then to be de- 
termined by the characters, relating to pitch and quality, 
of the expiratory sound. The same statement holds true 
with respect to broncho-vesicular respiration, when this 
approximates to the bronchial. At the summit of the 
chest, the characters of the inspiratory sound, and asso- 
ciated morbid signs, always enable the auscultator to 
determine whether a prolonged high and tubular expira- 
tion be, or be not, abnormal. A prolonged expiration, 
which is low in pitch and blowing in quality, that is, 
with the characters of health, aside from length, may 
belong to a cavernous expiration. This is to be deter- 
mined by the characters of the inspiration, and by other 
associated signs. Exclusive of cavernous respiration, an 
abnormally prolonged expiratory sound of low pitch and 
non-tubular, denotes vesicular emphysema. It is asso- 
ciated then with a weakened and deferred inspiratory 
sound. A prolonged expiratory sound, in cases of emphy- 
sema, is invariably low and non-tubular. If it have not 
these characters, it is not a sign of emphysema, but 
belongs to bronchial or broncho-vesicular respiration. 
Attention to these differential points is to be enjoined 
upon the student. 

A prolonged expiration at the summit of the chest on 
the right side is sometimes incorrectly considered to be 
evidence of phthisis. It is to be recollected, in the first 



104 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

place, that prolongation of this sound with a normal pitch 
and quality, is never evidence of solidification of lung 
either from phthisis or any other disease ; and in the 
second place, even if the pitch be high, and the quality 
tubular, that it is not to be regarded as abnormal, pro- 
vided the inspiratory sound is unchanged, and other signs 
of disease are not present. 

Interrupted Respiration. — To this sign have been ap- 
plied other names, such as jerking, wavy, cogged ivheel, 
and by French writers the names entrecoupee and sacca- 
dee. The modification is either of the inspiration or of 
the expiration, or of both. The inspiratory, however, 
much more frequently than the expiratory, sound is inter- 
rupted. The sound, instead of being continuous, is broken 
into one, two, or more parts. This is the characteristic of 
the sign. If at the same time there be alterations in pitch 
and quality, the interruption is merely incidental to other 
signs ; namely, the bronchial, broncho-vesicular, or cavern- 
ous respiration. To constitute it a distinct sign, the in- 
terruption must be the only appreciable change. Thus 
limited, the sign has but little diagnostic value. 

Interrupted respiration is sometimes found in healthy 
persons. It is confined to the summit of the chest, and 
oftener on the left than the right side. Existing without 
any other signs, therefere, it is not evidence of disease. 
It is of value only in the diagnosis of phthisis. Associ- 
ated with other signs, when the latter are not marked, it 
is entitled to a certain amount of weight in the diagnosis. 

Interrupted respiratory sounds, of course, occur when 
there is interruption in the respiratory movements. This 
happens in cases of pleurisy, pleurodynia, or intercostal 
neuralgia. Owing to the pain caused by the movements 
in respiration, the patient may breathe, not continuously, 



ADVENTITIOUS RESPIRATORY SOUNDS. 105 

but with a series of jerking movements. Sometimes in- 
terrupted breathing is observed in persons who are ex- 
cited or agitated when auscultation is practised. In all 
these instances, interruption in the respiratory sounds is 
found over the whole chest, whereas, when it is an ab- 
normal sign in cases of phthisis, it is limited to the 
summit on one side of the chest, and there is no interrup- 
tion manifested in the mode of breathing. 

Reviewing the foregoing signs, they may be distributed 
into three classes, as follows : 1st. Signs, the distinctive 
characters of which relate to either the absence or the 
intensity of sound. This class embraces (a) increased 
intensity of the vesicular murmur ; (b) diminished in- 
t3nsity of the vesicular murmur; and (c) suppression of 
respiratory sound. 2d. Signs, the distinctive characters 
of which relate especially to pitch and quality. In this 
class belong, (a) bronchial or tubular respiration; (b) 
broncho-vesicular respiration ; (c) cavernous respiration ; 
(d) broncho-cavernous respiration; (e) vesiculo- cavern- 
ous respiration; and (f) amphoric respiration. 3d. 
Signs, the distinctive characters of which relate especially 
to rhythm, namely, (a) shortened inspiration; (b) pro- 
longed expiration; and (c) interrupted respiration. 

Adventitious Respiratory Sounds, or Rales. 

Adventitious respiratory sounds, or, adopting the 
French term, rales, are distinguished from the morbid 
signs already considered, by the fact that they have no 
analogues in health; in other words, they are not normal 
sounds abnormally modified, but wholly new sounds. A 
convenient classification of these signs is based on the 



106 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

different anatomical situations in which they are pro- 
duced. This classification is as follows: 1st. Laryngeal 
and tracheal rales ; 2d. Bronchial rales: 3d. Vesicular 
rales; 4th. Cavernous rales; 5th. Pleural rales; and 
6th. Indeterminate rales. Compared with each other, 
as regards their characters, they admit of being divided 
into dry and moist rales, the latter being evidently due 
to the presence of liquid. 

Laryngeal and Tracheal Rales. — The rales produced 
within the larynx and trachea may be either moist or 
dry. The moist or bubbling sounds are produced when 
mucus or other liquid accumulates in these sections of the 
air tubes. This occurs frequently in the moribund state, 
and the sounds are then known as the "death rattles." 
When not incident to this state, they denote either insen- 
sibility to the presence of liquid, as in coma, or inability 
to effect the removal of the liquid by acts of expectoration. 
The sounds are heard at a distance. They exemplify, on 
a large scale, moist or bubbling auscultatory sounds which 
are produced within the bronchial tubes. The dry rales 
produced within the larynx or trachea are t caused by 
spasm of the glottis, and by diminution of the calibre, 
either at or below the glottis, from oedema, exudation, 
the presence of a foreign body, or the pressure of a 
tumor. The dry sounds are distinguished as whistling, 
wheezing, crowing, whooping, etc. They are heard at 
a distance, and they also exemplify auscultatory sounds 
representing analogous conditions in the bronchial tubes. 
Characteristic sounds produced at the glottis by spasm 
enter into the diagnosis of certain affections, namely, 
laryngismus stridulus, pertussis, croup, and aneurism 
involving excitation of the recurrent laryngeal nerve. 
Other sounds are clue to paralysis of the laryngeal 



MOIST BRONCHIAL RALES. 107 

muscles. Again, dry sounds, called stridor, produced 
by stenosis of the trachea from the pressure of an aneu- 
rismal or other tumor, cicatrization of ulcers, and morbid 
growths, are of diagnostic importance. Although 
audible without auscultation, these different sounds, with 
reference to the precise situation at which they are pro- 
duced, may sometimes be studied with advantage by 
means of the stethoscope. 

Moist Bronchial Rales. 

The moist bronchial rales are bubbling sounds pro- 
duced in different branches of the bronchial tree. They 
are sounds of which the "tracheal rattles" are an ex- 
aggerated type. They may be imitated by blowing into 
liquids through tubes differing in size. The bubbles 
seem to be large or small, according to the size of the 
bronchial tubes in which they are produced. Apparent 
differences in the size of the bubbles are distinguished 
by the names coarse and fine. In the primary and 
secondary bronchial branches the moist sounds are 
relatively quite coarse; they are less so in tubes of the 
third or fourth dimensions; in smaller tubes they be- 
come fine, and in those of minute size they become quite 
fine. Extremely fine bubbling sounds constitute what is 
known as the subcrepitant rale, so called because it ap- 
proaches in character to the crepitant rale produced 
within the air vesicles and bronchioles. We may thus 
judge of the size of the bronchial tubes in which the rales 
are produced by their comparative coarseness or fineness. 
Frequently, however, coarse and fine rales are inter- 
mingled, and generally those which are either coarse or 
fine are not uniform, but appear to be of unequal size. 



108 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

In all the varieties of the moist bronchial rales, the 
bubbling character of the sounds is sufficiently distinctive 
for their recognition. The differentiation of the sub- 
crepitant from the crepitant rale alone involves some nice 
points of distinction. 

Coarse bubbling rales sometimes occur in acute bron- 
chitis affecting the larger bronchial tubes. Their 
occurrence is exceptional, because, in general, the mucus 
within the tubes does not accumulate sufficiently and is 
too consistent for the production of bubbling sounds. 
These rales occur in cases in which the mucus is un- 
usually thin and either more abundant than usual or an 
accumulation takes place in consequence of inability to 
expectorate freely. These conditions are wanting in the 
majority of the cases of ordinary acute bronchitis. A 
muco-purulent liquid in cases of chronic bronchitis is 
better suited for the production of bubbling sounds than 
simple mucus. Moreover, coarse rales are heard oftener 
in children than in adults, because the former do not 
voluntarily expectorate as freely as the latter. Serous 
transudation (bronchorrhcea) into tubes of large size may 
give rise to coarse bubbling rales, and also the presence 
of blood in some cases of profuse hemorrhage. In 
bronchitis and bronchorrhcea the rales are heard on both 
sides of the chest. The bubbling rales, whether coarse 
or fine, are heard either with the act of inspiration or of 
expiration, or with both acts. 

Pine bubbling sounds and the subcrepitant rale occur 
in various pathological connections, The characters of 
the subcrepitant rale are to be borne in mind with refer-, 
ence to the discrimination from the crepitant. The most 
distinctive character is the moist sound or bubbling ; this 



MOIST BRONCHIAL RALES. 109 

is sufficiently appreciable. Other characters are, their 
occurrence frequently, but not constantly, in expiration 
as well as in inspiration, and the inequality of the fine 
bubbling sounds. 

The subcrepitant rale, existing over the chest on both 
sides, is diagnostic of bronchitis affecting the smaller 
bronchial tubes (capillary bronchitis), when taken in 
connection with other signs and the symptoms. The rale 
exists on both sides, because this, as well as bronchitis 
affecting the larger tubes, is a bilateral affection. The 
sign is of great practical value in that pathological con- 
nection. The rale also occurs on both sides, and is more 
or less diffused in pulmonary oedema. This pathological 
connection is shown by the associated physical signs, 
together with the symptoms. In so-called capillary 
bronchitis, the bubbling is due to the presence of thin 
mucus, and in pulmonary oedema to serous transudation 
within the small bronchial ramifications. 

Fine bubbling or a subcrepitant rale has other patho- 
logical connections, as follows : — 

1. It occurs in lobar pneumonia during the stage of 
resolution. Here it is due to the presence of mucus from 
a bronchitis limited to the affected lobe or lobes, and, in 
a measure, to liquefied pneumonic exudation. It is con- 
sidered as denoting commencing and progressing resolu- 
tion in pneumonia. Sometimes it is intermingled with 
rales which are more or less coarse. 

2. In circumscribed pneumonia, hemorrhagic infarctus, 
and pulmonary apoplexy, the fine or subcrepitant rale, 
often associated with those which are more or less coarse, 
denotes the presence of mucus or blood within the bron- 
chial tubes. The rales are localized in a space, or in 

10 



110 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

spaces, corresponding to the situation and extent of the 
affection. 

3. During and shortly after a hemoptysis, fine rales 
limited to a particular situation are sometimes heard, pro- 
ceeding from blood in the small bronchial tubes, and 
indicating the place of the hemorrhage. 

4. A purulent liquid admits of bubbling much more 
readily than mucus ; hence, in cases of chronic bron- 
chitis with an expectoration of pus, fine and coarse bron- 
chial rales are more frequent than in acute bronchitis. 
Pus, also, may be present within bronchial tubes of small 
size, not as a product of bronchitis, but from the evacua- 
tion of an abscess of either the pulmonary parenchyma, 
of the liver, or some other adjacent part, and from per- 
foration of lung in some cases of empyema. 

5. In the different stages of phthisis, moist bronchial 
rales are usually present. The liquid in the tubes, if 
the disease be advanced, is derived, in part, from asso- 
ciated bronchitis, and, in part, from liquefied tuberculous 
exudation. The bubbling sounds may be more or less 
coarse or fine, and both are often intermingled. Early 
in the disease, before softening of the exudation has 
taken place, fine bubbling or the subcrepitant rale, 
limited to the summit of the chest, is an important diag- 
nostic sign. It belongs among the accessory physical 
signs on which the diagnosis may depend. Here the 
liquid is derived from a coexisting circumscribed bron- 
chitis. 

In cases of fibroid phthisis, or cirrhosis of lung, moist 
rales, coarse and fine, are generally more or less abun- 
dant, and diffused over the whole, or the greater part, 
of the chest on the affected side. 



MOIST BRONCHIAL RALES. Ill 

In the foregoing account of the moist bronchial rales, 
the subcrepitant rale is not reckoned as a sign distinct 
from fine bubbling sounds. Inasmuch as the mechanism 
and the significance are the same, and it is not easy to 
draw a line of demarcation between the two, the distinc- 
tion is unimportant. It is sufficient to bear in mind that 
very fine bubbling sounds are called subcrepitant, be- 
cause they are somewhat analogous to the crepitant rale. 
The points which distinguish the latter are, however, 
well marked, as will appear when the characters of that 
sign are considered. The moist rales are often called 
mucous rales. This name is obviously inappropriate, 
since, not only are the sounds produced by other liquids 
than mucus, but other liquids are best suited for their 
production, especially in the large and medium-sized 
tubes. 

The moist bronchial rales, whether coarse or fine, vary 
in pitch accordingly as the lung surrounding the tubes 
in which they are produced is, or is not, solidified. If 
the lung be solidified, the pitch is high ; if there be no 
solidification, the pitch is comparatively low. Thus, the 
pitch of the rales is high in the second stage of pneu- 
monia and in phthisis with considerable solidification, 
whereas the pitch is low in bronchitis and pulmonary 
oedema. If, therefore, the respiratory sound be sup- 
pressed, it is easy to determine by the pitch of these 
rales whether the lung be solidified or not, and to judge 
measurably of the degree of solidification. Attention 
to the pitch in this connection is sometimes of value in 
diagnosis. 



112 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

Dry Bronchial Rales. 

All adventitious sounds, -which are not moist, produced 
within the air tubes below the trachea, are embraced 
under the name dry bronchial rales. The sounds are 
numerous and varied in character. They are often 
musical notes. Frequently they are suggestive of cer- 
tain familiar sounds, such as the chirping of birds, the 
cry of a young animal, snoring in sleep, cooing of 
pigeons, humming of the mosquito, the note of the vio- 
loncello, etc. etc. They are often heard at a distance, 
and characterized as wheezing sounds. An interrupted, 
or clicking sound is not uncommon. All these varieties 
are practically unimportant, and it would be a needless 
refinement to consider particular varieties as distinct 
signs. The only distinction which it is desirable to 
make is into the sibilant and sonorous rales. This dis- 
tinction is based on difference in pitch ; sibilant rales 
are high, and sonorous rales are low in pitch. As a 
rule, the sibilant rales are produced in the small and the 
sonorous rales in the larger sized bronchial tubes. The 
sounds may accompany either inspiration or expiration, 
or both. The sibilant and sonorous rales are often inter- 
mingled. There may be sibilant rales with inspiration, 
and sonorous rales with expiration, within the same situ- 
ation. Moreover, these rales are found often to vary 
from minute to minute, being at one instant sibilant and 
at another sonorous. Their recognition involves no diffi- 
culty. There are no other adventitious sounds with 
which they are liable to be confounded. 

The physical condition represented by the dry rales is 
generally a narrowing of the air tubes at certain points, 
and especially in consequence of spasm of the bronchial 



DRY BRONCHIAL RALES. 113 

muscular fibres. The latter constitutes the essential 
pathological condition in a paroxysm of asthma ; and in 
this affection the dry rales are always marked. Their 
diagnostic importance relates chiefly to asthma. Both 
sibilant and sonorous rales are present and diffused over 
the entire chest. Wheezing sounds with expiration are 
heard by the patient, and by others at a distance. A 
single paroxysm of asthma affords an opportunity for the 
student to observe all the varieties and fluctuations of 
these rales. Taken in connection with other signs and 
the symptoms, the rales are pathognomonic of asthma. 

More or less spasm of the bronchial muscular fibres 
occurs in certain cases of bronchitis, without being suffi- 
ciently great and extensive to give rise to a paroxysm 
of asthma, or even any embarrassment of respiration. 
Under these circumstances, the rales are less marked 
and diffused. An asthmatic element may be said to 
enter, more or less, into these cases. Narrowing of 
bronchial tubes by tenacious mucus which gives rise to 
no bubbling sounds, and, perhaps, unequal swelling of 
the mucous membrane, may also occasion sibilant and 
sonorous rales. 

Dry rales at the summit of the chest are not infrequent 
in cases of phthisis, due to spasm, the presence of mucus, 
or to swelling of the mucous membrane. They are some- 
times quite annoying to phthisical patients. 

Clicking sounds are suggestive of the sudden separa- 
tion of tenacious mucus from the walls of the bronchial 
tubes. These are sufficiently common in bronchitis and 
in phthisis. 

10* 



114 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

Vesicular or Crepitant Rale. 

This is the only vesicular rale. It is usually con- 
sidered to be produced within the air vesicles, but, prob- 
ably, the terminal bronchial tubes or bronchioles partici- 
pate in its production. 

It is to be distinguished from very fine bubbling sounds, 
or the subcrepitant rale. The points of distinction are 
as follows : The sounds are not moist but dry ; they are 
crackling, not bubbling in character. They may be de- 
fined to be very fine, dry, crackling sounds. This point 
of difference is very distinctive. There are, however, 
other differential points. The crackling sounds are equal, 
whereas, fine bubbling sounds are unequal, that is, they 
give the impression of bubbles of unequal size. The 
crepitating sounds are heard at the end of the inspira- 
tory act, and especially at the end of a forced inspiration, 
the subcrepitant rale, on the other hand, being heard 
often with or near the beginning of inspiration, and per- 
haps, ceasing before the end of the inspiratory act. 
Another distinctive feature is the abrupt development of 
the crepitant rale ; there is a shower of crackles, as it 
were, at the end of a forced inspiration. Finally, the 
rale is never heard in expiration. The apparent excep- 
tions to this statement are instances in which the crepi- 
tant and the subcrepitant rale are associated. This is 
not very infrequent, and, with a practical knowledge of 
the characters of each, it is by no means difficult to ap- 
preciate the combination of the two signs. In fact, the 
combination affords an excellent opportunity to illustrate 
the distinctive characters of each ; the fine bubbling at 
or near the beginning of inspiration, followed by the fine 



VESICULAR OR CREPITANT RALE. 115 

crackling at the end of this act, and the former perhaps 
reproduced in the act of expiration. 

There are various modes in which the crepitant rale 
may be imitated, for examples, rubbing together a lock 
of hair near the ear, throwing fine salt upon live coals 
or into a heated vessel, igniting a train of gunpowder, 
and alternately pressing and separating the thumb and 
finger moistened with a solution of gum-arabic and held 
near the ear. A perfect representation is afforded by 
squeezing a piece of an artificial preparation known as 
the India-rubber sponge, and observing the sound pro- 
duced by the separation of the walls of the interstices 
when the piece expands from its elasticity. This prepa- 
ration, which has now gone out of use, exemplified the 
true mechanism of the sign as described, first, by the 
late Dr. Carr, of Canandaigua, N. Y., in an article pub- 
lished in the American Journal of Medical Sciences, 
in October, 1842. 1 

The crepitant rale is the diagnostic sign of pneumonia. 
It very rarely occurs in any other pathological connec- 
tion. Of all respiratory signs, this is most entitled to 
be called pathognomonic. It belongs especially to the 
first stage of acute pneumonia. It is not invariably 
present, but it occurs in the majority of cases of acute 
pneumonia. In the second stage, or the stage of solidifi- 
cation, the rale generally disappears. It not infrequently 
is reproduced in the stage of resolution, and it is then 
called the returning crepitant rale. In the latter stage 
it is often found in combination with the subcrepitant 
rale. The practical value of this sign relates chiefly to 
the diagnosis of pneumonia. 

1 Vide article by the author in the New York Monthly Med. 
Journ. for Feb. 1869. 



116 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

It is stated that the crepitant rale is sometimes found 
in cases of pulmonary oedema, and during or directly 
after an attack of hemoptysis. If it ever occur in these 
cases, the instances must be extremely rare. The state- 
ment is perhaps based on the occurrence of the subcrepi- 
tant, this being confounded with the crepitant rale. It 
occurs transiently under the following circumstances : a 
patient who has been confined for some time in bed, 
lying on the back, and much enfeebled with any disease, 
if suddenly raised to a sitting posture and auscultated, a 
crepitant rale is often found on the posterior aspect of 
the chest at the end of a forced inspiration. The rale 
disappears after a few forced inspirations. It is heard, 
not on one side only, but on both sides. The explana- 
tion is, that during the recumbent posture continued for 
some time, and the patient breathing feebly, enough of 
the air vesicles and bronchioles become agglutinated by 
means of a little sticky transudation to give rise to 
crackling sounds in a few forced inspirations. It may be 
of use to mention that if the stethoscope be applied to 
the anterior surface of a chest much covered with hair, 
the movements of the pectoral extremity of the instru- 
ment in the act of inspiration may produce a sound iden- 
tical with the crepitant rale. 

A crepitant rale at the summit of the chest, within a 
circumscribed space, is one of the accessory signs of 
phthisis. It denotes a circumscribed pneumonia which 
clinical experience shows to be generally secondary to 
phthisis; hence the diagnostic significance of the sign. 

Cavernous or Gurgling Rale. 

A pulmonary cavity of considerable size, containing a 
certain quantity of liquid, and communicating freely with 



FRTCTTON SOUNDS. 117 

bronchial tubes, furnishes a rale which is characteristic. 
The character of the sound is expressed as fully as 
possible by the term gurgling. The sound is produced 
by large bubbling and the agitation of the liquid within 
the cavity. It may be compared to the sound produced 
by the boiling of a liquid in a flask or large test-tube. 
The sound is sometimes high pitched and amphoric, but 
generally it is low in pitch. It is heard with more or 
less intensity within a circumscribed space almost in- 
variably at or near the summit of the chest; but, if 
intense, the sound is diffused, and it may be sometimes 
heard at a distance. Its diagnostic importance relates 
to the advanced stage of phthisis. The rale is heard 
chiefly or exclusively in the act of inspiration. It may 
be produced by the act of coughing sometimes with 
greater intensity than by respiration. 

Pleural Rales. Friction Sounds. Metallic Tinkling. 
Splashing. 

The signs embraced under the name pleural rales are, 
1st. Sounds produced by the rubbing together of the 
pleural surfaces, and hence called friction sounds; 2d. 
Metallic tinkling ; and 3d. Splashing or succussion sounds. 

Friction Sounds. — Movements of the pleural surfaces 
upon each other take place in inspiration and expiration ; 
but in health these movements occasion no sound. 
Sounds are produced when the surfaces are covered with 
a recent fibrinous exudation which prevents the normal 
continuous, unobstructed movements, and when the sur- 
faces are roughened with dense lymph or other morbid 
products. The sounds are generally interrupted, that 
is, two, three, or more sounds occur during the act of 



118 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

inspiration or expiration, or during both acts. The 
intensity of the sounds varies much in different cases. 
A slight grazing sound only may be heard, or, on the 
other hand, the sounds may be so loud as to be heard by 
the patient, and by others at a distance. The character 
of the sounds is variable. The slight rubbing or grazing 
character may be imitated by placing over the ear the 
palmar surface of one hand, and moving over its dorsal 
surface slowly the pulpy portion of a finger of the other 
hand. In some instances, however, the rough character 
of the sounds is expressed by such terms as rasping, 
grating, and creaking. In these instances the sounds 
denote density of the morbid product which roughens the 
pleural surfaces. In connection with very rough sounds, 
vibration of the walls of the chest, or fremitus, is some- 
times perceived by palpation. 

Aside from the character of the sounds as just stated, 
they are distinguished by their apparent nearness to the 
ear ; they seem sometimes to be produced upon the sur- 
face of the chest. They are sometimes intensified by 
firm pressure of the stethoscope upon the chest. After 
a little practical knowledge of these sounds, they can 
hardly be confounded with any other rales. 

Pleuritic friction sounds generally denote pleurisy. 
In cases of pleurisy with effusion, slight rubbing or 
grazing is sometimes heard before much liquid accumu- 
lates within the pleuritic cavity. The physical condi- 
tions, however, after the effusion has been removed, are 
much more favorable for the production of friction sounds, 
and they are often now rough in character. They may 
be transient, or they may continue for a considerable 
period, their duration depending on the arrest of the 
movements of the pleural surfaces by means of either 



METALLIC TOKLING. 119 

agglutination "with lymph, or adhesion from the growth 
of areolar tissue. 

Pleuritic friction sounds occur not infrequently in 
cases of pneumonia, denoting, in this connection, coex- 
isting pleurisy. 

Slight rubbing or grazing at the summit of the chest 
is one of the accessory signs of phthisis. It denotes a 
circumscribed, dry pleurisy which, as clinical experience 
shows, is generally secondary to phthisis, and hence the 
diagnostic significance of the sign. 

In the foregoing instances in which friction sounds 
are stated to occur, their significance relates to pleurisy. 
In some rare instances the sounds are produced by 
miliary tubercles or carcinomatous nodules projecting 
beyond the plane of the visceral pleural surface, without 
pleuritic inflammation. 

Metallic Tinkling. — This is a vocal as well as a res- 
piratory sign. It is also produced by acts of coughing, 
and sometimes by the act of deglutition. The name ex- 
presses the distinctive character of the sign. It consists 
in a series of tinkling sounds of a high-pitched, silvery 
or metallic tone. The number of sounds varies from a 
single sound, to two, three, or more sounds, during an 
act of either inspiration or expiration. It occurs irregu- 
larly, that is, it is not present in every act of breathing, 
but is heard at variable intervals. It may sometimes be 
produced by forced, when it is not heard in tranquil, 
breathing. It can only be confounded with tinkling 
sounds sometimes produced within the stomach. The 
latter, however, are easily discriminated by their situa- 
tion, and the absence of associated signs denoting the 
affections of the chest in which the sign occurs. 

Metallic tinkling is the sign of pneumothorax with 



120 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

perforation of lung. In the great majority of the cases 
in which it is found, it is diagnostic of this affection. It 
is, however, always associated with other physical signs 
corroborative of the diagnosis. 

It is a rare sign, in cases of phthisis, of a large cavity, 
the conditions for its production being analogous to those 
in pneumo-hydrothorax, namely, a space of considerable 
size containing air and liquid, the space communicating 
with bronchial tubes. 

Splashing ; or, Succussion Sounds. — This sign is pro- 
duced by succussion, which is reckoned as one of the 
different methods of physical exploration. Sounds thus 
produced are not infrequently heard at some distance ; 
generally, however, succussion is practised while the ear 
is applied to the chest, so that properly enough, the sign 
may be embraced among the auscultatory signs, although 
not produced by respiration. 

Splashing is pathognomonic of either pneumo-hydro- 
thorax or pneumo-pyothorax. It is especially valuable as 
a sign of these affections because it is almost invariably 
available. The instances are extremely few in which the 
sign is wanting when air and liquid are contained in the 
pleural cavity. It is obtained by jerking the body of the 
patient with a quick, somewhat forcible movement, the 
ear being very near to, or in contact with, the chest. 

The sound is like that produced when a bottle, par- 
tially filled with liquid, is shaken. The sound is often 
high pitched and amphoric in quality. The only liability 
to error is in confounding with this sign, splashing pro- 
duced within the stomach. Attention to other signs will 
always protect against this error. 

Iii determinate Males. — Under this head may be em- 
braced some sounds sufficiently recognizable, but inde- 



THE VOCAL SIGNS OF DISEASE. 121 

terminate as regards the rationale of their production 
and the physical conditions which they represent. They 
may be designated crumpling and crackling sounds. The 
former are probably due to pleuritic rubbing, and the 
latter to the separation of some slightly adherent air 
vesicles or bronchioles. Their diagnostic value relates 
only to the early stage of phthisis. In conjunction with 
other signs, any indeterminate rale, if limited to the 
summit of the chest, and especially to one side, has some 
weight in the diagnosis. Crumpling and crackling sounds, 
however, are not uncommon in healthy persons at the 
end of forced inspiration. The fact of their presence at 
both summits, and the absence of other morbid signs, are 
the grounds for not considering them as evidence of dis- 
ease. They are found in health, especially if the binau- 
ral stethoscope be employed. Their diagnostic signifi- 
cance, thus, depends on limitation to the summit of the 
chest or one side, and association with other signs point- 
ing to incipient phthisis. 

The Vocal Signs of Disease. 

The vocal signs of disease, with the exception of 
metallic tinkling, which is a vocal as well as respiratory 
sign, may all be considered as abnormal modifications of 
the normal vocal resonance and of the normal bronchial 
whisper. The student must, therefore, be familiar with 
the distinctive characters of these two normal signs before 
he is prepared to enter upon the study of the abnormal 
modifications {vide pages 77 and 82). He must bear in 
mind the facts which have been presented in relation to 
the normal vocal fremitus (vide page 77). The rules 
given for auscultation of the voice are also to be observed 
11 



122 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

(vide page 76). Embracing the abnormal modifications 
of the loud voice, the whisper and fremitus, the following 
are the signs to be considered : Bronchophony ; Whis- 
pering Bronchophony ; JEgophony ; Increased Vocal 
Resonance ; Increased Bronchial Whisper ; Cavernous 
Whisper ; Pectoriloquy ; Amphoric Voice or Echo ; 
Diminished and Suppressed Vocal Resonance ; Dimin- 
ished and Suppressed Vocal Fremitus and Metallic 
Tinkling. 

Bronchophony. 

Bronchophony has the same import as bronchial or 
tubular respiration. Like the latter sign, it represents 
complete or considerable solidification of lung. Gene- 
rally the two signs are associated, but either may be 
present without the other. 

The characters which are distinctive of brochophony, 
as compared with the normal vocal resonance, are these : 
The vocal sound seems concentrated, in most cases near 
the ear, and the pitch is more or less raised. These 
characters are in contrast with the diffusion, distance, 
and lowness of pitch of the normal vocal resonance. The 
intensity of the sound is variable ; it may be greater or 
less than the intensity of the normal resonance. A con- 
centrated, high-pitched sound, however feeble, is not less 
a sign of complete or considerable solidification of lung, 
that is, it is not less bronchophony, than when the sound 
is intense. 

Vocal fremitus is always to be discriminated from 
vocal resonance. The fremitus associated with broncho- 
phony may, or may not, be greater than the fremitus of 
health. Not infrequently the fremitus is less than in 
health. 



BRONCHOPHONY. 123 

It is to be borne in mind that in some healthy persons 
bronchophony exists at the summit of the chest, espe- 
cially on the right side, over the primary bronchus. 
Existing alone in this situation, it may not be abnormal. 

Representing complete or considerable solidification 
of lung, this sign occurs in the different affections in 
which bronchial or tubular respiration has been seen to 
occur (vide page 93), namely, lobar pneumonia, phthisis, 
chronic or fibroid pneumonia, condensation of lung from 
either pleuritic effusion, the accumulation of air in the 
pleural cavity or the pressure of a tumor, collapse of 
pulmonary lobules, coagulation of blood within the air 
vesicles, and carcinoma of lung. 

For the production of bronchophony, a less degree of 
solidification is requisite than for the production of bron- 
chial or tubular respiration. Hence, bronchophony may 
be associated with a broncho-vesicular, as well as with a 
purely bronchial respiration. This is illustrated in the 
resolving stage of pneumonia. When resolution has pro- 
gressed sufficiently for the bronchial to give place to the 
broncho-vesicular respiration, well marked bronchophony 
is often found to continue, ceasing at a later period in 
the resolving stage. 

The apparent nearness to the ear of the vocal sound 
in bronchophony is wanting if a certain quantity of liquid 
intervene between the solidified lung and the walls of the 
chest at the situation auscultated. The voice under 
these conditions seems to be more or less distant. This 
difference is readily appreciated. With this apparent 
distance of the bronchophonic voice, in some instances is 
associated the modification which is characteristic of 
another sign, namely, gegophony. 



124 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

Whispering Bronchophony. 

The characters of this sign correspond to those of the 
expiratory sound in the bronchial or tubular respiration 
{vide p. 93). The sound is more or less intensified, 
high in pitch, and tubular in quality. If the patient 
pronounce numerals in a forced whisper, the characters 
are generally more marked than in the expiratory sound 
in forced breathing. The significance of this sign is the 
same as that of the bronchial or tubular respiration, and 
of bronchophony with the loud voice. 

iEgophony. 

This sign is a modification of bronchophony. As 
regards concentration and pitch, it has the characters of 
bronchophony, the distinctive features being apparent 
distance from the ear, and tremulousness or a bleating 
tone. From the latter the name is derived, the term 
signifying the cry of the goat. The characters which 
distinguish the sign from bronchophony are readily 
enough appreciated, and it represents a physical con- 
dition added to solidification of lung. This physical 
condition is the presence of liquid effusion. The sign is 
rarely present in cases of large effusion. It occurs 
usually when the chest is about half filled with liquid, 
and the lung at the level of the liquid is sufficiently con- 
densed to give rise to bronchophony. This condition, 
under these circumstances, involves agglutination of lung 
above the portion condensed by pressure. The sign also 
sometimes occurs in cases of pleuro-pneumonia, the 
solidification in these cases being due to pneumonic 
exudation. As a sign of liquid effusion it possesses 



INCREASED VOCAL RESONANCE. 125 

diagnostic value, although, owing to the fact that the 
existence of effusion is easily determined by other signs, 
it may be said to be superfluous. 

Increased Vocal Resonance and Fremitus. 

The distinctive character of this sign is an increase of 
the intensity of the resonance without notable change in 
other respects. The resonance may be more or less 
intensified, but it is distant, diffused, and comparatively 
low in pitch ; in other words, the characters of broncho- 
phony are wanting. The differential points between 
bronchophony and increased resonance should be clearly 
apprehended, bearing in mind that the intensity of the 
sound in bronchophony may, or may not, be greater than 
the normal resonance. 

Increased vocal resonance occurs when the lung is 
solidified, the solidification not sufficient in degree to 
produce bronchophony. Lung slightly or moderately so- 
lidified gives rise to an increase of intensity ; if the 
solidification become considerable or complete, broncho- 
phony takes the place of the simple increase of intensity. 
Thus, at an early period in pneumonia, increased vocal 
resonance precedes bronchophony ; and in the stage of 
resolution the reverse of this takes place, namely, in- 
creased vocal resonance follows bronchophony, the lat- 
ter ceasing when resolution has progressed to a certain 
extent. 

Contrary to what would perhaps be anticipated, in the 
instances just cited, the intensity of the sound when 
bronchophony is present may be not only not increased, 
but diminished below that of health ; that is, in the first 
stage of pneumonia, the increased intensity may cease 

11* 



126 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

when bronchophony occurs, and return when broncho- 
phony disappears. 

Increase of the vocal resonance occurs in connection 
with pulmonary cavities. Over a cavity of considerable 
size situated near the superficies of the lung, the vocal 
resonance is sometimes extremely intense without any 
bronchophonic characters. The latter, if present, denote 
considerable solidification either around the cavity, or 
between it and the walls of the chest. From the pres- 
ence or the absence of bronchophonic characters with 
greatly increased intensity of resonance, the auscultator 
can judge whether the cavity be, or be not, in proximity 
to considerable solidification of lung. 

Irrespective of the cavernous stage of phthisis, the 
sign is of diagnostic importance in the different affections 
which involve moderate or slight solidification of lung, 
namely, pneumonia early in the disease and in the stage 
of resolution, phthisis, over the compressed lung in pleu- 
risy with moderate effusion, collapse of pulmonary lob- 
ules, hemorrhagic infarctus, and carcinoma of lung. Into 
the diagnosis of all these affections, both bronchophony 
and increased vocal resonance enter ; the former, when 
solidification is considerable or complete, and the latter 
when it is slight or moderate. Increased vocal resonance 
is especially valuable in the diagnosis of early or incipi- 
ent phthisis. An abnormal resonance, however slight, at 
the summit of the chest on one side, is an important sign 
in that affection. In determining an abnormal resonance 
on the right side, either at the summit or elsewhere, al- 
lowance must always be made for the normally greater 
resonance on this side. 

Increased vocal resonance has the same import as the 
broncho-vesicular respiration. These two signs, however, 



INCREASED BRONCHIAL WHISPER. 127 

are not always in the same proportion; that is, the 
characters of the latter may be marked out of proportion 
to the amount of the increase of the vocal resonance, and 
vice versa. 

Increased vocal fremitus generally accompanies in- 
creased vocal resonance, and it denotes solidification of 
lung. Fremitus, however, and resonance are not always 
in equal proportion, that is, either may be increased 
more than the other. An increased fremitus is some- 
times of value in the diagnosis of phthisis. The greater 
fremitus on the right side of the chest is always to be 
borne in mind, and due allowance is to be made for this 
disparity in determining that the fremitus is increased. 

Increased Bronchial Whisper. 

The significance of this sign is the same as that of 
increased vocal resonance and the broncho-vesicular 
respiration ; it represents the same physical condition as 
the two latter signs, namely, solidification of lung, 
greater or less, but below the degree requisite to give 
rise to bronchophony and bronchial respiration. Its 
diagnostic application is, therefore, involved in the same 
pulmonary affections. 

The characters of the sign are those which belong to 
the expiratory sound in the broncho- vesicular respiration. 
They consist, therefore, of increase of intensity and 
length, a quality more or less tubular, and the pitch 
raised, these modifications of the normal expiratory 
sound varying in degree between the slightest appre- 
ciable morbid change and a close approximation to the 
bronchophonic whisper. The modifications in degree 
correspond to the degree of solidification. To appre- 



128 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

ciate the characters of this sign, it must be studied in 
comparison with those of the normal bronchial whisper 
in different portions of the chest. The most important 
of the diagnostic applications of the sign is in cases of 
phthisis in its early stage. In this application, the 
points of normal disparity between the two sides of the 
chest at the summit are to be borne in mind, and due 
allowance made for them (vide page 83). 

A greater intensity of the bronchial whisper at the 
right summit is not evidence of disease; but greater 
intensity at the left summit is always abnormal. As a 
rule, the pitch of the normal bronchial whisper at the 
left, is higher than that at the right summit ; if, there- 
fore, with a greater intensity of the whisper at the right 
summit, it be a matter of doubt whether it denote dis- 
ease or not, when the pitch is higher at this summit, it 
is to be considered as morbid. 

Cavernous Whisper. — The characters distinctive of 
the cavernous whisper are those of the expiratory sound 
in the cavernous respiration, namely, lowness of pitch, 
and the quality blowing, that is, non-tubular. The in- 
tensity and the duration of the sound are variable. It 
is limited to a circumscribed space corresponding to the 
situation and size of the cavity. Not infrequently the 
characters of the sign are brought into contrast with 
those of whispering bronchophony, or increased bronchial 
whisper, these latter signs existing in close proximity, 
and representing solidification of lung in the immediate 
neighborhood of the cavity. The diagnostic application 
of this sign is chiefly to advanced phthisis. 

Pectoriloquy. — In pectoriloquy, not merely the voice, 
but the speech, is transmitted through the chest; the 
auscultator recognizes words uttered by the patient. 



PECTORILOQUY. 129 

The student, however, must not expect to be able to 
carry on a conversation with the patient by means of the 
stethoscope. Often single words only can be recognized. 
To make sure that these are transmitted through the 
chest, care must be taken to exclude their direct trans- 
mission from the patient's mouth, and the auscultator 
should not know beforehand the words which are to be 
spoken. If these rules be not observed, the auscultator 
may err in supposing that the words are transmitted 
through the chest. When auscultation is practised with 
one ear, the other should be closed. 

The speech with either the loud or the whispered voice 
may be transmitted, the latter, distinguished as whisper- 
ing pectoriloquy, being much more frequent than the 
former ; moreover, in determining whispering pectorilo- 
quy, there is less liability to error in mistaking the per- 
ception of words coming directly from the mouth for the 
transmission through the chest. In the production of 
this sign, much depends on the distinctness with which 
words are articulated by the patient. 

Pectoriloquy belongs among the cavernous signs ; but 
it is by no means exclusively the sign of a cavity ; the 
speech may also be transmitted by solidified lung. It is 
easy to determine in any case whether the sign denotes 
a cavity or solidified lung. If, with transmitted speech, 
the voice have the characters of bronchophony, the sign 
represents solidification of lung ; if, on the other hand, 
the characters of bronchophony be wanting, the sign 
represents a cavity. These statements apply equally to 
the loud and to the whispered voice. Of course, asso- 
ciated signs will be likely to show whether a cavity exists 
or not. It is to be added that a cavity and solidification 



130 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

of lung existing together, may conjointly be concerned 
in the production of the sign. 

Amphoric Voice or Echo. — This sign is identical in 
character with amphoric respiration, with which it is 
usually associated {vide page 100). The amphoric into- 
nation may accompany the loud voice and the whisper ; 
generally, it is more appreciable or marked with the 
latter. Its significance is the same as that of amphoric 
respiration. As a rule, it represents the conditions in 
pneumothorax, namely, a large space filled with air and 
perforation of lung. In this affection it is associated 
with other signs which suffice for a prompt and positive 
diagnosis. It is not invariably found in pneumothorax, 
and it may be present in a case at one time and wanting 
at another time, its production being dependent on the 
perforation being above the level of liquid, if the latter 
exist, and on the bronchial tubes leading to the perfo- 
ration being unobstructed. When not associated with 
other signs which are diagnostic of pneumothorax, or 
pneumo-hydrothorax, it denotes a phthisical cavity of 
considerable size. It is not infrequently a sign of a 
phthisical cavity with rigid walls and communicating 
freely with bronchial tubes. It has this significance 
whenever pneumothorax can b& excluded ; and the asso- 
ciated signs in the latter affection are such that its ex- 
clusion is always practicable. 

The amphoric sound sometimes is observed to follow 
the oral voice ; hence, the name amphoric echo. 

Diminished and Suppressed Vocal Resonance. — 
Diminution and suppression of the normal vocal reso- 
nance occur especially when the pleural cavity contains 
either liquid or air. Whenever the lungs are not in con- 
tact with the Avails of the chest, the vocal resonance, as 



DIMINISHED VOCAL RESONANCE. 131 

a rule, is either notably lessened or wanting. The sign 
is, therefore, of value in diagnosis in cases of pleurisy 
with effusion, empyema, hydrothorax, and pneumothorax. 
"When the pleural cavity is partially filled with liquid, 
there is diminution or suppression of the resonance from 
the level of the liquid downward; and generally, just 
above the level of the liquid, the resonance is increased, 
owing to condensation of the lung. The sign is well 
illustrated by the contrast in such cases above and below 
the level of the liquid. The changes of the level of the 
liquid with changes in position of the body, may be as 
well demonstrated by means of vocal resonance as by 
percussion. 

The practical importance of diminished and suppressed 
vocal resonance relates chiefly to the diagnosis of the 
affections just named. In this application, however, the 
associated signs must be taken into account. The vocal 
resonance may be diminished or suppressed when the 
lung is completely solidified in the second stage of 
pneumonia ; also in pulmonary oedema, and over the site 
of an intra-thoracic tumor. 

If the vocal resonance be normal, that is, neither in- 
creased nor diminished, we are warranted in excluding 
all the affections which have been named. If this state - 
ment is to be qualified in any measure, the exceptional 
instances are so rare that, practically, they may be dis- 
regarded. 

Diminished vocal resonance may be found over a pul- 
monary abscess before the pus is evacuated, and over a 
cavity filled with liquid. The sign is then limited to a 
circumscribed space. Obstruction of a bronchial tube 
diminishes resonance in so far as the column of air is a 
medium for the conduction of vocal sound. 



132 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

The normal disparity between the two sides of the 
chest is to be borne in mind with reference to diminished 
or suppressed, as well as to increased, vocal resonance ; 
otherwise, the relative feebleness of the resonance on the 
left side in health might be considered to be morbid. 
The normally greater resonance on the right side ren- 
ders it easier to determine a morbid diminution on this 
than on the left side. 

Diminished and Suppressed Vocal Fremitus. — This 
tactile sensation, which is appreciable in auscultation, 
as a rule, is, on the one hand, increased, and, on the 
other hand, diminished or suppressed, under the same 
physical conditions which occasion corresponding modifi- 
cations of the vocal resonance. Diminished or sup- 
pressed vocal fremitus, therefore, has the same diagnostic 
significance as diminished or suppressed vocal resonance. 
Usually the abnormal modifications of resonance and 
fremitus go together, but either may be out of proportion 
to the other. The signs relating to fremitus thus corro- 
borate those relating to resonance. The former may be 
marked when the latter admit of doubt. Diminished or 
suppressed fremitus is valuable in the diagnosis of pleu- 
risy with effusion, empyema, hydrothorax, and pneumo- 
thorax. 

With regard to vocal fremitus, as to vocal resonance, 
it is essential to take cognizance of the normal disparity 
between the two sides of the chest; the greater rela- 
tive fremitus, on the right side, as a rule, being no less 
marked than the relatively greater resonance on that 
side. 

Metallic Tinkling. — This sign has the same characters 
when it accompanies either the loud or whispered voice, 
as when it is heard with respiration, and, of course, it 



COUGHING OR TUSSIVE SIGNS. 133 

has the same significance. It may be more marked with 
acts of speaking than with the respiratory acts. 

Signs obtained by Acts of Coughing or Tussive Signs. 

Acts of coughing may be made subservient to auscul- 
tation of respiratory sounds in two ways : First, by the 
removal of temporary obstruction from the accumulation 
of mucus within bronchial tubes. If the respiratory 
murmur be diminished or suppressed over a portion or 
the whole of one side of the chest, sometimes an act of 
coughing effects dislodgment of a mass of mucus from 
either a primary bronchus or one of its subdivisions, and 
the normal murmur is at once restored. The dependence 
of the morbid sign upon a temporary obstruction is thus 
demonstrated. Second, by an act of coughing more air 
is expelled than by an ordinary expiration, and in the 
following inspiration the vesicles have a wider range of 
expansion, giving rise to a proportionately loud inspira- 
tory sound; hence, the characters of this sound are more 
pronounced and can be better studied. For these two 
objects it is often advisable to request the patient to 
cough with a certain degree of force. 

Acts of coughing, moreover, give rise to auscultatory 
signs w r hich have their analogues in signs obtained by 
respiration and the voice. These tussive signs are of 
less value than the respiratory and vocal signs, and in 
most cases, owing to the latter being sufficient for diag- 
nosis, they may be said to be superfluous ; nevertheless, 
they may be observed sometimes with advantage. When 
the conditions are present which are represented by 
bronchial respiration, bronchophony and the broncho- 
phonic whisper, sounds are obtained which correspond to 
12 



134 AUSCULTATION IN DISEASE. 

these in their characters. The cough is then said to be 
bronchial. With the stethoscope applied over an empty 
cavity of some size, situated near the surface of the lung, 
the ear receives with acts of coughing a concussion or 
shock which is sometimes so forcible as to be painful. 
This corresponds to an intense vocal resonance. Limited 
to a circumscribed space, it is a highly significant 
cavernous sign. A low pitched blowing sound cor- 
responds to the expiratory sound in the cavernous res- 
piration and the cavernous whisper. An amphoric 
intonation may be heard with acts of coughing, which 
corresponds to amphoric respiration and amphoric voice. 
This sign is sometimes more marked with cough than 
with the breathing and voice. Cavernous gurgling may 
also be obtained more distinctly with cough than with 
respiration. Finally, metallic tinkling not infrequently 
accompanies acts of coughing. 



PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. 135 



CHAPTER VI. 

THE PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS OF DISEASES OF THE 
RESPIRATORY ORGANS. 

Affections of the larynx and trachea — Bronchitis seated in large bronchial 
tubes — Bronchitis seated in small bronchial tubes, or capillary bron- 
chitis — Collapse of pulmonary lobules — Lobular pneumonia — Asthma — 
Pulmonary or vesicular emphysema — Pleurisy, acute and chronic — 
Empyema — Hydrothorax — Pneumothorax — Pneumo-hydrothorax — 
Pneumo-pyothorax — Acute lobar pneumonia — Circumscribed pneu- 
monia — Embolic pneumonia — Hemorrhagic infarctus — Pulmonary 
apoplexy -r- Pulmonary gangrene — Pulmonary oedema — Carcinoma of 
lung — Tumor within the chest — Acute miliary tuberculosis — Pulmon- 
ary phthisis — Fibroid phthisis, interstitial pneumonia, or cirrhosis of 
lung — Diaphragmatic hernia. 

In the preceding chapters the physical conditions 
incident to the morbid changes occurring in the affections 
of the respiratory organs have been enumerated ; and 
the physical signs, obtained by percussion and ausculta- 
tion, representing these conditions, have been considered, 
severally, as regards their distinctive characters and their 
significance. The object of this chapter is to group the 
physical conditions embraced in the different diseases of 
the respiratory system respectively, together with the 
representative signs on which rests the physical diagnosis 
of each of the diseases. The scope of this manual is 
limited to the physical diagnosis of these affections ; but 
the fact is not to be lost sight of that in practical medi- 
cine physical signs are not to be disassociated from symp- 
toms and pathological laws. An exclusive reliance on 
physical signs would lead to errors in diagnosis, although, 



136 PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. 

doubtless, errors more important and more frequent neces- 
sarily occur when the practitioner ignores percussion and 
auscultation. The signs furnished by percussion and 
auscultation only have been thus far considered, but in 
grouping these in this chapter, signs obtained by other 
methods of physical exploration will be embraced in so 
far as they enter into the diagnosis of the different dis- 
eases of the respiratory system. These different dis- 
eases will be taken up separately with the exception of 
those seated in the larynx and trachea. With reference 
to physical signs the laryngeal and tracheal affections 
may be considered collectively. 

Affections of the Larynx and Trachea. 

The physical signs referable to the chest in diseases of 
the larynx and trachea, denote more or less obstruction 
to the free passage of air through these sections of the 
air tubes. The obstruction in the different diseases in- 
volves different pathological conditions. Spasm of the 
glottis is one of these conditions, constituting the affec- 
tions known as laryngismus stridulus and spasmodic 
croup, occurring also as a pathological element in laryn- 
gitis, and sometimes in connection with aneurism, or a 
tumor of some kind, involving the recurrent laryngeal 
nerve. Another pathological condition is the opposite of 
this, namely, paralysis of the muscles of the glottis, the 
vocal chords remaining flaccid, and approximating during 
inspiration. Other pathological conditions are, oedema 
of the glottis, swelling of the membrane at the glottis in 
laryngitis, together with, in the adult, submucous infil- 
tration, diphtheritic exudation, cicatrization of ulcers, 
morbid growths, and the presence of foreign bodies. 



AFFECTIONS OF LARYNX AND TRACHEA. 137 

In the affections involving the foregoing pathological 
conditions, percussion and auscultation are of use, first, 
by enabling the physician to exclude all diseases within 
the chest. The absence of signs showing the existence 
of pulmonary diseases renders it certain that the symp- 
toms denoting embarrassment of respiration are referable 
to the larynx or trachea. Second, by means of auscul- 
tation the amount of obstruction may be determined 
more accurately than by the subjective symptoms. The 
amount of obstruction is represented by a proportionate 
weakening of the vesicular murmur. This is more 
reliable as regards determining a dangerous amount of 
obstruction than the sense of the want of air or the suf- 
fering of the patient. The degree of diminution of the 
vesicular murmur is determinable with the more accuracy 
the better the auscultator is acquainted with the normal 
intensity, that is, the intensity prior to the occurrence of 
obstruction. With this knowledge, the weakening of the 
murmur is a correct criterion of the amount of obstruc- 
tion. In all the pathological conditions named, the 
respiratory murmur is more or less diminished in in- 
tensity on both sides of the chest ; there are no signs 
obtained by percussion, nor do vocal resonance or fre- 
mitus offer anything distinctive. 

In cases of considerable or great obstruction during 
inspiration, inspection furnishes marked signs. The ex- 
pansion of the chest on both sides is restricted, the lower 
part of the chest is contracted in the act of inspiration, 
and in this act the soft parts above the clavicles are de- 
pressed. The contrast between these abnormal move- 
ments and the normal thoracic movements of the patient, 
is striking and distinctive. 

An important application of auscultation is the localiz- 
12* 



138 PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. 

ation of a foreign body which has been inhaled. If the 
vesicular murmur on both sides be more or less weak- 
ened, the foreign body must be situated in either the 
larynx or the trachea. If, on the other hand, the vesicu- 
lar murmur be weakened or suppressed on one side, and 
increased on the other side, the body is lodged in a 
primary bronchus. The importance of this application 
of auscultation before opening the trachea to remove a 
foreign body, is sufficiently obvious. The situation of a 
foreign body may be changed from one bronchus to the 
other by an act of coughing, even after an operation has 
been commenced ; this is, of course, at once determinable 
by auscultation. 



Bronchitis Seated in Large Bronchial Tubes. 

In bronchitis, either acute or chronic, as it is ordinarily 
presented in practice, the inflammation is seated in the 
large bronchial tubes, in many cases probably not ex- 
tending beyond the primary bronchi. The physical 
conditions are, more or less swelling of the mucous 
membrane, this, however, not being sufficient to occasion 
any notable obstruction to the free passage of air, and 
the presence, in different cases, in greater or less quan- 
tity, of mucus, muco-purulent matter, pure pus, and 
serum. 

The physical diagnosis involves negative rather than 
positive points; in other words, the diseases from which 
bronchitis is to be differentiated are excluded by the 
absence of their diagnostic signs. These diseases are 
pneumonia, pleurisy, and phthisis. Each of these is 
characterized by the presence of signs, the absence of 



BRONCHITIS IN LARGE BRONCHIAL TUBES. 139 

which warrants its exclusion. In bronchitis there is no 
disparity between the two sides of the chest in the 
resonance obtained by percussion, nor in vocal resonance, 
the bronchial whisper, and fremitus. The swelling of 
the bronchial mucous membrane may cause some diminu- 
tion of the intensity of the vesicular murmur, but as 
the affection is bilateral, and the bronchial tubes on each 
side are aifected equally, both in degree and extent, no 
appreciable disparity in this respect between the two 
sides is caused by this physical condition. Weakening 
or suppression of the murmur over an area greater or 
less, may be caused by bronchial obstruction from a 
plug of mucus. This obstruction is sometimes removed 
by an act of expectoration, after which the murmur is 
found to have returned, or to have regained its normal 
intensity. 

The foregoing points, taken in connection with the 
history and symptoms, suffice for the diagnosis. Signs 
due directly to the disease represent diminished calibre 
of the tubes at certain points from swelling of the mem- 
brane, adhesive mucus, and spasm of bronchial muscular 
fibres. These signs are the dry bronchial rales. They 
are rarely prominent, and are oftener absent than pres- 
ent, if the bronchitis be unaccompanied by asthma ; 
hence, they are of little value in the diagnosis. Other 
signs are the bubbling sounds or the moist bronchial 
rales. In acute bronchitis, these are oftener absent than 
present. They occur when liquid morbid products with- 
in the tubes are unusually abundant, or when the removal 
of these is with difficulty effected by expectoration in 
consequence of muscular debility or other causes. These 
rales are abundant and loud in proportion as the liquid 
within the tubes is either muco-purulent, purulent, or 



140 PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. 

serous in character. They are more or less coarse in 
proportion to the size of the tubes in which the bubbling 
takes place. 

The diagnostic points negative and positive, which 
have been stated, are alike applicable to acute and 
chronic bronchitis, it being, of course, understood that 
the affection is primary, that is, not secondary to some 
other pulmonary disease. 

Bronchitis Seated in Small Bronchial Tubes. Capillary 
Bronchitis. Collapse of Pulmonary Lobules. Lobular 
Pneumonia. 

Inflammation extending into the small tubes (capillary 
bronchitis) occasions in these the same physical condi- 
tions which are incident to bronchitis affecting tubes of 
large size, namely, swelling of the membrane, and the 
presence of liquid morbid products. The latter are not 
as easily removed by expectoration as when they are 
within large tubes, and, therefore, they are constantly 
present in greater or less quantity. These conditions in 
small tubes involve obstruction to the free passage of air 
to and from the air vesicles ; hence, the vast difference 
as regards the symptoms, the suffering, and the danger. 
The affection is bilateral, a fact greatly enhancing the 
gravity of the affection. An incidental physical condi- 
tion is solidification, generally in disseminated portions of 
lung, the latter varying in number and size. These por- 
tions of solidified lung denote either collapse of pulmo- 
nary lobules or lobular pneumonia, or both in conjunction. 
To this incidental affection, German writers apply the 
name " Catarrhal pneumonia." Of course, any discus- 
sion of pathological questions suggested by these names 
would be here out of place. With reference to diagnosis 



CAPILLARY BRONCHITIS. 141 

it is to be borne in mind that the solidified portions of 
lung in cases of bronchitis seated in small tubes are espe- 
cially situated in the lower lobes. Another incidental 
physical condition is temporary dilatation of the air cells, 
or vesicular emphysema, seated in the upper lobes. Both 
of these incidental conditions are bilateral, like the bron- 
chitis with which they are connected. Collapse of pul- 
monary lobules, or lobular pneumonia, or both, and 
emphysema occur in only a certain proportion of the 
cases of bronchitis seated in small tubes. The signs, 
therefore, admit of a division into those which relate, 
1st, to the bronchitis, and, 2d, to these incidental affec- 
tions. With reference to the diagnosis, the fact is to be 
borne in mind that bronchitis seated in small tubes occurs 
chiefly in children and the aged. 

The physical diagnosis of bronchitis seated in small 
tubes, rests on negative points, together with a positive 
sign which is uniformly present. This sign is the fine 
moist bronchial or subcrepitant rale, present on both 
sides and diffused over the chest. The bubbling sounds 
are to be distinguished from the fine dry crackling sounds 
or the crepitant rale, to the characters of which the 
former in some measure approximate. 

The bronchitis gives rise neither to dulness on percus- 
sion, nor to any notable change in vocal resonance, or 
fremitus. The respiratory murmur, if not obscured by 
rales, is weakened on both sides. Irrespective of being 
drowned by rales, it may be suppressed by the amount 
of bronchial obstruction. These are the negative points 
in the diagnosis. In pulmonary oedema, fine moist 
bronchial rales are present on both sides, but in this 
affection there is notable dulness on percussion, and the 
affection occurs in certain pathological connections, 



142 PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. 

namely, with mitral stenosis, and disease of the kidneys. 
Acute tuberculosis may present the moist bronchial rales 
with the negative points which, in connection with symp- 
toms, characterize bronchitis seated in the small tubes. 
The differentiation is to be based on differences pertaining 
to the history and duration, together with the age of the 
patient. 

The coexistence of the incidental affections, namely, 
collapse of pulmonary lobules, or lobular pneumonia, and 
emphysema, occasions additional signs. If the solidified 
portions of lung be numerous, or considerable in size, 
there will be dulness on percussion in circumscribed 
situations on the posterior aspect of the chest. This 
will be found on both sides, but perhaps more marked 
on one side. Broncho-vesicular or the bronchial respira- 
tion may be present, together with the vocal signs of 
solidification, namely, either increased vocal resonance, 
or bronchophony, and increased vocal fremitus. The 
moist rales produced within solidified portions of lung 
are high in pitch, whereas, if solidification do not exist, 
these rales are comparatively low in pitch. The exist- 
ence of solidification at any point may be determined by 
the pitch of the rales, as well as by the foregoing respi- 
ratory and vocal signs. 

On the anterior aspect of the chest in the upper and 
middle regions, on both sides, the resonance on percus- 
sion is vesiculotympanitic, the respiratory murmur 
weakened or suppressed, and the rhythm altered — in 
short, the combination of signs which will be stated 
under the head of emphysema. 

In the cases in which the bronchitis occasions great 
obstruction in the small tubes, and, still more, if collapse 
of lobules, or lobular pneumonia and emphysema occur, 



ASTHMA. 143 

important signs are obtained by inspection. The ante- 
rior portion of the chest remains expanded, and retraction 
of the lower part of the chest takes place in the acts of 
inspiration. 

Asthma. 

The pathologico-physical condition in a paroxysm of 
asthma, is obstruction in the small bronchial tubes 
attributable to spasm of the bronchial muscular fibres. 
With this condition is associated a temporary vesicular 
emphysema, which exists often as a persistent affection 
in persons who are subject to asthma. If the emphyse- 
matous condition already exist, it is increased during the 
paroxysm of asthma. Bronchitis generally coexists 
either as a transient or a chronic affection. In an 
asthmatic paroxysm, therefore, there are present the 
signs which are proper to asthma, together with those of 
emphysema, and associated bronchitis may also occasion 
additional signs. 

The physical diagnosis of asthma, like that of bron- 
chitis seated in small tubes, is based on negative points 
taken in connection with a sign w T hich is invariably 
present, namely, dry bronchial rales. These rales are 
more or less intense, and they are diffused over the 
entire chest. They are generally heard at a distance. 
The sibilant and sonorous varieties are mingled, and 
they are constantly changing as regards the character of 
the sounds. 

The negative points are the same as in capillary 
bronchitis, namely, absence of dulness on percussion, 
vocal resonance and fremitus also being unaltered. 
Asthma and bronchitis seated in small tubes agree in the 
fact that obstruction is the important physical condition. 



144 PHYSICAL DIAGNOSE. 

Pathologically they differ essentially in the obstruction 
being due in the latter affection to bronchial inflamma- 
tion, and in the former to spasm. The two affections 
differ in the signs representing these different conditions, 
fine moist bronchial rales existing in one, and loud 
diffused dry bronchial rales existing in the other. 

Taking the difference as regards the positive physical 
signs in connection with the history and symptoms, the 
differentiation of the two affections may be made without 
difficulty. 

The signs which relate to the associated emphysema- 
tous condition, are those which are diagnostic of this 
condition, existing irrespective of asthma; aud the 
physical diagnosis of emphysema will be next considered. 
Coexisting bronchitis may give rise to moist bronchial 
rales more or less coarse. These are, however, often 
wanting, and they are rarly marked during paroxysms 
of asthma. When present in this pathological connec- 
tion, they are low in pitch, denoting the absence of 
solidification of lung. 

Pulmonary or Vesicular Emphysema. 

This affection, as a rule, is seated exclusively or chiefly 
in the upper lobes. When it is lobar, in contradistinc- 
tion from lobular emphysema (in the latter variety the 
condition existing in comparatively a few disseminated 
or isolated portions of lung), increase in volume of the 
affected lobes is an important physical condition standing 
in relation to certain signs. Diminished range of ex- 
pansion with acts of inspiration is another physical con- 
dition; the affected lobes are in a permanent state of 
expansion approximating to that at the end of the inspi- 



PULMONARY EMPHYSEMA. 145 

ratory act. It follows from these conditions that the 
amount of air is in excess of the normal proportion to 
the solids and liquids in the affected lobes. Both lungs 
are affected, that is, the affection is bilateral. In the 
great majority of cases chronic bronchitis coexists, and 
patients affected with emphysema are often, but by no 
means invariably, subject to paroxysms of asthma. Not 
infrequently an asthmatic element, w T ith or without pro- 
nounced paroxysms of asthma, exists much of the time 
in connection with emphysema. The emphysematous 
condition, as a rule, w r ith few exceptions, is greater in 
the upper lobe of the left than of the right lung. A rare 
condition, which is generally included under the name 
emphysema, differs materially from the ordinary form of 
this affection. This condition is that also known as 
senile atrophy of the lungs. The volume of the lungs 
is not increased in this variety of emphysema, the pro- 
portion of air over the solids is, however, in excess, 
owing to the diminution of the latter from atrophy. 

The diagnostic evidence obtained by percussion is 
quite distinctive of lobar emphysema. The resonance 
over the upper and middle regions of the chest on both 
sides is vesiculo-tympanitic, that is, the intensity of the 
resonance is abnormally increased, the quality is a com- 
bination of the vesicular and tympanitic, and the pitch 
is more or less raised. Owing to the fact that the em- 
physema is greater on the left than on the right side, 
the vesiculo-tympanitic resonance is more marked on the 
left side. The difference in intensity between the two 
sides may lead to the error of regarding the resonance 
on the right side as dulness. The error is avoided by 
attention to the pitch and the quality of the resonance. 
If dulness existed on the right side, the pitch of the 
13 



146 PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. 

sound should be higher on that side ; on the other hand, 
if the difference in intensity be due to the greater amount 
of emphysema on the left side, the pitch is higher on 
that side, and the quality vesiculo-tympanitic. The 
attention of the student is particularly called to the fore- 
going points of distinction. Assuming that a vesiculo- 
tympanitic resonance exists anteriorly on both sides, and 
that it is marked on the left as contrasted with the right 
side, how is the existence of this sign on the right side 
to be determined? The answer is, the resonance over 
the upper is to be compared with that over the lower 
lobe of the right lung. Percussing first over the upper 
lobe of the right lung, and second over the lower lobe 
of this lung, that is, posteriorly, below the scapula, or 
in the infra-axillary region, the vesiculo-tympanitic reso- 
nance over the upper lobe is rendered manifest. In a 
series of patients affected with emphysema, the uniformity 
of the results of percussion is very striking ; anteriorly, 
over the left side, the resonance is vesiculo-tympanitic 
as compared with the resonance on the right side, and 
the resonance is shown to be vesiculo-tympanitic on the 
right side anteriorly as compared with the resonance 
posteriorly below the scapula. 

As regards the abnormal modifications of the respira- 
tory murmur in emphysema, there is, first, either weak- 
ened respiratory murmur without notable change in pitch 
or quality, or suppression of the murmur. Diminished 
intensity of the murmur exists over the upper lobes on both 
sides, as compared with the murmur over the lower lobes ; 
and in most cases the greater diminution or the suppression 
is on the left rather than on the right side. Exceptions 
to the latter statement may be caused by obstruction of 
the bronchial tubes on the right, and not on the left, side 



PULMONARY EMPHYSEMA. 147 

by an accumulation of mucus, and, in rare instances, by 
the fact that the emphysema is greater on the right side. 
Second, modifications in rhythm are not infrequent. 
These consist in a shortened (deferred) inspiratory, and 
a prolonged expiratory sound. In some instances an 
inspiratory sound is wanting, and an expiratory sound is 
alone heard. The prolonged expiratory sound in emphy- 
sema is always low in pitch and blowing or non-tubular 
in quality, in these respects differing from the prolonged 
expiration which denotes solidification of lung, the latter 
being high in pitch and tubular in quality. These essen- 
tial points of difference I claim to have been the first to 
have distinctly stated. 

The foregoing signs obtained by percussion and aus- 
cultation are those which are in a positive sense diagnostic 
of emphysema. Associated with these are certain im- 
portant negative points, as follows : vocal resonance, 
vocal fremitus, and bronchial whisper are not notably 
altered. These negative points suffice to exclude other 
affections than emphysema. 

Signs obtained by inspection are quite distinctive of 
this affection. Emphysema, existing in a marked degree, 
causes a characteristic deformity of the chest; the anterior 
surface is bulging, giving to the chest an abnormally 
rounded, bow-windowed, or barrel-shaped appearance, 
the lower part appearing to be contracted. This de- 
formity occurs when the emphysema has been developed 
in early life. The movements of the chest in inspiration 
are characteristic. In tranquil breathing there is but 
little movement of the upper and anterior regions ; but 
in forced breathing the sternum and ribs move together 
as if they were one solid piece. The lower portion of 
the chest and the epigastrium are retracted in inspira- 



148 PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. 

tion ; the costal angle is diminished, the ribs and carti- 
lages connected with the sternum being sometimes on a 
line ; the soft parts above the clavicle and sternum are 
often notably depressed with inspiration. Owing to de- 
pression of the heart downward and inward, the cardiac 
impulses are seen and felt in the epigastrium. Percus- 
sion and vocal resonance, at the same time, show the 
superficial cardiac region to be diminished or lost, the 
upper lobe of the left lung covering this space. There 
may be more or less anterior curvature of the spine, and 
the lower portions of the scapulae may project, so that 
sometimes the plane of these bones is almost horizontal. 
These striking appearances characterize cases in which 
emphysema exists in a marked degree, and especially 
when the affection dates from early life. They are less 
marked or wanting if the emphysema be moderate in de- 
gree, and it have taken place in middle-aged persons or 
those advanced in years. 

In the variety of emphysema distinguished as senile, 
or senile atrophy of the lungs, in which there is coales- 
cence of air vesicles, from destruction of the cell walls, 
without increased volume of the affected lobes, the diag- 
nosis is to be based on the vesiculo- tympanitic resonance 
on percussion, weakened respiratory murmur, with, per- 
haps, the alterations in rhythm, sinking of the soft parts 
above the clavicles, and the negative points exclusive of 
deformity of the chest, which have been described. 

Emphysema can hardly be confounded with any other 
affection than phthisis. The differentiation between these 
two affections is sufficiently easy, if the diagnostic points, 
positive and negative, of the former, be appreciated. 
Phthisis occurring in a patient affected with emphysema, 
makes a somewhat difficult problem in diagnosis, but, 



PLEURISY, ACUTE AND CHRONIC. 149 

fortunately for the diagnostician, a patient with emphy- 
sema very rarely becomes phthisical, 

Owing to the frequency with which an asthmatic ele- 
ment enters into the clinical history of emphysema, the 
dry bronchial (sibilant and sonorous) rales are often pres- 
ent, even when paroxysms of asthma do not occur. 

Pleurisy, Acute and Chronic. Empyema. Hydrothorax. 

In the first stage of acute pleurisy, that is, prior to 
the effusion of liquid, the physical conditions are, the 
presence of more or less recently exuded, soft, lymph 
upon the pleural surfaces, which are now in contact, and 
restrained movements of respiration on the affected side 
in consequence of the pain which they occasion. In the 
second stage, serous liquid accumulates within the pleural 
cavity, the quantity varying in different cases, sometimes, 
although rarely, filling the chest on the affected side. 
In proportion to the quantity of liquid, the space over 
which the pleural surfaces are in contact is restricted, 
the movements of these surfaces over each other are 
limited, and the lung is condensed. In the third stage, 
the quantity of liquid decreases, the space over which 
the pleural surfaces are in contact increases, and the 
compressed lung is more or less expanded. The lymph 
upon the pleural surfaces becomes more dense and ad- 
herent. The surfaces may become agglutinated by the 
intervening lymph. Finally, in convalescence, perma- 
nent adhesions result from the production or growth of 
areolar tissue. 

In subacute and chronic pleurisy, there is the same 
series of physical conditions, the points of difference 
being, as a rule, a less amount of exudation, and a 

13* 



150 PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. 

greater amount of effused liquid. The quantity of liquid 
in chronic pleurisy is often sufficient to compress the lung 
into a small solid mass, situated at the upper and poste- 
rior part of the chest, and to dilate the affected side. The 
heart is often removed from its normal situation. If the 
pleurisy be on the left side, the heart may be pushed lat- 
erally beyond the right margin of the sternum ; if the 
pleurisy be on the right side, the heart is pushed later- 
ally to the left of its normal situation. 

In empyema the accumulation of pus is apt to be still 
greater than that of serous effusion in simple chronic 
pleurisy, causing, of course, greater dilatation of the 
chest, and more displacement of the heart. 

In these varieties of pleurisy, the affection, with rare 
exceptions, is unilateral. 

In hydrothorax the conditions differ, first, as regards 
the absence of the exudation of lymph ; second, the 
affection is bilateral, the effusion of liquid taking place 
in both pleural cavities : and third, although the quantity 
of liquid may be considerably greater on one side, the 
accumulation very rarely, if ever, is sufficient to cause 
much dilatation of the chest on that side, with complete 
condensation of the lung, and notable displacement of the 
heart. 

The signs in the first stage of acute pleurisy are rela- 
tive feebleness of the respiratory murmur on the affected 
side, from the restrained respiratory movements on that 
side, and a rubbing friction sound. The former is not 
distinctive of pleurisy, being present when the respira- 
tory movements on one side are restrained by pain in 
intercostal neuralgia and pleurodynia. A friction sound 
is not always obtained. In the absence of this sound, 



PLEURISY, ACUTE AND CHRONIC. 151 

the physical diagnosis cannot be made with positiveness 
prior to the effusion of liquid. Assuming that the gene- 
ral and local symptoms point to an acute inflammatory 
affection, the differential diagnosis relates to pleurisy and 
pneumonia. A pleural friction sound may be present in 
the latter as well as the former of these two affections. 
The pathognomonic sign of pneumonia, the crepitant rale, 
being wanting, the differentiation, in this stage, must 
rest on diagnostic points pertaining to the symptoms. 

In the second stage of acute pleurisy, the diagnostic 
signs are those which denote the presence of liquid within 
the pleural cavity. These signs are simple and distinc- 
tive. There is either dulness or flatness on percussion 
at the base of the chest, extending upward a distance 
proportionate to the quantity of liquid. If the trunk be 
in a vertical position, that is, the patient sitting or stand- 
ing, the line of demarcation between the dulness or flat- 
ness and pulmonary resonance, is a horizontal line, on 
either the anterior, lateral, or posterior aspect of the 
chest. This line denotes the level of the liquid, and it 
is easily obtained by percussion. It is as easily deter- 
mined by auscultating the vocal resonance, this either 
abruptly ceasing or being notably diminished at the level 
of the liquid. Having ascertained the line forming the 
upper boundary of dulness or flatness on the anterior 
aspect of the chest, the patient sitting or standing, if the 
position be changed to recumbency on the back, and the 
pulmonary resonance be found then to extend more or 
less below this line, this fact is demonstrative proof of 
the presence of liquid. Proof in this way is obtained in 
a large majority of cases, the exceptional cases being 
those in which the pleural surfaces are united, either by 
agglutination or permanent adhesions, above the level of 



152 PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. 

the liquid. 1 The resonance on percussion over the lung 
above the level of the liquid is generally vesiculotym- 
panitic — the intensity increased, the pitch raised, the 
vesicular and tympanitic quality combined. Sometimes 
there is so little vesicular quality in this vesiculo- tympa- 
nitic resonance, that it may seem to be purely tympanitic, 
and is suggestive of pneumothorax. Associated signs 
will always prevent this error of observation. As a rule, 
vocal resonance and fremitus are either notably lessened 
or suppressed over the portion of the chest situated below 
the level of the liquid. There are occasional exceptions 
to this rule. The respiratory sound below the level of 
the liquid is suppressed. If any be heard, it is trans- 
mitted either from the lung above the liquid, or laterally, 
from the lung on the other side of the chest. Above the 
liquid the respiratory sound, as a rule, is weakened. If 
the amount of liquid be sufficient to produce much con- 
densation of lung, the respiratory sound is broncho-vesicu- 
lar. Sometimes, owing to the pleural surfaces above 
being adherent, a strip of lung at the level of the liquid 
is sufficiently condensed by compression to give a bron- 
chial respiration. Under these circumstances, there will 
be either bronchophony or the modification of that sign 
known as segophony. If the lung be not sufficiently 
compressed for the production of these signs of solidifi- 
cation, the vocal resonance is simply more or less in- 

1 The statement with regard to a horizontal line denoting the 
level of the liquid is to be qualified. Observations show that pos- 
teriorly the lung extends more or less downward near the spinal 
column, and that the level of the liquid forms a curve which may 
be represented by the letter S. Vide article by Prof. G. M. Garland, 
in the New York Medical Journal, number for Nov. 1879. Also 
treatise on " Pneumouo-Dynamics," by Prof. G., 1878. 



PLEURISY, ACUTE AND CHRONIC. 153 

creased. The fremitus is usually increased above the 
liquid. Over the unaffected side the respiratory murmur 
is increased in intensity. 

The foregoing signs are present when the pleural 
cavity is partially filled; a quarter, a half, or two-thirds 
of the thoracic space being occupied by liquid. The 
signs present when the cavity is completely filled, will 
be presently stated in connection with chronic pleurisy. 

The signs which have been stated show not only the 
presence of liquid, but its quantity. By means of these 
signs are readily ascertained the progressive increase or 
decrease in the quantity of liquid, and its disappearance. 
After the liquid has disappeared, often notable dulness 
on percussion remains for some time, showing the 
presence of lymph not yet absorbed. During the 
decrease of the liquid, and after its disappearance, a 
friction murmur is often perceived. This murmur is 
now apt to be rough — a rasping, grating, or creaking 
sound. It may be loud enough to be heard by the 
patient, and by others at a distance from the chest. It 
continues sometimes for a considerable period. 

The physical diagnosis in cases of chronic pleurisy, 
when the liquid occupies a portion only of the thoracic 
space, rests, of course, on precisely the same signs as in 
cases of acute pleurisy. If, however, the chest on the 
affected side be filled and dilated, certain of the signs 
which have been stated are wanting, and others are 
added. The affected side is everywhere flat on percus- 
sion. Flatness on percussion over the whole of one side, 
the affection being chronic, denotes, as a rule, with rare 
exceptions, either chronic simple pleurisy or empyema. 
Respiratory sound is wanting except at the summit over 
or near the compressed lung, where it is bronchial. 



154 PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. 

Some cases offer an important exception to this rule, 
namely, the bronchial respiration is diffused over the 
greater part, or even the whole, of the affected side. 
The student should bear in mind this fact; otherwise 
the diffusion of the bronchial respiration may lead to the 
suspicion that the flatness on percussion denotes solidifi- 
cation of lung, and not the presence of liquid. Other 
signs, however, should always correct this error. Vocal 
resonance and fremitus are, with these exceptions, either 
suppressed or notably diminished over the whole of the 
affected side. Generally, even when the chest is not 
dilated, the intercostal depressions are lessened or 
abolished. If the walls of the chest be thinly covered 
with integument, the two sides present a marked contrast 
in this respect. This is seen especially at the middle 
and lower regions of the chest anteriorly and laterally. 
It is especially marked at the end of the inspiratory act. 
If the affected side be dilated, this is apparent on inspec- 
tion, and may be determined accurately by semicircular 
or diametric mensuration, callipers being required for 
the latter. The respiratory movements on the affected 
side are diminished or annulled, and they are increased 
on the healthy side, the two sides affording a marked 
contrast in this regard. If the pleurisy be on the left 
side, the impulses of the heart are not infrequently felt 
on the right of the sternum. If the impulses cannot be 
felt, auscultation shows the maximum of the intensity of 
the heart-sounds to be more or less removed to the right. 
If the pleurisy be on the right side, the impulses or 
sounds of the heart denote more or less displacement 
laterally to the left. The intensity of the respiratory 
murmur on the unaffected side is notably increased. 
In cases of empyema the same signs are present as in 



PLEURISY, ACUTE AND CHRONIC. 155 

chronic pleurisy. The character of the liquid does not 
alter appreciably any of the signs which have been 
stated. Dilatation of the affected side of the chest is 
more apt to occur, and to be more marked than in simple 
pleurisy. The differential diagnosis between these two 
varieties of pleurisy is to be made with positiveness by 
the introduction of a small trocar and obtaining enough 
of the liquid to ascertain its character. 

When the left pleural cavity is filled with pus, the 
movements of the heart sometimes give to the affected 
side of the chest an impulse perceived by the eye and 
touch; hence, the term pulsating empyema. After a 
spontaneous perforation of the chest, followed by a cir- 
cumscribed purulent collection beneath the integument, 
communicating with the pus within the pleural cavity, 
the tumor thus formed sometimes has a strong pulsation 
which is synchronous with the ventricular systole, and 
may give rise to the suspicion of aneurism. 

In cases of hydrothorax the signs denote partial filling 
of the chest on both sides. The affection is bilateral. 
Generally the quantity of liquid in the two sides is not 
equal, and there is often a notable disparity in this 
respect. Friction sounds are never present. Variation 
of the level of the liquid with change of the position of 
the patient from the vertical to the horizontal, is nearly 
always determinable. Hydrothorax, meaning by this 
term a purely dropsical affection, is to be differentiated 
from double pleurisy with effusion. The history and 
symptoms, taken in connection with the signs, suffice for 
this discrimination. 



156 PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. 

Pneumothorax. Pneumo-hydrothorax. Pneumo-pyothorax. 

In the extremely rare cases of pneumothorax, that is, 
as distinguished from pneumo-hydrothorax, and pneumo- 
pyothorax the physical conditions are ; the presence of 
air partially or completely occupying the thoracic space, 
and condensation of lung in proportion to the space oc- 
cupied by air. 

The diagnostic signs are, a purely tympanitic resonance 
over a portion or the whole of the affected side of the 
chest : suppression of the vesicular murmur over a space 
corresponding to that in which tympanitic resonance is 
obtained, with notable diminution or suppression of vocal 
resonance and fremitus. Over the compressed lung, if 
the condensation amount to complete or considerable so- 
lidification, there will be bronchial respiration and bron- 
chophony ; if the solidification be not complete nor con- 
siderable, there will be broncho-vesicular respiration with 
increased vocal resonance and fremitus. The accumula- 
tion of air may be sufficient to dilate the affected side, 
and to restrain or annul the respiratory movements on 
this side. The appearances on inspection are then pre- 
cisely the same as in the cases of chronic pleurisy and 
empyema in which the affected side is dilated from the 
presence of liquid. Pneumothorax is, however, at once 
differentiated by the tympanitic resonance on percussion. 
If one side of the chest be more or less dilated, and the 
resonance over the side be purely tympanitic, the thora- 
cic space must be filled, not with liquid but with air. 
The intensity of the respiratory murmur on the healthy 
side is increased. 

In the great majority of cases in which the pleural 
cavity contains air, there is also present more or less 



PNEUMO-HYDROTHORAX. 157 

liquid, which may be serous or purulent. The affection 
is then known as pneumo-hydrothorax if the liquid be 
serous, and pneumo-pyothorax if it be purulent. The 
physical conditions are the same as in pneumothorax, with 
the addition of the presence of liquid. The relative 
proportions of liquid and air in different cases are variable, 
and, also, in the same case at different periods. 

The physical diagnosis of pneumo-hydrothorax, or 
pneumo-pyothorax, as distinguished from pneumothorax, 
embraces the signs of liquid, in addition to those of air, 
within the pleural cavity. If the quantity of liquid be 
large or considerable, percussion at the base of the chest 
gives flatness extending upward more or less, and tym- 
panitic resonance above, the patient either sitting or 
standing. A change from the vertical to the horizontal 
position invariably causes variation of the upper limit of 
the flatness, inasmuch as the liquid and air change their 
relative situations without an exception. The quantity of 
liquid is determined approximately by ascertaining the 
space over which the flatness on percussion extends. 
The line which divides the flatness and the tympanitic 
resonance does not accurately denote the level of the 
liquid, because tympanitic resonance is transmitted a cer- 
tain distance below this level ; hence, it is always to be 
assumed that the level of the liquid is somewhat higher 
than the upper boundary of the flatness. 

In either pneumothorax, pneumo-hydrothorax, or pneu- 
mo-pyothorax a group of auscultatory signs is often 
found w T hich are highly diagnostic, indeed almost pathog- 
nomonic. These signs are amphoric respiration, ampho- 
ric voice or echo, and metallic tinkling. The amphoric 
and the tinkling sounds may be present, either without 
14 



158 PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. 

the other, but they are not infrequently associated. 
Neither is present in every case, and they are not pres- 
ent in the same case at all times ; their absence, there- 
fore, by no means excludes the affections, and they are 
not essential to the diagnosis. When present, they de- 
note either air or air and liquid in the pleural cavity with 
perforation of lung, or a large phthisical cavity. Their 
occurrence in the latter is extremely rare, and whenever 
they are associated with other signs already stated, their 
diagnostic import is demonstrative. 

Pneumo-hydrothorax or pneumo-pyothorax may almost 
invariably be diagnosticated instantly by the presence 
of a succussion sound. Whenever distinct splashing is 
produced by succussion and referable to the chest, that 
is, not produced within the stomach, it is demonstrative 
of the presence of air and liquid within the j>leural 
cavity. 

Acute Lobar Pneumonia. 

In the first stage of this disease, there is an abnormal 
accumulation of blood within the vessels of the affected 
lobe (active congestion or hyperemia), with some exu- 
dation within the air vesicles and bronchioles. Gener- 
ally there is some exuded lymph upon the pleural surface, 
this being due to circumscribed dry pleurisy. In most 
cases there is also circumscribed bronchitis, which is limit- 
ed to the tabes within the affected lobe. In the second 
stage, there is solidification, due to the increase of exu- 
dation within the air vesicles. The solidification, at first 
limited, extends either rapidly or slowly, as a rule, over 
the whole lobe. Exceptionally, more or less liquid effu- 
sion into the pleural cavity takes place (pleuro-pneunio- 



ACUTE LOBAR PNEUMONIA. 159 

ilia), the pleurisy 'then extending beyond the limits of 
the affected lobe. In this stage the pneumonia may in- 
volve either another lobe of the lung primarily affected, 
or a lobe of the opposite lung ; and sometimes the dis- 
ease, by successive invasions, extends over the whole of 
one lung, together with a lobe of the opposite lung. The 
pneumonia, in these secondary invasions, is usually ac- 
companied by pleurisy and bronchitis. In the stage of 
resolution, the solidification of the affected lobe, or lobes, 
decreases, sometimes rapidly and sometimes slowly, until 
the normal condition is restored. If resolution do not 
take place, and the disease pass into the stage of puru- 
lent infiltration, the air vesicles and bronchial tubes con- 
tain a puruloid liquid in greater or less quantity. Ex- 
ceptionally pus is collected in a cavity, or in cavities, 
constituting pulmonary abscess. 

The physical diagnosis of acute lobar pneumonia in 
the first stage, must be based on the presence of the crep- 
itant rale, with moderate or slight dulness on percussion 
over the affected lobe. There is sometimes in this stage 
a pleuritic rubbing sound over the affected lobe. The 
crepitant rale is not always present, and, hence, the affec- 
tion cannot be excluded by the absence of this sign. 
When present, taken in connection with the symptoms, 
this sign is pathognomonic of the disease. It is impor- 
tant not to mistake for this sign fine bubbling or the 
subcrepitant rale. When the crepitant rale is wanting, a 
positive physical diagnosis must be deferred until more 
or less of the affected lobe becomes solidified, that is, 
when the disease passes into the second stage. 

The diagnosis in the second stage is to be based on 
the signs of solidification furnished by auscultation and 
percussion. The auscultatory signs are the broncho- 



160 PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. 

vesicular, followed by the bronchial, respiration ; in- 
creased vocal resonance, followed by bronchophony, and 
increased bronchial whisper, followed by whispering bron- 
chophony. The signs of solidification are manifest at 
first within a circumscribed space, situated over either 
the upper, the lower, or the middle portion of the affected 
lobe ; and either rapidly or slowly the signs extend, in 
most cases, over the entire lobe. The crepitant rale, if 
it have been present in the first, generally disappears in 
the second stage. Sometimes, however, it is not entirely 
lost in this stage. The broncho-vesicular respiration, 
increased vocal resonance, and increased bronchial whis- 
per are present when the solidification is slight or moder- 
ate ; the bronchial respiration, bronchophony, and bron- 
chophony whisper take their place when the solidification 
becomes considerable or complete. The latter signs, as 
a rule, speedily follow, inasmuch as the solidification in 
most cases quickly becomes complete or considerable. 
The foregoing three signs, denoting considerable or com- 
plete solidification, are usually present. Bronchial res- 
piration, however, is sometimes present without broncho- 
phony, and vice versa. Either, present alone, suffices to 
show the existence and the extent of the solidification. 
Moist bronchial or bubbling rales are sometimes, but 
rarely, heard over the affected lobe. 

There is notable dulness on percussion in the second 
stage. The dulness may approximate, and even amount 
to flatness. If a single lobe be affected, the dulness, or 
flatness, extends over a space corresponding to that occu- 
pied by the lobe or the portion of it which is solidified. 
In the anterolateral aspects of the chest, the dividing 
line between the solidified and the healthy lobe is readily 
ascertained by percussion, and this line is coincident 



ACUTE LOBAR PNEUMONIA. 161 

with the inter-lobar fissure. It sometimes happens that 
the upper and the lower lobe of the right lung are affected, 
the middle lobe not becoming involved. The space cor- 
responding to the middle lobe may then form an island 
of resonance surrounded by notable dulness on percus- 
sion. 

Whenever one lobe of a lung is affected, the resonance 
over the unaffected part of the same lung is abnormally 
increased, the pitch is raised, and the quality is vesiculo- 
tympanitic ; vesiculotympanitic resonance, in other words, 
is produced. This renders more marked the contrast be- 
tween dulness over the solidified, and resonance over the 
healthy, lobe. 

Over a portion of an upper lobe in the second stage, 
instead of notable dulness or flatness, there may be 
marked tympanitic resonance. This resonance proceeds 
from air within the trachea, and the bronchi exterior to 
the lungs, the lung substance being completely solidified; 
it is chiefly or especially marked over the site of these 
air tubes. In some cases the tympanitic resonance has 
the cracked-metal or the amphoric intonation. These 
signs, per se, might suggest either pneumothorax or 
phthisical cavities ; the associated respiratory and vocal 
signs, however, show only solidification of lung. In cases 
of pneumonia affecting the left lung, a tympanitic reso- 
nance is not infrequently propagated from the stomach 
more or less upward over the affected side of the chest. 
This may be readily traced to the stomach. On the 
right side, a tympanitic resonance is sometimes propa- 
gated a certain distance upward from the transverse 
colon. 

The commencement of the stage of resolution is de- 
noted by a broncho- vesicular respiration. The first 

14* 



162 PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. 

change observed is the presence of a little vesicular 
quality in the inspiratory sound. When this is observed, 
the respiration is no longer bronchial, but has become 
broncho-vesicular, although the pitch is still high, and 
the expiration is prolonged, high, tubular. This slight 
change shows that air begins to enter the pulmonary vesi- 
cles. As resolution goes on, more and more of the vesic- 
ular, takes the place of the tubular, quality in the in- 
spiratory sound, and the pitch is lowered in proportion ; 
the expiratory sound becomes proportionally less and less 
prolonged, its pitch lowered, its quality less tubular, 
until, at length, the normal characters of the respiratory 
murmur are regained. Resolution is then complete. 

While the broncho-vesicular respiration is undergoing 
the modifications just stated, the vocal sounds have cor- 
responding changes. Bronchophony persists for some 
time after the respiration has become broncho-vesicular, 
and then disappears, increased vocal resonance generally 
taking its place, and persisting until resolution is com- 
pleted. The bronchial whisper loses its bronchophonic 
characters, and is simply increased until its normal char- 
acters are regained. While the solidification is com- 
plete, the vocal fremitus may, or may not, be increased. 
It is sometimes diminished. When, however, resolution 
has so far progressed that bronchophony is lost, the fre- 
mitus is usually greater than in health, and so continues, 
but progressively lessening until the solidification entirely 
disappears. 

During the progress of resolution, the dulness on per- 
cussion diminishes in proportion as air enters the air 
vesicles. If tympanitic resonance have been present 
over the upper lobe, this gives place to a vesicular reso- 
nance. Some dulness, however, remains after the com- 



ACUTE LOBAR PNEUMONIA. 163 

pletion of resolution, and persists until the exuded lymph 
on the pleural surface is absorbed. The amount of dul- 
ness remaining when the respiratory and vocal signs 
denote resolution, is proportionate to the quantity of exu- 
dation^incidentto^the associated pleurisy. 

In this stage the crepitant rale not infrequently returns, 
if it have entirely disappeared during the second stage, 
and if it have persisted, it is more marked and diffused. 
It is now known as the returning crepitant rale. More 
frequently the rale in this stage is a fine bubbling or the 
subcrepitant. Both rales are not infrequently associ- 
ated ; and, from the distinctive characters of each, they 
are readily distinguished. Moist rales more or less fine 
or coarse are not infrequent. 

If the affection pass into the stage of purulent infiltra- 
tion, the" respiratory sounds are feeble or suppressed, 
having, if present, more or less of the bronchial charac- 
ters. Bubbling bronchial rales, coarse and fine, are 
abundant. Weak bronchophony may persist, or the 
vocal resonance may be diminished. Fremitus may, or 
may not, be increased. Notable dulness or flatness on 
percussion remains. 

If the pneumonia result in pulmonic abscess, there 
will be notable dulness or flatness on percussion within a 
circumscribed space, together with absence of respiratory 
murmur, and diminished or suppressed vocal resonance. 
These signs warrant a probable diagnosis which is cor- 
roborated by the sudden expectoration of pus in a con- 
siderable quantity. The signs just stated may then be 
followed by those denoting a cavity, namely, cavernous 
respiration and whisper, with intense vocal resonance. 



164 PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. 

Circumscribed Pneumonia. Embolic Pneumonia. Hemor- 
rhagic Infarctus or Pulmonary Apoplexy. 

The form of pneumonia known as lobular pneumonia, 
occurring chiefly in children, has been considered (vide 
Bronchitis seated in small-sized tubes). Whenever cir- 
cumscribed, as a rule, pneumonia is secondary to some 
other pulmonary affection. Circumscribed pneumonia, 
giving rise to an intra-vesicular exudation which may 
disappear readily by resolution or absorption, is not in- 
frequent in cases of phthisis. The signs are those which 
rejDresent solidification of lung within an area more or 
less circumscribed ; but the differentiation from the 
solidification proper to phthisis (tuberculous pneumonia) 
can only be made with positiveness after the signs have 
shown that the solidification has notably diminished or 
disappeared. 

In embolic pneumonia there may be dulness on per- 
cussion, with feeble bronchial or broncho-vesicular res- 
piration, or suppression of respiratory sound, weak 
bronchophony or increase of vocal resonance, within a 
circumscribed space, or spaces, generally on the posterior 
aspect of the chest, and oftenest on the right side. These 
signs, taken in connection with the symptoms and patho- 
logical conditions which are consistent with the supposi- 
tion of emboli received into the right side of the heart, 
namely, when the pulmonary symptoms follow puerperal 
disease, ulcers, wounds, or injuries, render the diagnosis 
quite positive. If, however, the pulmonary affection 
consist of small disseminated nodules, the foregoing 
signs will not be present. The diagnosis then must be 
based on the history and symptoms, taken in connection 
with the exclusion of other pulmonary affections by the 



PULMONARY GANGRENE. 165 

absence of signs which should be present if they existed. 
Bubbling rales at different situations may indicate the 
probable sites of the nodules. There may be pleuritic 
friction sounds. The signs may show, as a complication, 
pleurisy with effusion. 

Extravasation of blood (pneumorrhagia), if it be in 
small spaces, gives rise to no definite physical signs. If, 
however, extravasation extend over a considerable space, 
there will be dulness on percussion, with feeble or sup- 
pressed respiratory sound within an area corresponding 
to the extent of the extravasation. Within and near this 
area there will be likely to be moist bronchial rales more 
or less fine or coarse. The signs of solidification will 
not be present if the extravasation be unaccompanied by 
pneumonia. 

Pulmonary Gangrene. 

In diffused pulmonary gangrene, the physical signs are 
those of solidification extending over the greater part of 
the whole of a lobe. The diagnosis, however, can only 
be made when, in connection with these signs, there are 
present the characteristic fetor of the breath and expec- 
toration. 

In circumscribed gangrene there is dulness or flatness 
on percussion within an area corresponding to the extent 
of the affection, with either suppression of respiratory 
sound, or bronchial respiration, and the vocal signs of 
solidification. Within and near this space moist bron- 
chial rales are likely to be heard. The situation is 
usually on the posterior aspect of the chest. These signs 
do not suffice for a positive diagnosis, without the charac- 
teristic breath and expectoration. Cavernous signs may 



166 PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. 

appear after the gangrenous portion of lung has sloughed 
away, and been exj^ectorated. 

Pulmonary (Edema. 

The physical condition expressed by the term pulmo- 
nary oedema is the presence of effused serum within the 
air vesicles. With this condition is associated more or 
less pulmonary congestion. 

In cases of pulmonary oedema developed rapidly and 
largely in connection with renal disease, with obstruction 
at the mitral orifice of the heart, or with both these affec- 
tions combined, giving rise to great dyspnoea, and liable 
to end speedily in death, the following are the diagnostic 
signs : dulness on percussion on both sides of the chest, 
especially over the lower lobes, fine bubbling or the sub- 
crepitant rale diffused over the chest on both sides, to- 
gether with coarser bubbling sounds, and the murmur of 
respiration notably weak or suppressed over the lower 
lobes. Inasmuch as the lungs are not solidified, the 
rales are low in pitch. The vocal signs of solidification 
are, of course, wanting. Occasionally the crepitant rale 
is mingled with the fine bubbling sounds. 

This form of the affection is to be differentiated from 
hydrothorax with large effusion, and from so-called capil- 
lary bronchitis. Hydrothorax is always associated with 
more or less anasarca or general dropsy, whereas, pul- 
monary oedema, even when dependent on renal disease, 
may occur without dropsical effusion elsewhere. More- 
over, the presence of liquid within the pleural cavities, 
and its amount, may always be determined demonstra- 
tively in cases of hydrothorax (vide Pleurisy with effu- 
sion and Hydrothorax). Capillary bronchitis occurs 



PULMONARY (EDEMA. 1G7 

chiefly in children. The subcrepitant rale on both sides 
of the chest is the diagnostic sign of this affection ; but 
it is not accompanied by dulness on percussion except in 
so far as the bronchitis may be associated with lobular 
pneumonia or collapse of pulmonary lobules. The rapid 
development of the oedema and its pathological connec- 
tions, are diagnostic points to be taken into account. 

Pneumonia is excluded by the fact that the affection 
is at the beginning bilateral, and by the absence of the 
signs of solidification of lung. 

Pulmonary oedema less in degree and diffusion, has, 
of course, the same signs, not as marked and not as ex- 
tensive, namely, dulness on percussion and fine bubbling 
sounds or the subcrepitant rale. In this form the affec- 
tion is bilateral, and seated especially in the posterior 
and inferior portions of the lungs. Moreover, this form 
has the same pathological connections, namely, with dis- 
ease of the kidneys, and mitral lesions of the heart. The 
low pitch of the bronchial rales, and the absence of the 
respiratory and vocal signs of solidification, together 
with the fact of the affection being bilateral, and the 
coexistence of disease of the heart or kidneys, constitute 
the basis of a positive diagnosis. 

Hypostatic congestion of the lungs may occasion a 
certain amount of pulmonary oedema. The physical diag- 
nosis is to be based on bilateral dulness on the posterior 
aspect of the chest, with low-pitched fine bubbling sounds 
or the subcrepitant rale on both sides, these signs occur- 
ring under circumstances which lead to the supposition 
of this form of congestion. 



168 PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. 

Carcinoma of Lung. Tumors within the Chest. 

Carcinomatous growths in the lungs are usually in the 
form of nodules varying in size from that of a pea to a 
hen's egg, disseminated throughout one lung or both 
lungs in greater or less numbers. These disseminated 
nodules, if of small size, have no well-marked, definite 
diagnostic signs. If limited to a lung, or if more numer- 
ous in one lung, they may occasion an appreciable dul- 
ness on percussion. They may also occasion feebleness 
of the respiratory murmur, and, owing to coexisting cir- 
cumscribed bronchitis, moist bronchial rales may be heard 
at different points. These signs warrant a diagnosis 
when, as is usually the case, cancer is known to have 
existed elsewhere. With reference to diagnosis, it is to 
be borne in mind that, when cancer of the lung is second- 
ary, both lungs are affected, and, when it is primary, the 
affection is generally unilateral. 

If there be nodules of considerable size, there will be 
well-marked dulness on percussion in different situations, 
and the signs of solidification may be present, namely, 
bronchial or broncho-vesicular respiration, increased vocal 
resonance, or bronchophony, and increased vocal fremitus. 

In some cases of unilateral carcinoma, the greater part, 
or the whole, of a lung may be infiltrated with the mor- 
bid growth, increasing its volume and giving rise to en- 
largement of the affected side, diminished respiratory 
movements or immobility, flatness on percussion with 
diminished or suppressed respiratory murmur, vocal re- 
sonance, and fremitus. If, as is usual, there be also 
more or less pleuritic effusion, the intercostal spaces may 
be pushed out to a level with the ribs. Here are the 
signs which denote chronic pleurisy with large effusion, 



TUMORS WITHIN THE CHEST. 169 

and the differential diagnosis cannot be made with posi- 
tiveness until the fluid within the chest be withdrawn, 
and it be found that, irrespective of the bulging of the 
intercostal spaces, the physical signs remain. Explora- 
tion with a small trocar will settle the diagnosis when 
there is no pleuritic effusion, and this procedure is unob- 
jectionable. 

In other cases the carcinomatous growth induces 
atrophy of the lung, diminishing its volume, and causing 
notable contraction of the affected side. The appear- 
ances on inspection are those which denote contraction 
after chronic pleurisy, and which may be present also in 
cases of cirrhosis of lung. The differential diagnosis 
must be based chiefly on diagnostic points relating to the 
history and symptoms. 

Tumors within the chest, generally having their points 
of departure in the mediastinum, displace the lung in 
proportion to their size. They may cause considerable 
displacement of the heart, and produce more or less 
enlargement of the chest with diminished respiratory 
movements. Over the site of the tumor, there will be 
dulness or flatness on percussion. Generally respira- 
tory sound is wanting, vocal resonance and fremitus 
being either diminished or suppressed. In the neighbor- 
hood of the primary bronchi and over lung compressed 
by the tumor, there may be bronchial respiration, with 
bronchophony and increased fremitus. If the chest be 
enlarged, its enlargement is not likely to be as uniform 
as when it is dilated with liquid; this is a diagnostic 
point. The tumor, or the tumors, may not be confined 
to one side of the chest. It is to be borne in mind that 
pleurisy with effusion may exist as a complication, and 
this may serve to obscure the diagnosis. 

15 



170 PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. 

The physical diagnosis involves differentiation from 
pericarditis with effusion and aneurisms. These affec- 
tions are to be excluded by the absence of their diagnostic 
signs. 

Acute Miliary Tuberculosis. 

The physical condition in this affection is the presence 
of a large number of the small bodies known as tubercles 
or miliary granulations disseminated throughout both 
lungs. Bronchitis is an associated affection. 

If the tubercles be about equally distributed in the 
two lungs, there is no abnormal disparity of the reso- 
nance on percussion between the two sides of the chest. 
A comparison, also, of the two sides may afford no 
disparity as regards the respiratory murmur, vocal 
resonance, and fremitus. Moist rales, due to the asso- 
ciated bronchitis, may be present in different situations. 
A physical diagnosis, under these circumstances, cannot 
be made with positiveness. Physical exploration, how- 
ever, is important, in order to exclude other affections ; 
and the negative result, taken in connection with the 
symptoms — hyperpyrexia, rapid pulse, accelerated 
breathing, etc. — renders the diagnosis extremely proba- 
ble. The differential diagnosis involves discrimination 
from capillary bronchitis, and an essential fever with a 
bronchial complication. The affection has been re- 
peatedly mistaken for typhoid fever. 

The tubercles may be more abundantly distributed in 
one lung. A disparity in the resonance on percussion 
may then be apparent, and, perhaps, an abnormal 
increase of vocal resonance and fremitus. These signs, 
taken in connection with the symptoms, establish the 
physical diagnosis. 



PHTHISIS. 171 

Phthisis. 

With reference to physical diagnosis, cases of phthisis 
may be conveniently distributed into three groups, as 
follows : 1st. Cases in which the pulmonary affection is 
small, or cases of incipient phthisis ; 2d. Cases in which 
the affection is moderate or considerable ; and 3d. Cases 
m which the affection has progressed to the formation of 
cavities, or cases of advanced phthisis. 

In cases of incipient phthisis, the essential physical 
condition is the presence of small solidified masses, or 
nodules, the intervening vesicular structure not being 
affected. These nodules vary from the size of a pea to 
a filbert. In the vast majority of cases they are situated 
at or near the apex of either the right or the left lung. 
Generally, circumscribed capillary bronchitis coexists in 
proximity to the nodules. An intercurrent circumscribed 
pneumonia sometimes occurs, giving rise to transient 
solidification within a limited area. Dry circumscribed 
pleurisy, situated over the affected portion of lung, gene- 
rally occurs from time to time. 

In the cases of a moderate or a considerable pulmon- 
ary affection, the difference, as compared with the pre- 
ceding group of cases, consists in the presence of nodules 
of larger size, or solidification from the phthisical deposit 
extending over a space, or spaces, sufficient in size to 
give rise to well-marked physical signs. The solidifica- 
tion in these cases may be extended by the development 
of circumscribed interstitial pneumonia. The circum- 
scribed bronchitis is greater, as a rule, in degree and ex- 
tent ; attacks of dry pleurisy may continue to occur, and 
the pleural surface becomes adherent. In these cases, 
generally, the affection, existing primarily in one lung, 



172 PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. 

now exists in both lungs. The volume of the lung first 
affected, at the summit, is more or less diminished. En- 
largement of the bronchial glands is usual, and these 
may be so situated as to press upon and diminish the 
calibre of one of the primary bronchi. In some cases, 
portions of lung in the neighborhood of solidified masses 
or nodules are emphysematous (vicarious emphysema). 

Gases of advanced phthisis are characterized by the 
presence of a cavity, or, commonly, of cavities, varying 
in number, size, rigidity or flaccidity of the walls, free- 
dom of communication with bronchial tubes, and their 
situation relatively to the superficies of the lung. In 
cases of progressive phthisis, in addition to cavities, there 
is more or less solidification from phthisical exudation 
and interstitial pneumonia. The volume of the lung at 
the summit is often notably diminished. The pleural 
surfaces are firmly adherent. If, however, the disease 
have been retrogressive, there may be little or no solidifi- 
cation of lung, the cavity or cavities forming the only 
lesion. In cases of advanced phthisis, with very rare 
exceptions, both lungs are affected, and cavities often 
exist on both sides. 

The physical diagnosis in cases of incipient phthisis 
embraces what may be called direct and accessory signs. 
The accessory signs are those which represent incidental 
affections, namely, circumscribed bronchitis, pleurisy, 
and pneumonia. The direct signs are those represent- 
ing the essential condition, namely, the solidified masses 
or nodules. 

An important direct sign is dulness on percussion. 
Slight dulness on percussion at the summit of the chest, 
in front or behind, is a highly important sign, taken in 
connection with symptoms, of incipient phthisis. In de- 



PHTHISIS. 173 

termininsr that a relative dulness is abnormal, the student 
must bear in mind, in the first place, the normal disparity 
between the two sides. The right side at the summit is 
relatively somewhat dull on percussion in healthy persons. 
Due allowance is to be made for this normal disparity. 
In the second place, it is to be borne in mind that any 
deformity affecting the symmetry of the chest will affect 
the relative resonance on the two sides ; and that a devia- 
tion from symmetry attributable to the position of the 
patient will occasion a disparity on percussion. In the 
third place, the rules for the practice of percussion must 
be kept in mind, in order to avoid producing a disparity 
by the non-observance of these rules (vide p. 51). Nor- 
mal resonance on percussion on the two sides is a strong 
point for the exclusion of incipient phthisis. 

The direct respiratory signs in incipient phthisis are 
the broncho-vesicular respiration and weakened vesicular 
murmur. Of course, familiarity with the characters of 
the broncho- vesicular respiration is indispensable — the 
combination of the vesicular and the tubular quality in 
the inspiratory sound, with the pitch raised in proportion 
to the amount of tubularity, and the expiratory sound 
more or less prolonged, high, and tubular. Not infre- 
quently the only appreciable morbid modification is di- 
minished intensity of the murmur. When this sign is 
present, it is probable that the lack of intensity is the 
reason for the absence of the characters of the broncho- 
vesicular modifications ; that is, the latter sign would 
have been present were the respiratory sounds more 
intense. 

The direct vocal signs in incipient phthisis are, in- 
creased vocal resonance, increased bronchial whisper, 
and increased fremitus. The other direct signs may be 

15* 



174: PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. 

present, without an appreciable morbid increase of the 
vocal resonance or fremitus. The increased whisper may 
also be wanting, but more rarely than the two other vocal 
signs. 

In deciding on the presence or absence of each and 
all of these direct signs, it is essential to know and to 
judge correctly of the disparity between the two sides of 
the chest at the summit in health. Normally, the reso- 
nance on percussion at the summit on the right side is 
slightly dull as compared with the left side ; the inspi- 
ratory sound on this side has some tubularity in quality, 
and is somewhat raised in pitch ; the expiratory sound 
may be more or less prolonged, high, and tubular ; the 
vocal resonance, on the right side, is always greater, 
the same being true of fremitus ; the bronchial whisper 
is louder on the right side, and the intensity of the res- 
piratory murmur is a little less on this side. Whenever 
it is a question as to a small phthisical affection at or 
near the apex of the right lung, it is a matter of expe- 
rience and judgment to decide if the disparity in respect 
of these points be greater than normal ; and it is not 
always easy to come at once to a decision. From the 
want of a proper appreciation of the several points of 
disparity in health, it is not uncommon for an erroneous 
diagnosis of phthisis to be based thereon. Appreciating 
the normal points of disparity, it is obviously easier to 
determine that the several direct signs of incipient phthi- 
sis are present at the left, than at the right, summit ; 
relative dulness on percussion, broncho-vesicular or 
weakened respiration, increased vocal resonance, whis- 
per, and fremitus, at the left summit, are, of course, 
always abnormal. 

In connection with the foregoing direct signs may be 



PHTHISIS. 175 

mentioned another sign which is often available, namely, 
an abnormal transmission of the heart-sounds. This sign 
is available only in the central portion of the infra-cla- 
vicular region. A slight degree of solidification of the 
summit of one lung renders the heart-sounds more audi- 
ble in the situation just named. It is of assistance in 
determining this sign, to be familiar with the following 
points of disparity which exist in health : on the right 
side the second sound of the heart is somewhat more 
audible than on the left side, and on the left side the first 
sound is a little louder than on the right side. Hence, 
if the first sound be better conducted on the right than 
on the left side, it is abnormal ; and if the second sound 
be louder on the left side, it is abnormal. This sign is 
always to be taken in connection with other direct signs ; 
it gives greater diagnostic strength to the latter, but it is 
by no means, in itself, sufficient for the diagnosis. 

Corroborative evidence of incipient phthisis may be 
obtained by the presence of accessory signs. These are: 
First, fine bubbling or the subcrepitant rale at the sum- 
mit on one side. This sign denotes a circumscribed 
capillary bronchitis, and this, at the summit on one side, 
is usually associated with phthisis. Second, a crepitant 
rale at the summit on one side denotes a circumscribed 
pneumonia which is usually secondary to phthisis. Third, 
a pleuritic friction sound limited to the summit on one 
side is evidence of a dry circumscribed pleurisy which 
occurs often in the early stage of phthisis. Fourth, in- 
determinate rales, crumpling, and crackling, are signifi- 
cant of phthisis if limited to the summit on one side. 
These rales, it is to be recollected, are sometimes found 
in healthy persons on forced breathing, especially if the 
binaural stethoscope be employed. If they be normal 



176 PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. 

they are found on both sides. The accessory signs are 
not sufficient for a positive diagnosis if they exist alone ; 
but they are to be considered as corroborating the evi- 
dence derived from the direct signs, together with the 
symptoms and history. 

As regards differential diagnosis, the affections with 
which incipient phthisis is likely to be confounded, are 
chronic bronchitis, and moderate emphysema. With 
respect to the first of these affections, namely bronchitis, 
the differentiation must depend on the presence or the 
absence of positive signs of phthisis ; in other words, 
phthisis is either diagnosticated or excluded. The phy- 
sical signs in cases of moderate emphysema sometimes 
lead to the error of supposing this affection to be phthisis. 
Owing to the relatively greater intensity of the resonance 
on percussion at the left summit, dulness is thought to 
exist at the right summit, and a prolonged expiration, 
with the normally greater vocal resonance at the right 
summit, are set down as signs of phthisis. This error 
may be avoided by a careful study of the signs of em- 
physema and the normal disparity in respiration, vocal 
resonance, and fremitus, existing between the two sides 
of the chest. 

The physical diagnosis of a phthisical affection which 
is considerable or moderate in amount, is, in most cases, 
an easy problem. Inspection often furnishes marked 
signs. The upper anterior portion of the chest on one 
side is depressed or flattened, and the superior costal 
movements of respiration are diminished, the chest else- 
where being symmetrical in both size and motions. 
There is more or less marked dulness on percussion at 
the upper part of the chest on the affected side. Some- 



PHTHISIS: 177 

times the diminished resonance is tympanitic in quality 
(tympanitic dulness) without the existence of cavities, 
the resonance being conducted from the primary and 
secondary bronchial tubes. The respiration is bronchial, 
or broncho-vesicular approximating more or less to the 
bronchial. Occasionally, however, the respiratory sounds 
are too feeble for their characters to be appreciated. 
There is bronchophony, or the vocal resonance is notably 
increased without the bronchophonic characters. The 
whisper is either distinctly bronchophonic or it is notably 
increased in intensity, high in pitch, and tubular in 
quality. Yocal fremitus is often increased. Moist 
bronchial rales, coarse or fine, are generally present. 
With these diagnostic signs on one side, the signs of a 
smaller amount of disease are generally present on the 
other side. 

In some cases of a moderate phthisical aifection, the 
judgment may be confused by the resonance on percus- 
sion being increased or vesiculotympanitic on the affected 
side. This sign denotes the coexistence of emphysema- 
tous lobules developed in the progress of phthisis. The 
diagnosis of the latter affection is then to be based on 
the signs obtained by auscultation. 

In advanced phthisis the physical diagnosis of the 
disease is sufficiently easy. The signs distinctive of this 
stage of the disease are those which denote pulmonary 
cavities, namely, tympanitic resonance on percussion 
within a circumscribed space ; cracked metal or amphoric 
resonance ; cavernous respiration ; cavernous whisper and 
sometimes pectoriloquy; amphoric respiration and voice, 
and gurgling (vide Chapter V. for description of these 
signs). 



178 PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. 

The cavernous signs are generally associated with the 
signs of solidification. In some cases, however, in which 
the disease has been non-progressive and retrogressive, 
the cavernous signs are present without the signs which 
denote solidification of lung. 

Fibroid Phthisis, Interstitial Pneumonia, or Cirrhosis 
of Lung. 

In this affection the physical conditions are, solidifica- 
tion from hyperplasia of the interstitial pulmonary tissue, 
dilatation of bronchial tubes (bronchiectasis) and dimin- 
ished volume of the lung affected. The affection, as a 
rule, is limited to one side. The whole of a lung, or 
only a portion of it, may be affected. Bronchitis always 
coexists. 

There is notable dulness on percussion, the diminished 
resonance being sometimes tympanitic. The degree of 
resonance may vary at different examinations, owing to 
differences in the amount of morbid products within the 
bronchial tubes. The respiration is bronchial, or bron- 
cho-vesicular. At times, from obstruction of bronchial 
tubes, it may be suppressed. Bronchophony and in- 
creased vocal resonance are the vocal signs, together with 
the corresponding whispering signs. The affected side 
of the chest becomes contracted either entirely or in part, 
resembling in this respect the appearances after chronic 
pleurisy. 

With these signs the affection is to be differentiated 
from the ordinary form of phthisis, by reference to points 
pertaining to the symptoms and history. 



DIAPHRAGMATIC HERNIA. 179 

Diaphragmatic Hernia. 

The presence of more or less of the hollow abdominal 
viscera within the thoracic cavity in consequence of a 
congenital deficiency of a portion of the diaphragm, or 
perforation from accidents, or enlargement of the natu- 
ral openings, gives rise to certain anomalous signs, namely, 
a tympanitic resonance, variable at different times owing 
to differences as regards the quantity of gas within the 
viscera ; absence of the respiratory murmur from the 
base of the chest upward, the height proportional to the 
space occupied by the abdominal organs, and the intes- 
tinal sounds emanating from within the chest, not con- 
ducted from below. 

This extremely rare affection can only be confounded 
with pneumothorax. The latter affection is to be ex- 
cluded by the absence of its diagnostic signs, irrespec- 
tive of the tympanitic resonance on percussion. 



180 THE HEART. 



CHAPTER VII. 

THE PHYSICAL CONDITIONS OF THE HEART IN 
HEALTH AND DISEASE. THE HEART-SOUNDS 
AND CARDIAC MURMURS. 

Physical conditions of the heart in health : — Boundaries of the praecordia 
— Normal situation of the apex-heat — Boundaries of the deep and of 
the superficial cardiac space — Relations of the aorta and the pulmonary 
artery to the walls of the chest — The heart-sounds — Characters distin- 
guishing the first and the second sound — Mechanism of the production 
of the heart-sounds — Auscultation of the pulmonic and the aortic 
second sound separately — Movements of the auricles and ventricles in 
relation to each other — Physical conditions of the heart in disease : — 
Enlargement of the heart — Hypertrophy and dilatation — Abnormal 
impulses of the heart, and modifications of the apex-beat — Valvular 
lesions — Roughness of the pericardial surfaces — Liquid within the 
pericardial sac — Abnormal modifications of the heart-sounds — Redupli- 
cation of heart-sounds — Cardiac murmurs — Normal and abnormal 
blood-currents within the heart, and their relations with the heart- 
sounds — Mitral direct murmur — Mitral regurgitant murmur — Mitral 
systolic non-regurgitant, or intra-ventricular murmur — Aortic direct 
murmur — Aortic regurgitant murmur, and an Aortic diastolic non- 
regurgitant murmur — Coexisting endocardial murmurs — Tricuspid 
direct murmur — Tricuspid regurgitant murmur — Pulmonic direct mur- 
mur — Pulmonic regurgitant murmur — Facts of practical importance 
in relation to endocardial murmurs — Pericardial or friction murmur. 

Before entering upon the study of the physical diag- 
nosis of the diseases of the heart, the student must be 
familiar with its anatomy and physiology. For a de- 
scription of the structure and functions of this organ, he 
is referred to anatomical and physiological treatises. 
The plan of this work embraces the anatomical relations 
of the heart and the space which it occupies within the 



CONDITIONS OF HEART IN HEALTH. 181 

chest, as physical conditions of health determinable by 
normal signs, together with the heart-sounds. Having 
briefly stated these conditions of health, the morbid phys- 
ical conditions which may be ascertained by percussion, 
auscultation, and other methods of physical exploration, 
will be considered. The latter heading will include an 
account of the cardiac murmurs. 

The Physical Conditions of the Heart in Health. 

The Prcecordia. The Superficial and the Deep Car- 
diac Space. — The area on the surface of the chest cor- 
responding to the space which the heart occupies within 
the chest, is the precordial region, or the prsecordia. 
The upper, lower, and two lateral boundaries of this 
region must be memorized. The upper boundary is the 
third rib, the lower is a horizontal line passing through 
the fifth intercostal space ; the left lateral boundary is 
at, or a little within, a vertical line passing through the 
nipple, the linea mammalis, and the right lateral boun- 
dary is represented by a vertical line situated about a 
finger's breadth to the right of the right margin of the 
sternum. As the volume of the heart varies, within 
certain limits, in different healthy persons, the bounda- 
ries of the prgecordia are, of course, not always exactly 
the same. The foregoing statements are sufficiently 
accurate for practical purposes. 

The horizontal line representing the lower boundary 
of the prsecordia, intersects the point where the apex- 
beat of the heart is felt. The normal situation of the 
apex-beat must be recollected. In most healthy persons 
the apex-beat is felt in the fifth intercostal space a little 
within the linea mammalis. This is, assuming the per- 
16 



182 THE HEART. 

sons to be sitting or standing ; in recumbency on the 
back the beat sometimes rises to the fourth intercostal 
space, and it is sometimes found in the fourth space in 
the sitting or standing position of the body. The dis- 
tance from the linea mammalis varies in different healthy 
persons ; it is sufficiently accurate to say it is a little 
within that line. The force of the apex-beat varies much 
in different healthy persons, owing to other causes than 
the power of the heart's action, such as the amount of 
muscular substance and fat in that situation, the width 
of the intercostal space, the convexity of the chest, the 
relation to the left lung, etc. Allowance is to be made 
for these variations in determining the abnormal modifi- 
cations of the force of the beat, which belong among the 
physical signs of disease. 

Within a portion of the praecordia the heart is un- 
covered of lung, and' in the remaining portion lung 
intervenes between the heart and the walls of the chest. 
The former of these portions is called the superficial, and 
the latter is called the deep cardiac space. The deep 
cardiac space on the right side extends to the median 
line. On the left side the lung recedes at a point on the 
median line on a level with the cartilage of the fourth 
rib, and the anterior border of the upper lobe makes an 
outward curve, returning inward at or near the apex of 
the heart. This leaves the heart uncovered within an 
area which, for practical purposes, may be represented 
by a right-angled triangle, the hypothenuse extending 
from the median line on a level with the costal cartilage 
of the fourth rib to the apex of the heart; the right 
angle formed by the median line and the horizontal line 
which forms the lower boundary of the pnecordia. 

The limits of the superficial cardiac space may be 



CONDITIONS OF HEART IN HEALTH. 183 

easily defined by percussion. It is only necessary to 
ascertain the curved line formed by the receding anterior 
border of the upper lobe of the left lung. A distinct, 
although not great, dulness on percussion marks this 
border of the lung. The border of the lung is as dis- 
tinctly marked by the abrupt diminution of the vocal 
resonance, if auscultation be made with the stethoscope. 
The outer boundaries of the deep cardiac space may also 
be determined by percussion; distinct, although slight, 
dulness marks the limits of the prsecordia. Defining 
thus the boundaries of the prgecordia and of the super- 
ficial cardiac space in healthy persons, makes a good 
practical exercise in percussion. 

Relations of the Aorta and Pulmonary Artery to the 
Walls of the Chest. — The base of the heart, especially 
in connection with auscultatory signs, is generally con- 
sidered to be at the second intercostal space near the 
sternum, this situation being, in reality, just above the 
base. In this situation sounds produced at the aortic 
and the pulmonic orifice are best studied, either in health 
or disease. With reference to these sounds, the 
anatomical relations of the aorta and the pulmonary 
artery to the right and the left second intercostal space 
are of importance. If the stethoscope be applied in the 
second intercostal space on the right side, close to the 
sternum, it is very near the aorta, and sounds produced 
at the aortic orifice are best heard in this situation. If 
the stethoscope be applied in the second intercostal space 
on the left side, it is very near the pulmonary artery, 
and the sounds produced at the pulmonic orifice are best 
heard in this situation. Reference will be made to these 
two situations in giving an account of the heart-sounds in 



184 THE HEART. 

health and disease, and of adventitious sounds or mur- 
murs. 

The Heart-sounds. — The characters which distinguish, 
respectively, the first and the second sound of the heart 
are to be studied preparatory to the study of the abnor- 
mal modifications which are important physical signs of 
disease. It is essential also to be able always to make 
the distinction practically between the first and the 
second sound in order to connect with each sound sepa- 
rately cardiac murmurs. The conventional sense of the 
term heart-sounds, as distinguished from cardiac mur- 
murs, must be borne in mind. The cardiac murmurs are 
adventitious sounds; they are never merely abnormal 
modifications of the heart-sounds, but they are new 
sounds added to these. 

The two heart-sounds follow in a certain rhythmical 
order, and, in health, this suffices for the recognition of 
each. It answers all practical purposes to say that the 
first and the second sound follow each other after an 
interval which is just appreciable, this interval being the 
short pause of the heart. After the two sounds, an in- 
terval is readily appreciable, called the long pause of 
the heart. It is not necessary to carry in the memory 
the exact relative duration of each of the sounds and 
each of the intervals. The fractions of a unit, in fact, 
do not express the length of the sounds and intervals as 
correctly as less definite expressions, inasmuch as the 
figures represent only the mean of variations within the 
limits of health. It is sufficiently definite to say that, 
with the ear or stethoscope applied over the situation of 
the apex-beat, the first sound is longer than the second, 
louder, lower in pitch, and has a quality which may be 
called booming. Per contra, the second sound is shorter, 



CONDITIONS OF HEART IN HEALTH. 185 

weaker, higher in pitch, and has a quality which may 
be called valvular or clicking. Aside from the relative 
length of the two sounds, the other characters are more 
or less marked in different healthy persons. 

These distinctive characters of the heart-sounds are 
apparent when the ear or stethoscope is applied over 
the apex. At the base of the heart, that is, in the 
second intercostal space near the sternum, the characters 
of the first sound are not the same. The second sound 
in this situation is louder than the first. This sound is 
said to be accentuated at the base, the first sound being 
accentuated at the apex. Moreover, the first sound at 
the base may not be longer than the second ; it loses 
more or less of its booming quality, the pitch remaining 
lower than that of the second sound. Removing the ear 
or the stethoscope a certain distance from the apex in 
any direction, occasions similar changes in the characters 
of the first sound. The interposition of several thick- 
nesses of a napkin has the same effect. 

From the differential characters over the apex, and 
the rhythm in other situations, there is no difficulty in 
distinguishing the first from the second sound in health. 
In cases of disease, however, owing to disturbance of the 
rhythm, modifications of the characters of the first sound, 
and the absence sometimes of one of the sounds, other 
means of recognition must be resorted to. If the apex- 
beat can be felt, this offers a ready way for recognizing 
the first sound-— the sound which is synchronous with 
the apex-beat is, of course, the first sound. This mode 
is not always available, inasmuch as the apex-beat can- 
not always be felt. Another mode is always available, 
namely, feeling the carotid pulse. The carotid pulse 

16* 



186 THE HEART. 

is synchronous with the first sound, whereas there is a 
slight interval between this sound and the radial pulse. 

The student is aided in comprehending certain physi- 
cal signs by taking into view the mechanism of the pro- 
duction of the heart-sounds. The second sound is pro- 
duced by the sudden forcible closure of the aortic and 
the pulmonic valves. This closure is caused by a retro- 
grade movement of the columns of blood in the aorta 
and pulmonary artery, directly the ventricular systole is 
ended. The retrograde movement is due to the recoil of 
the coats of the arteries which have been dilated by the 
column of blood moving onward during the ventricular 
systole. This recoil causes regurgitation into the ven- 
tricle when either the aortic or the pulmonic valve is 
rendered incompetent by lesions. The mechanism of the 
first sound is less simple. This sound is in part due to 
the forcible tension of the auriculo-ventricular valves, 
caused by the systole of the ventricles. In this way is 
produced a valvular element of the first sound. That 
the impulsion of heart against the walls of the chest 
furnishes another element seems demonstrable. To this 
element of impulsion the first sound is indebted for its 
greater intensity, as compared with the second sound, its 
length, and its booming quality. This is shown by the 
fact, already stated, that when auscultation is made at a 
certain distance from the apex, these characters are 
eliminated, and by the fact that diseases which diminish 
or arrest the impulsion movements of the heart produce 
the same modifications. The valvular element of the 
first sound is weaker than the second sound, a fact which 
at first occasions surprise when the difference in size 
between the aortic and pulmonic and the auriculo-ven- 
tricular valves is considered. The explanation of this 



CONDITIONS OF HEART IN HEALTH. 187 

apparent incongruity is as follows : the aortic and pul- 
monic segments at the end of the ventricular systole are 
in contact with the arterial walls, and are expanded when 
the recoil of the latter follows. On the other hand, 
when the ventricular systole takes place in health, the 
auriculo-ventricular valves are not in contact with the 
walls of the ventricles, but they are floated out and the 
orifices are nearly or quite closed ; the movement of the 
blood, therefore, in the systole only renders these valves 
tense. The second sound, in other words, is due to the 
expansion of the sigmoid valves of the aorta and pulmo- 
nary artery, whereas, the valvular element of the first 
sound is due to the tension of the auriculo-ventricular 
valves. The foregoing points relating to the heart-sounds 
were contained in my prize essay " On the Clinical Study 
of the Heart-Sounds in Health and Disease," published 
in the Transactions of the American Medical Association 
in 1858. 1 

A point in relation to the second sound of the heart 
has an interesting and important bearing on auscultation 
in disease, namely, the study of this sound as produced 
at the aortic and the pulmonic orifices separately. Re- 
calling the anatomical relations of the aorta and the 
pulmonary artery to the walls of the chest, if the stetho- 
scope be applied in the second intercostal space on the 
right side close to the sternum, the characters of the 
second sound are derived chiefly from the aortic valve, 
and if the stethoscope be applied in the second intercos- 
tal space on the left side close to the sternum, the char- 
acters of the second sound are derived chiefly from the 

1 Vide, also, "Treatise on Diseases of the Heart," first edition 
1860 ; second edition 1870. 



188 THE HEART. 

pulmonic valve. The correctness of this statement is 
proved by differences in the characters of the sound on 
two sides in health, and by the modifications in cases of 
disease. These morbid modifications will enter into the 
physical diagnosis of cardiac affections. In health the 
aortic second sound is somewhat louder, higher in pitch, 
and the valvular quality more marked than the pulmonic 
second sound. The student should verify these points of 
difference by the study of the second sound in the two 
situations just named. In order for the comparison to 
be a fair one in health, and available in the diagnosis of 
disease, the normal anatomical relations to the w T alls of 
the chest, of the aorta, and pulmonary artery must be 
preserved. These relations are affected by changes in 
the symmetry of the chest, and sometimes by enlarge- 
ment of the heart. The lungs must also be free from 
disease; otherwise, the conduction of the sounds will be 
abnormal. 

The movements of the auricles and the ventricles are 
to be kept in mind with reference to the comprehension 
of certain physical signs of disease. Points of especial 
importance are the contraction of the auricles in the 
latter part of the long pause of the heart, preceding the 
ventricular systole, and the twisting of the heart from 
left to right in the systole, this movement being reversed 
in the diastole. In these systolic and diastolic twisting 
movements, the pericardial surfaces move upon each, 
but in health noiselessly owing to their smoothness and 
moisture. The movements occasion an auscultatory 
sound when the surfaces are roughened by the presence 
of lymph. Other points are the size of the pericardial 
sac, that is, its capability of holding when filled, but not 



CONDITIONS OF HEART IN DISEASE. 189 

dilated, from fifteen to twenty ounces of liquid, and its 
attachment, not to the base of the heart, but to the 
vessels above the base. 

Physical Conditions of the Heart in Disease. 

The physical conditions of the heart in disease, which 
are determinable by physical exploration, are, 1st, en- 
largement of the heart; 2d, abnormal impulses and 
modifications of the apex-beat; 3d, valvular lesions; 4th, 
roughness of the pericardial surfaces; and, 5th, liquid 
within the pericardial sac. Having considered these 
conditions, an account of abnormal modifications of the 
heart-sounds and cardiac murmurs will conclude this 
chapter. 

Enlargement of the Heart. — Enlargement of the heart 
may be slight, moderate, great, or very great, these 
terms expressing different degrees of enlargement with 
sufficient precision for clinical purposes. In cases of 
very great enlargement, the space within the chest which 
the heart occupies may be from four to five times larger 
than in health. The situation of the base of the heart 
remains but little, or not at all, changed in cases of en- 
largement; the increased space which the heart occupies 
is therefore downward. This increased space extends 
much more to the left than to the right ; the left border 
of the heart, in proportion to the enlargement, is carried 
beyond the mammary line on the left side, whereas, the 
right border is carried comparatively but little beyond 
the normal right lateral boundary of the prrecordia even 
when the enlargement is very great. The superficial 
cardiac space is enlarged in proportion to the enlarge- 
ment of the heart; the organ pushes to the left the 



190 THE HEART. 

receding anterior border of the upper lobe of the left 
lung, and is proportionately in contact, uncovered of 
lung, with the walls of the chest. The apex of the heart 
is lowered in proportion to the enlargement, and it is 
carried more or less to the left of its normal situation. 
It may be lowered to the sixth, seventh, eighth, or ninth 
intercostal space. The enlargement of the heart is 
rarely equal in all its parts. The enlargement may be 
entirely or chiefly of either the right or the left ventricle. 
Enlargement of the right ventricle and auricle tends to 
carry the right side of the heart more to the right than 
when the left ventricle and auricle are enlarged. The 
situation of the apex is also affected by the parts of the 
heart in which the enlargement predominates. The 
apex is carried further to the left of its normal situation, 
other things being equal, when the enlargement predomi- 
nates on the right side of the heart; and it is lowered 
without being carried far to the left when the enlarge- 
ment of the left ventrical predominates. The apex of 
the organ in cases of considerable or of great enlarge- 
ment becomes changed in form; it is rounded or blunted. 
This change is most marked when enlargement of the 
right ventricle predominates. All these points are of 
importance with reference to the comprehension of the 
physical signs of enlargement of the heart. 

Enlargement of the heart may be entirely due either 
to hypertrophy or to dilatation (simple hypertrophy and 
simple dilatation). If, however, the enlargement be 
sufficient to occasion notable disturbance of the circula- 
tion, both these forms of enlargement are usually com- 
bined, but, as a rule, one or the other form predomi- 
nating, so that, of the cases of disease of the heart which 
come under medical treatment, the majority are cases of 



CONDITIONS OF HEART IN DISEASE. 191 

either enlargement with predominant hypertrophy or 
enlargement with predominant dilatation. 

These widely different physical conditions are con- 
cerned especially in the abnormal impulses and modifica- 
tions of the apex-beat, as well as, also, the heart-sounds. 

Abnormal Impulses of the Heart, and Modifications 
of the Apex-beat. — The abnormal situation of the apex 
of the heart when enlarged has been stated. Generally 
the situation is determinable by the apex-beat. It has 
been seen that in health the beat is sometimes not appre- 
ciable by the touch, owing to the thickness of the soft 
parts and the conformation of the thorax, and, for these 
reasons, the force of the beat varies much in different 
healthy persons. Exclusive of normal variations, the 
beat is generally strong and prolonged in proportion as 
the heart is enlarged by hypertrophy. There are excep- 
tions to this statement, which are to be explained by the 
altered form of the apex ; when it loses its pointed form, 
it does not so readily come into contact with the walls of 
the chest in an intercostal space, and, hence, the beat 
may be weak although the ventricular systole be abnor- 
mally powerful. On the other hand, the apex-beat is 
weakened by dilatation, and it may be wanting as a result 
of diminished power of the systole of the ventricles. The 
apex- beat is also abnormally weak in fatty degeneration 
and softening of the heart, as well as in functional de- 
bility of the organ incident to other diseases than those 
of the heart. 

If there be considerable or great enlargement, the 
heart being in contact with the walls of the chest over a 
larger area than in health, impulses other than the apex- 
beat are generally apparent to the eye and touch. Not 
infrequently impulses are appreciable in each intercostal 



192 THE HEART. 

space between the situation of the apex and the base of 
the heart. These abnormal impulses are felt to be strong 
in proportion as the enlargement is due to hypertrophy, 
and weak in proportion as dilatation predominates. En- 
largement seated in the right ventricle causes an impulse 
in the epigastrium, which is strong or weak in proportion 
as hypertrophy or dilatation predominates. Cardiac im- 
pulses are felt and seen in abnormal situations when the 
heart is removed from its normal situation by the pres- 
sure of an aneurism, or other tumor, by pleuritic effu- 
sion, hydroperitoneum, etc. The error of mistaking for 
a cardiac impulse the pulsation of an aneurismal tumor 
is to be avoided, Another error is to be avoided, namely, 
mistaking abnormal impulses due to the heart being un- 
covered of lung from shrinking of the latter in certain 
pulmonary affections, for impulses denoting enlargement 
of the heart. Incases of enlargement by hypertrophy, 
a heaving movement of the whole praecordia is sometimes 
felt when the hand is applied to the chest. A violent 
shock is sometimes felt by the hand applied to the prae- 
cordia, but without a sense of increased muscular power, 
in cases of purely functional disorder of the heart. 

Valvular Lesions. — The lesions affecting the valves 
of the heart are of a varied character, for an account of 
which the student is referred to treatises on cardiac dis- 
eases, or on pathological anatomy. It suffices here to 
consider that, with reference to physical signs and patho- 
logical effects, they may be distributed into three groups, 
as follows : 1st, lesions which diminish more or less the 
size of the orifices, or obstructive lesions ; 2d, lesions 
which render the valves more or less incompetent and 
permit regurgitation, or regurgitative lesions ; and, 3d, 
lesions which roughen the surface over which the blood 



CONDITIONS OF HEART IN DISEASE. 193 

moves, without occasioning either obstruction or regurgi- 
tation. The latter may be distinguished as innocuous 
lesions, giving rise to no pathological effects, although 
represented by cardiac murmurs. 

It is useful to bear in mind that, in the great majority 
of cases, valvular lesions are seated in the left side of 
the heart, that is, they are either mitral or aortic. Tri- 
cuspid and pulmonic lesions are comparatively rare, and 
they are generally congenital. Not infrequently mitral 
and aortic lesions coexist, and there may be coexisting 
lesions at all the orifices of the heart. 

Yalvular lesions are represented by cardiac murmurs. 
By means of the murmurs the existence of lesions is 
evidenced, their situation at the different orifices may 
be ascertained, and, generally, it is practicable to deter- 
mine whether they occasion obstruction or regurgitation, 
or both. These several points of inquiry will be con- 
sidered presently under the heading cardiac murmurs, 
and in connection with the lesions of the different valves 
respectively in the next chapter. 

Roughness of the Pericardial Surfaces. — In place of 
the smoothness of the pericardial surfaces in health, 
which permits their movements upon each other noise- 
lessly, the presence of the inflammatory product lymph, 
and, in some rare instances morbid growths, occasion an 
adventitious sound or murmur, which will be noticed in 
connection with other murmurs, and as entering into the 
physical diagnosis of pericarditis. 

Liquid within the Pericardial Sac. — More or less 
liquid transudes into the pericardial sac in cases of 
general dropsy or anasarca, but rarely in very large 
quantity. Liquid effusion occurs in acute pericarditis, 
and in this affection the sac may become filled with 
17 



194 THE HEART. 

liquid. In some cases of chronic pericarditis the sac is 
greatly dilated by liquid, the quantity amounting to four 
pounds, or even more. 

When the pericardial sac is filled with liquid, without 
being dilated, it forms, virtually, a pyriform tumor 
within the chest, the base of which is at the sixth or 
seventh intercostal space: the apex rises nearly to the 
sternal notch; the left lateral border is considerably 
beyond the nipple, and the right lateral border is more 
or less beyond the right margin of the praecordia. The 
anterior portion of the filled pericardium is mostly un- 
covered of lung and in contact with the walls of the 
chest. Within this area there is either notable dulness 
or flatness on percussion, together with absence of respi- 
ratory murmur and of vocal resonance. By means of 
these signs, the boundaries of the pyriform tumor may 
be readily delineated on the surface of the chest. 

When the pericardial sac is partially filled with liquid, 
the same signs are present, but within an area of less 
extent, and the configuration of the pyriform tumor is 
wanting. 

In cases of chronic pericarditis with a large accumu- 
lation of liquid, the pericardial sac is dilated so that its 
lateral boundaries may extend nearly to the axillary and 
infra-axillary regions. Under these circumstances, flat- 
ness on percussion, absence of respiratory murmur and 
of vocal resonance, are present over the greater part of 
the anterior aspect of the chest. 

Abnormal Modifications of the Heart-sounds. 

In order to appreciate the abnormal modifications of 
the heart-sounds, their normal characters are to be kept 



ABNORMAL MODIFICATIONS OF SOUNDS. 195 

in mind (vide page 184), and the student must be prac- 
tically familiar with them. The modifications relate 
especially to the intensity and quality of the first and the 
second sound. Either of the two sounds may be sup- 
pressed. 

The first sound has all its normal characters intensified 
when the power of the ventricular systole is increased 
by hypertrophy. The sound is louder than in health; 
it is longer, and the booming quality is more marked. 
If obstructive or regurgitant valvular lesions do not exist, 
the second sound is also intensified, without change in 
other respects. The first sound, when much intensified, 
sometimes has a ringing tone or tinnitus. This is also 
sometimes observed in health when the power of the 
heart's action from any cause is increased. 

In some cases of violent palpitation the first sound is 
notably intense, but short and valvular in quality. I 
suppose the explanation of this to be as follows : the ven- 
tricles contract with a kind of spasmodic action upon a 
small quantity of blood ; and, under these circumstances, 
the auriculo -ventricular valves, not being floated out as 
they are when the ventricles are well filled, expand with 
force in the ventricular systole, instead of being merely 
made tense as in health. Hence, the valvular element of 
the first sound is much intensified, while those characters 
of the first sound which are due to the impulsion of the 
heart against the walls of the chest, may be feeble or 
wanting. 

Weakening or suppression of the first sound over the 
apex is an effect of those aifections of the heart which 
diminish the power of the ventricular systole. These 
affections are enlargement from dilatation, atrophy, fatty 
degeneration, and softening. If the sound be notably 



196 THE HEART . 

weakened, it becomes short and valvular like the second 
sound. These changes show that the characters depend- 
ent on the element of impulsion are affected more than 
the valvular element. Liquid effusion within the peri- 
cardium renders the first sound more or less weak and 
valvular, the characters derived from impulsion being, 
under these circumstances, wanting. Diminished power 
of the heart's action from other than cardiac diseases, in- 
volves weakness of both of the heart-sounds, but more 
especially of the first sound. 

The abnormal modifications of the second sound, which 
are chiefly of interest and importance, relate to the 
aortic and pulmonic sound considered separately. Bear- 
ing in mind the mode of interrogating the aortic and the 
pulmonic orifice with reference to the valvular sound de- 
rived from each independently of the other (vide page 
187), a comparison of the two sounds in diseases of the 
heart afibrds often useful information. Whenever, from 
mitral obstruction or regurgitant lesions, or both com- 
bined, the blood propelled by the left ventricle into the 
aorta is diminished, the recoil of the arterial coats, after 
the ventricular systole, is lessened; consequently, the 
aortic segments expand with less force, and the valvular 
sound is weakened. Diminished intensity of the aortic 
sound thus represents an abnormal diminution of the quan- 
tity of blood propelled into the systemic arteries in the 
systole of the left ventricle, and this diminished intensity 
is, in a measure, a criterion of the amount of mitral ob- 
struction or mitral regurgitation, or both combined. In 
some cases of extreme obstruction or regurgitation, the 
aortic sound is completely suppressed. How is weaken- 
ing of this sound to be determined and measured ? By 



ABNORMAL MODIFICATIONS OF SOUNDS. 197 

comparison with the pulmonic sound. Now, as will 
presently appear, the pulmonic sound is apt to be in- 
tensified when the aortic sound is weakened. Hence, 
the former is not an accurate standard for this com- 
parison ; but it suffices for an approximation to accuracy. 
In cases of hypertrophy of the left ventricle without 
obstructive or regurgitant valvular lesions, the aortic 
sound is abnormally intensified. These cases are, how- 
ever, of rare occurrence. They occur chiefly in con- 
nection with fibroid or atrophic lesions of the kidneys. 

A simpler cause of weakening or suppression of the 
aortic sound, is damage from lesions of the aortic valve. 
In proportion as the function of this valve is impaired by 
lesions, the intensity of the sound is diminished, and if 
the function of the valve be lost, the sound is wanting. 
In these cases, the pulmonic sound being but little or 
not at all affected, it is an accurate standard for the com- 
parison. 

The pulmonic sound is weakened in the rare instances 
of lesions affecting the pulmonic valve. This sound is 
oftener intensified than weakened. It is notably intensi- 
fied when the right ventricle is hypertrophied, and espe- 
cially when this hypertrophy is associated with dilatation 
of the left auricle resulting from mitral obstruction or 
regurgitation. These lesions weakening, as has just been 
seen, the aortic sound, the contrast between the aortic 
and the pulmonic sound in some cases of mitral lesions 
is very marked. The pulmonic sound is sometimes loud 
while the aortic sound is suppressed. 

In comparing the aortic and the pulmonic sound in 
disease, as in health, it is to bo assumed that the anatom- 
ical relations of the aortic and the pulmonary artery to 

17* 



198 THE HEART. 

the second intercostal space on either side, close to the 
sternum, are not materially altered, and that the lungs 
are free from lesions in consequence of which the con- 
duction of the sound on either side is abnormal. 

Returning to the first sound of the heart, the mitral 
and the tricuspid part of the valvular element of this 
sound may be studied separately. With the stethoscope 
applied at or a little to the left of the apex, the valvular 
element of the first sound, which is heard, is derived 
chiefly from the mitral valve. On the other hand, if the 
stethoscope be applied at or near the right lower border 
of the heart, the valvular element is derived chiefly from 
the tricuspid valve. Notable weakness or suppression 
of the mitral valvular sound as compared with the tri- 
cuspid, represents impairment of the function of the 
mitral valve, and, per contra, notable weakness or sup- 
pression of the tricuspid valvular sound denotes impair- 
ment of the function of the tricuspid valve. Allowance, 
in this comparison, is to be made for a normal disparity, 
the mitral valvular sound being louder than the tricuspid, 
in health. 

Reduplication of Heart-sounds. — The sounds of the 
heart are said to be reduplicated when either the first or 
the second sound is repeated, or when each sound occurs 
twice before the long pause or interval. Considering 
the heart-sounds as represented by the whispered words 
Lub-dup, reduplication of the first sound is expressed by 
Lublub-dup, of the second by Lub-dupdup, and of both 
sounds by Lublub-dupdup. 

Clinically, reduplication of the second sound is much 
more frequent than reduplication of either the first sound, 
or of both sounds. Yet, accepting the explanation which 
seems most reasonable of this anomaly, both sounds 



ABNORMAL MODIFICATIONS OF SOUNDS. 199 

should always be reduplicated, that is, neither should be 
reduplicated separately. It is probable that both sounds 
are always reduplicated, but the reduplication of one of 
them (generally the first sound) from its feebleness is 
not appreciable. 

There is a form of disorder which may be confounded 
with reduplication of both sounds of the heart. In this 
disorder, with every alternate revolution of the heart, 
the sounds are weak, and the ventricular systole is not 
represented by a radial pulse, the force of the contrac- 
tion of the ventricle being insufficient to cause an appre- 
ciable pulsation in the remote arteries ; hence, the heart- 
sounds occur twice for each pulse at the wrist. Under 
these circumstances, however, the carotid pulse may 
generally, if not always, be felt with the weak, as well 
as with the stronger, ventricular contraction, and in this 
way the error of confounding the disorder with redupli- 
cation may be avoided. 

The explanation of reduplication is, that instead of the 
two ventricles contracting in unison, as in health, one 
contracts a little before the other. This explanation 
accounts satisfactorily for the anomaly. 

Reduplication of the heart-sounds may occur in con- 
nection with cardiac lesions, or there may be no evidence 
of any organic affection. In the latter case, the anomaly 
falls properly among the varied forms of functional dis- 
order of the heart. Whether or not it be connected with 
lesions, it has no important pathological significance. It 
is usually of temporary duration. 



200 THE HEART. 

Cardiac Murmurs. 

All adventitious, abnormal sounds which are added to 
the heart-sounds, are embraced by the term cardiac mur- 
murs. Let it be borne in mind that, conventionally, 
the murmurs are never abnormal modifications of the 
heart-sounds, but always newly produced sounds, and 
they always represent morbid conditions of either the 
heart or the blood. When due to morbid conditions of 
the blood, they are called inorganic, anaemic, haemic 
murmurs, and when they represent valvular lesions or 
changes within the heart, they are distinguished as 
organic murmurs. 

The organic murmurs may be distributed into three 
groups after differences in quality, namely, 1st, soft, 
2d, rough, and 3d, musical murmurs. The soft mur- 
murs resemble the sound produced by air from the nozzle 
of a pair of bellows, and, hence, are often called bellows 
murmurs. Murmurs are said to be rough when their 
qualities may be expressed by such terms as rasping, 
grating, creaking, croaking, etc. They are called musi- 
cal when the sound is a musical note. The bellows 
murmurs are of most frequent occurrence, and the musi- 
cal are much more rare than the rough murmurs. The 
quality of a murmur does not in general invest it with 
any special pathological or diagnostic significance. The 
murmurs vary in pitch, being either relatively high or 
low. The variations in pitch are useful in aiding to dis- 
criminate different coexisting murmurs. 

This account of organic murmurs applies to those pro- 
duced at the orifices or within the cavities of the heart. 
They are distinguished as endocardial murmurs. Ad- 
ventitious sounds are, however, produced upon the ex- 



CARDIAC MURMURS. 201 

ternal surface of the heart. These constitute what is 
called exocardial, pericardial, or friction murmur. 

Endocardial murmurs are produced by blood-currents 
pursuing either a normal or an abnormal direction. 
With a familiar knowledge of these currents, and of 
their relations with the heart-sounds, the several endo- 
cardial murmurs are very easily understood, as regards 
points involved in their differentiation from each other. 
The student is, therefore, advised first to become ac- 
quainted with the blood-currents, in health and in disease. 
Directing the attention to the left side of the heart, there 
are two normal blood-currents, namely, the current from 
the left auricle to the left ventricle, and the current from 
the left ventricle into the aorta. These may be distin- 
guished as the direct currents. The first is the mitral 
direct current, and the second is the aortic direct current. 
Two abnormal currents may occur in the left side of the 
heart. These currents can only take place when the 
valves are rendered incompetent by lesions. The incom- 
petency of the valves allows of regurgitation, and these 
abnormal currents may be distinguished as the regurgi- 
tant currents. One of these is a current backward from 
the left ventricle into the left auricle, owing to incompe- 
tency of the mitral valve ; this is the mitral regurgitant 
current. The other is a current backwards from the 
aorta into the left ventricle, arising from incompetency 
of the aortic valve ; this is the aortic regurgitant current. 

What are the relations of these four currents in the left 
side of the heart with the heart sounds ? The mitral 
direct current takes place when the auricles contract. 
The contraction of the auricles precedes the ventricular 
systole. The ventricular systole is synchronous with the 
first sound of the heart. The mitral direct current, there- 



202 THE HEART. 

fore, takes place just before the first sound of the heart. 
It begins after the second sound, and continues until it 
is suddenly and completely arrested by the contraction 
of the ventricle. It is obvious that the current cannot 
continue during the ventricular contraction, that is, when 
the first sound of the heart is produced. The mitral 
regurgitant current is caused by the contraction of the 
ventricle ; the current, therefore, must take place with 
the first sound of the heart. This current is systolic in 
the time of its occurrence. The aortic direct current, 
being caused by the contraction of the left ventricle, takes 
place with the first sound of the heart. It is, therefore, 
coincident with the mitral regurgitant current. The aortic 
regurgitant current is caused by the recoil of the arterial 
coats upon the column of blood within the aorta directly 
after the ventricular systole, and as this recoil causes the 
second sound of the heart, the current and this sound 
must be coincident. 

Recapitulating the relations of the four currents with 
the heart-sounds, the aortic direct and the mitral regur- 
gitant take place with the first sound — they are systolic 
currents ; the mitral direct current precedes the first 
sound — it is presystolic, and the aortic regurgitant cur- 
rent takes place with the second sound — it is diastolic. 

Analogous blood-currents take place in the right side 
of the heart, and have corresponding relations with the 
heart-sounds. These currents are the tricuspid direct, 
the tricuspid regurgitant, the pulmonic direct, and the 
pulmonic regurgitant. The pulmonic regurgitant is ex- 
ceedingly rare in consequence of the infrequency of 
pulmonic lesions ; but the tricuspid regurgitant is not 
uncommon, and probably occurs without valvular lesions 
or enlargement of the heart when the right ventricle is 



CARDIAC MURMURS. 203 

distended with blood, constituting what has been called 
the "safety valve function" of the tricuspid orifice. 

Organic endocardial murmurs are produced by the 
foregoing direct and regurgitant blood currents, and they 
are designated by the same names, that is, they are 
either direct or regurgitant. Thus, there are produced 
in the left side of the heart — the side in which valvular 
lesions are seated in the great majority of cases — a mitral 
direct murmur, a mitral regurgitant murmur, an kortic 
direct murmur, and an aortic regurgitant murmur. In 
the right side of the heart there may be produced cor- 
responding murmurs, namely, a tricuspid direct, a tri- 
cuspid regurgitant, a pulmonic direct, and a pulmonic 
regurgitant. It remains to point out the means of 
differentiating these several murmurs aside from their 
relations with the heart-sounds. 

Mitral Direct Murmur. — This murmur is presystolic. 
It begins after the second sound and ends abruptly with 
the first sound. Almost invariably this murmur is rough 
in quality; occasionally it is a soft bellows murmur. 
When rough it is often quite loud. The rough quality 
is peculiar; it is suggestive of vibration, and may be 
imitated by causing the lips or the tongue to vibrate with 
the breath in expiration. I state the mechanism of this 
murmur, inasmuch as the explanation is original with 
me, and has not been as yet generally accepted. It is 
caused by the vibration of the mitral curtains, and takes 
place especially when these curtains are united at their 
sides, leaving a narrow orifice through which the mitral 
direct current of blood flows. Throwing the lips into 
vibration with the breath, represents not only the quality 
of the murmur, but the mode of its production. The 
physical conditions which are requisite generally for its 



204 THE HEART. 

production are a narrowed mitral orifice, and flaccidity 
of the mitral curtains. The latter of these conditions 
does not always exist in cases of mitral obstructive 
lesions, and, hence, the murmur by no means always 
accompanies these lesions. When it is considered how 
loud a blubbering sound may be produced by the vibra- 
tion of the lips with a feeble current of air, it is not 
difficult to understand that an intense murmur may be 
caused by a current of blood propelled by the compara- 
tively weak contraction of the auricle. 

A mitral direct murmur may be produced without 
mitral lesions, the murmur having the same rough quality 
as when lesions exist, and being also quite loud. This 
statement, based on clinical proof, was made by me many 
years since, together with the explanation. It occurs 
w T hen there are aortic lesions which permit free regurgi- 
tation. Under these circumstances, at the time when 
the auricular contraction takes place, the left ventricle 
is already filled with blood; the mitral curtains are 
floated out so as to be in contact with each other, and 
the mitral direct current passing between the curtains 
throws them into vibration precisely as when the orifice 
is narrowed. The vibration of the lips when lightly in 
contact, caused by the expired breath, illustrates the 
manner in which a mitral direct murmur takes place 
without mitral lesions. The murmur, thus occurring 
without mitral lesions, is not constant; it is now present 
and now absent, depending, as it does, on the quantity 
of blood within the left ventricle at the time of the con- 
traction of the auricle. It follows from what has just 
been stated, that a mitral direct murmur is not always a 
sign of mitral obstructive lesions, when there is free 
aortic regurgitation. 



CARDIAC MURMURS. 205 

This murmur is limited to a circumscribed space around 
the apex of the heart. However loud the murmur may 
be in this situation, it is lost within a short distance from 
the apex. 

A mitral direct murmur is never due to a morbid con- 
dition of the blood. Although it occurs without mitral 
lesions, yet, inasmuch as its occurrence then requires the 
existence of aortic regurgitant lesions, it cannot be said 
to be an inorganic murmur. 

Mitral Regurgitant Murmur ; Mitral Systolic Non- 
regurgitant, or Intra-ventricular Murmur. — The mitral 
regurgitant murmur, synchronous with the first sound, 
that is, a systolic murmur, may be soft, rough or musical 
in quality, its intensity and pitch being variable. Aside 
from its relation with the first sound of the heart, it is dis- 
tinguished by having its maximum of intensity at or near 
the situation of the apex-beat. It may be limited to a 
circumscribed area, and if heard at a distance from the 
apex, it is best transmitted laterally around the left side 
of the chest. It is often heard on the posterior aspect 
of the chest on the left side near the lower angle of the 
scapula, and not infrequently in the corresponding situa- 
tion on the right side. 

A murmur with the first sound heard within a limited 
area at the apex, may be due to roughness of the endo- 
cardial membrane without mitral incompetency, and, con- 
sequently, without a mitral regurgitant current. This is 
a mitral systolic non-regurgitant murmur. It may also 
be called an intra-ventricular murmur, being produced, 
not at the mitral orifice, but within the ventricle. This 
murmur cannot always be discriminated from a feeble 
mitral regunntant murmur. If, however, a mitral mur- 
mur be conducted laterally for some distance to the left 
18 



206 THE HEART. 

of the apex, and if it be heard on the back, it may be 
considered to represent mitral regurgitation. A mitral 
systolic, non-regurgitant, or intra- ventricular murmur, is 
the murmur present in endocarditis. It may be caused 
by a tendinous cord extending from the inner wall on 
one side to the opposite side of the ventricular cavity. 
This occurs as a congenital anomaly. 

It is probable that the impulse of the apex of the heart 
against the adjacent portion of lung sometimes forces the 
air from the air vesicles sufficiently to give rise to a 
blowing sound occurring with each ventricular systole. 
This is liable to be confounded with an endocardial mur- 
mur. Produced in the way just stated, it may be heard 
only during the act of inspiration, and especially at the 
end of this act. 

A mitral systolic murmur is rarely, if ever, due to an 
abnormal condition of the blood, without any anatomical 
change in the valve or endocardial membrane. Condi- 
tions of the blood, however, which are favorable for the 
production of inorganic murmur, may intensify this mur- 
mur as well as any of the organic murmurs. 

Aortic Direct Murmur. — This murmur, like the mitral 
systolic non-regurgitant murmur, occurs with the first 
sound of the heart, that is, it is systolic. Of the organic 
murmurs in the left side of the heart, the murmurs just 
named and the aortic direct murmur, are synchronous, 
the others having different relations with the heart-sounds. 
The aortic direct murmur differs from the mitral systolic 
murmur in having its maximum of intensity at the base 
of the heart. It is loudest in the second intercostal space 
near the sternum. As a rule, it is louder in this inter- 
costal space on the right than on the left side ; this rule, 
however, has frequent exceptions. It is transmitted bet- 



CARDIAC MURMURS. 207 

ter and further upward than downward. It is always 
heard over the carotid artery ; and it is sometimes louder 
over this artery than at the base of the heart. As a 
murmur may be produced within the carotid artery, it is 
desirable to determine, when a systolic murmur is heard 
at the base, whether the carotid murmur is a transmitted 
murmur or not. This point is to be settled by compar- 
ing the murmur over the carotid with the murmur at the 
base, as regards quality and pitch. If the quality and 
pitch of the murmur in the two situations be the same, it 
is fair to consider the murmur in the carotid as not pro- 
duced w T ithin the artery, but conducted by the blood 
current from the aortic orifice. 

An aortic direct murmur is frequently inorganic. It 
is to be considered as such when it is not associated with 
an aortic regurgitant murmur ; when the heart is not 
enlarged; when anaemia is shown by the presence of 
murmurs in the large arteries ; and when there is the 
venous hum in the neck — these physical evidences of 
anaemia being associated, generally, not invariably, with 
pallor, and with symptoms pointing to that condition of 
the blood. Moreover, an inorganic murmur is very 
rarely rough, and it is variable in its occurrence, being 
at one time present and at another time absent, whereas, 
an organic murmur is, in general, constant. Associated 
with other evidence of anaemia, an aortic direct murmur 
may, nevertheless, be organic, but, under the differenti- 
ating circumstances just stated, the lesion represented 
by the murmur, if the murmur be organic, must be in- 
nocuous, so that it is not of great practical importance to 
determine whether the murmur be or be not inorganic. 

Like the other organic murmurs, an aortic direct mur- 
mur varies in different cases in its intensity, quality, and 



208 THE HEART. 

pitch. An organic aortic direct murmur, per se, does 
not denote always aortic obstruction. It may be due 
simply to roughness of the membrane at or above the 
aortic orifice. 

Aortic Regurgitant Murmur ; Aortic Diastolic JSfon- 
regurgitant Murmur. — An aortic regurgitant murmur 
occurs with the second sound of the heart, and it is the 
only one of the organic murmurs produced in the left 
side of the heart which has this relation with the heart- 
sounds. It is, therefore, readily enough discriminated 
from the other murmurs. It is almost always heard at 
the base of the heart, but, in some instances, when not 
appreciable at the base, it is heard a little below the 
base, namely, near the sternum on the left side on a 
level with the fourth costal cartilage. In the latter situ- 
ation it has generally its maximum of intensity. It is 
transmitted best in a downward direction, being often 
heard at the apex, and sometimes considerably below this 
point. It is never inorganic. It is usually not intense, 
low in pitch and soft ; but it may be loud, high, rough, 
or musical. 

A short murmur is sometimes produced by the retro- 
grade movement of the blood- current within the aorta, 
the aortic valve being sufficient, and regurgitation not 
therefore taking place. This murmur is due to roughen- 
ing of the lining membrane of the aorta by atheroma or 
calcareous deposit, and it is always preceded by an aortic 
direct murmur. It occurs directly after the systole, and 
ends with the second sound. Although of such brief 
duration, it is distinctly recognizable and distinguished 
from the preceding aortic direct murmur. I have long 
been accustomed to demonstrate this murmur in private 
teaching, and have called it an aortic diastolic non-re- 



CARDIAC MURMURS. 209 

gurgitant murmur. It cannot be said to have practical 
importance, inasmuch as the lesion giving rise to it is re- 
presented by the aortic direct murmur which precedes it. 

Coexisting Endocardial Murmurs. — The murmurs 
referable .to the left side of the heart, which have been 
considered, are often found in combination ; two or three 
may coexist, or all of them may be present. Moreover, 
with more or less of these murmurs may be associated 
murmurs referable to the right side of the heart. 

Having become familiar with their relations with the 
heart-sounds, and other points involved in their differ- 
entiation, it is not difficult to recognize them in combina- 
tion. The mitral murmurs are not infrequently associ- 
ated. The mitral direct, being presystolic, ends with 
the first sound, and the mitral systolic or regurgitant 
begins with this sound ; the first sound, as it were, 
divides these two murmurs. The murmurs almost inva- 
riably differ from each other in pitch and quality. The 
presence of both, in fact, assists, rather than obstructs, 
the recognition of each. The aortic direct and the 
aortic regurgitant murmur, also, are often associated. A 
murmur then accompanies the first and the second sound 
of the heart; the two murmurs follow in the same 
rhythmical order as the heart-sounds. These murmurs, 
when associated, can only be confounded with pericardial 
friction sounds. 

The combination of the aortic direct and the mitral 
systolic murmur alone offers any difficulty. These two 
murmurs have the same relation with the heart-sounds ; 
they are both systolic. How is it to be determined, 
when a systolic murmur is heard both at the base and 
apex, that either a mitral murmur is transmitted to the 
base, or an aortic murmur is transmitted to the apex; in 

18* 



210 THE HEART. 

other words, how is it to be decided whether two mur- 
murs are present or only one murmur ? If these two 
murmurs coexist, generally the circumstances which dis- 
tinguish each separately can be ascertained. Thus, the 
aortic murmur is transmitted into the carotid artery, and 
the presence of that murmur is then established ; the 
mitral regurgitant murmur is often transmitted laterally 
around the chest or heard at the lower angle of the scap- 
ula, and then the presence of that murmur is established. 
But there are additional points, namely, the murmur at 
the base and that at the apex generally differ sufficiently 
in pitch or quality to render it evident that there are two 
murmurs ; and generally at a situation in the praecordia 
between the base and apex, both murmurs may be either 
lost or become notably weakened. Attention to these 
points in most instances divests the problem of difficulty. 

Mitral and aortic lesions are often of a character to 
give rise to only one murmur at either of these orifices. 
A mitral direct murmur not infrequently is present with- 
out the mitral regurgitant, and the reverse of this is 
frequent. So either an aortic direct or an aortic regurgi- 
tant murmur may exist without the other. 

Tricuspid Direct Murmur. — The lesions which are 
requisite for this murmur very rarely occur at the tri- 
cuspid orifice; hence, this murmur is exceedingly rare. 
It is to be distinguished from the mitral direct murmur 
by its localization being, not at the apex, but at the right 
border of the heart. The mitral direct and the tricuspid 
direct murmur may coexist ; an instance of this kind has 
fallen under my observation. In that instance a pre- 
systolic murmur, with the characteristic blubbering 
quality, was heard both at the apex and at the right 
side of the heart. 



CARDIAC MURMURS. 211 

Tricuspid Regurgitant Murmur. — This murmur is 
not of very infrequent occurrence. Tricuspid regurgita- 
tion occurs often when the right ventricle is considerably 
dilated, without the existence of lesions of the valve. A 
tricuspid regurgitation current, however, does not in- 
variably give rise to an appreciable murmur. This fact 
is shown by the occurrence of a venous pulse in the 
neck, due to tricuspid regurgitation, when no murmur 
can be heard. 

The tricuspid regurgitant murmur, of course, occurs 
with the first sound, being systolic like the mitral re- 
gurgitant murmur, and the latter generally coexists. It 
is distinguished from the mitral regurgitant by its local- 
ization at the right inferior margin of the heart, and its 
transmission to the right rather than to the left. The 
coexistence of the mitral and the tricuspid regurgitant 
murmur is determined by the differences in pitch and 
quality between a systolic murmur at the apex and at 
the right margin of the heart. A venous pulse syn- 
chronous with the first sound of the heart, points to 
tricuspid regurgitation, and, although sometimes present 
without a tricuspid regurgitant murmur, when present it 
is corroborative evidence of the latter. 

Pulmonic Direct Murmur. — A pulmonic direct mur- 
mur, if organic, is generally connected with congenital 
lesions. The pulmonic direct and the aortic direct cur- 
rent of blood taking place at the same instant, the mur- 
murs representing both are, of course, systolic. How 
is the pulmonic to be distinguished from the aortic direct 
murmur? The pulmonic murmur is heard in the left 
second intercostal space close to the sternum; but this 
is not very distinctive, inasmuch as, not infrequently, 
the aortic murmur is loudest in that situation. The 



212 THE HEART. 

essential point of distinction is this: the pulmonic direct 
murmur is not transmitted into the carotid artery, whereas, 
the aortic direct murmur is always thus transmitted. If 
an aortic direct and a pulmonic direct murmur coexist, 
both being organic, the combination is to be ascertained 
by finding that the murmur in the second intercostal 
space on the right side differs from that on the left side 
in pitch or quality, sufficiently to show the presence of 
these murmurs, the one on the right side being trans- 
mitted to the carotid artery. 

An inorganic pulmonic direct murmur is of frequent 
occurrence. It is generally associated with an inorganic 
aortic direct murmur, the presence of the two murmurs 
being evidenced by a difference in pitch. 

Pulmonic Regurgitant Murmur. — This murmur must 
be exceedingly rare. It occurs, of course, like the 
aortic regurgitant, with the second sound. Its presence 
can only be determined when other signs go to show the 
existence of pulmonic and the absence of aortic lesions. 
This murmur, as well as the aortic regurgitant, can never 
be inorganic, its presence being proof of a regurgitant 
current of blood from incompetency of the pulmonic 
valve. 

Facts of practical importance in relation to the endo- 
cardial murmurs, are embraced in the following state- 
ments: — 

The question as to a murmur being organic or inor- 
ganic, relates chiefly, if not entirely, to the aortic direct 
and the pulmonic direct murmur, other murmurs being 
almost invariably, if not invariably, organic. 

Associated signs and symptoms generally warrant a 
definite'conclusion whether an aortic direct or a pulmonic 



CARDIAC MURMURS. 213 

direct murmur be, or be not, organic, and under the 
circumstances which render it difficult to decide this 
question positively, a positive decision is not of much 
immediate practical consequence. 

Valvular lesions, whether obstructive, regurgitant, or 
innocuous, are so uniformly represented by murmur, 
that, as a rule, absence of lesions may be predicated on 
the absence of murmur. 

With a practical knowledge of the different organic 
murmurs, the situation of lesions at either of the orifices 
of the heart, or their existence at two or more of these 
orifices, may be demonstratively determined. 

By means of the murmurs, with other signs, it may be 
determined demonstratively whether the lesions involve 
obstruction or regurgitation, or both, or, on the other 
hand, that they are, as regards immediate pathological 
effects, innocuous. 

The murmurs do not afford definite information as to 
the amount of obstruction or regurgitation, in other 
words, as to the pathological importance or gravity of 
lesions when they are not innocuous. No positive con- 
clusions on this point of view are to be drawn from the 
intensity of murmurs, their pitch, or their quality. As 
a rule, murmurs which are weak, more than those which 
are loud, represent grave lesions. 

Pericardial or Friction Murmur. — A pericardial or 
friction murmur is produced by the rubbing together of 
the surfaces of the pericardium in the systolic and dias- 
tolic movements of the heart. In the vast majority of 
the cases in which this murmur occurs, it denotes either 
the presence of recent lymph which renders the surfaces 
more or less adhesive, or roughening from lymph which 
has become dense and adherent ; its diagnostic signifi- 



214 THE HEART. 

cance, therefore, relates almost exclusively to pericar- 
ditis. In this relation it is of great practical importance. 
This murmur is to be discriminated from the endocar 
dial murmurs. The points involved in the discrimination 
are as follows : The murmur is double, that is, a mur- 
mur accompanies both the ventricular systole and diastole. 
It can, therefore, only be confounded with an aortic re_ 
gurgitant murmur in combination. The quality of the 
murmur is suggestive of rubbing or friction. It is some- 
times a feeble, grazing sound ; in other instances it is 
loud and quite rough. When rough, the quality is ex- 
pressed by such terms as rasping, grating, creaking, etc. 
Although accompanying both sounds of the heart, it has 
not that uniform, fixed relation to these sounds which 
characterizes the aortic direct and the aortic regurgitant 
murmur ; it is not in definite accord with the heart- 
sounds. Moreover, in intensity it varies with the suc- 
cessive movements of the heart, being louder with some 
revolutions than with others, in this regard differing 
notably from the endocardial murmurs. It is not heard 
without the pnecordia, as a rule, and is often limited to 
a part of the prseoordial region, whereas, certain of the 
endocardial murmurs, namely, the mitral regurgitant and 
the aortic direct, are often heard at a considerable dis- 
tance from the heart. Firm pressure with the stetho- 
scope intensifies the murmur. Its source seems very 
near the surface of the chest. In this respect it differs 
notably from endocardial murmurs, the latter appearing 
to come from a certain distance within the chest. This 
point of distinction is very appreciable, especially if, as 
often happens, a friction murmur be associated with an 
endocardial murmur. 



ENLARGEMENT OF THE HEART. 215 



CHAPTER VIII. 

THE PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS OF DISEASES OF THE 
HEART AND OF THORACIC ANEURISM. 

Enlargement of the heart by hypertrophy and dilatation — Valvular 
lesions, mitral, aortic, tricuspid, and pulmonic — Fatty degeneration 
and softening of the heart — Endocarditis — Pericarditis — Functional 
disorders — Thoracic aneurism. 

The morbid physical conditions incident to the different 
diseases of the heart, and the signs representing these 
conditions, have been considered in the preceding chapter. 
The diseases are now to be considered with reference to 
the assemblage of signs on which the physical diagnosis 
of each is to be based. Most of the diseases of the heart 
may be diagnosticated by means of physical signs. A 
few cardiac lesions do not admit of a physical diagnosis, 
and they do not, therefore, claim consideration in this 
work. The following are the affections which will form 
separate headings in this chapter : Enlargement of the 
Heart by Hypertrophy and by Dilatation, Valvular 
Lesions, Fatty Degeneration and Softening of the Heart, 
Endocarditis, Pericarditis and Functional Disorders. 
Having considered these affections, the physical diag- 
nosis of thoracic aneurism will be the concluding topic. 

Enlargement of the Heart by Hypertrophy and by 
Dilatation. — Physical exploration to determine the size 
of the heart, has three objects, namely to determine, 
first, that the size of the heart is normal ; second, that 
the heart is enlarged ; and third, the degree of enlarge- 



216 DISEASES OF THE HEART. 

ment. These objects are attainable by means of percus- 
sion and auscultation. 

The heart is of normal size when the apex-beat is in 
its normal situation, that is, in the fifth intercostal space, 
a little within a vertical line passing through the nipple 
(the linea mammalis) ; when the superficial cardiac space 
is not enlarged, as shown by percussion and by auscul- 
tation of the voice (vide page 188) and when percussion 
show T s the lateral borders of the heart to be situated nor- 
mally, namely, on the left side a little within the line of 
the nipple, and on the right side of a finger's breadth to 
the right of the right margin of the sternum. These 
points of evidence warrant a positive conclusion that the 
heart is not enlarged. 

The fact of an enlargement and its degree are deter- 
minable by an abnormal situation of the apex, together 
with an increase of the superficial cardiac space and ex- 
tension of the lateral boundaries of the deep cardiac space 
especially on the left side. 

In cases of slight or very moderate enlargement, the 
apex is situated a little without the linea mammalis, but 
not below the fifth intercostal space. A somewhat 
greater enlargement lowers the apex to the sixth inter- 
costal space, and removes it further without the line of 
the nipple. In greater degrees of enlargement the apex 
is lowered to the seventh, eighth, or ninth intercostal 
space, and generally further removed to the left. The 
lowering of the apex and the removal to the left, are not 
uniformly proportionate to each other. As a rule, if the 
right side of the heart be more enlarged than the left, 
the apex is removed without the linea mammalis further 
than when the enlargement of the left side of the heart 
predominates, and when the latter is the case, the apex 



ENLARGEMENT OP THE HEART. 217 

is lowered out of proportion to its removal without that 
line. The relatively abnormal situation downward and 
to the left, thus, is evidence of the enlargement predomi- 
nating in either the right or the left side of the heart. 

O CD 

Generally the situation of the apex is apparent to the 
touch and frequently to the eye. In some instances, 
however, the impulse can neither be seen nor felt. How 
is its situation to be then ascertained ? Auscultation 
furnishes a ready and reliable mode of determining this 
point. The situation in which the first sound of the 
heart has its maximum of intensity, as ascertained by 
means of the stethoscope, corresponds to the situation of 
the apex. This is hardly less definite than the presence 
of an appreciable impulse. 

In determining the fact of enlargement and its degree 
by the abnormal situation of the apex, causes of the 
latter which are extrinsic to the heart are to be elimi- 
nated. The apex is removed to the left of its normal 
situation by enlargement of the left lobe of the liver, 
abdominal tumors, hydroperitoneum, the pregnant uterus, 
and gastric tympanites. These extrinsic conditions are 
to be excluded or due allowance made for them. In 
some cases in which one or more of these extrinsic 
causes of displacement exist, the apex is carried into the 
axillary region. It is to be borne in mind that these 
causes of displacement may exist when there is more or 
less enlargement of the heart. All these causes, while 
they displace the apex to the left, do not lower, but tend 
to raise it above its normal situation. On the other hand, 
an aneurismal or other tumor situated above the heart 
may press downward the organ, and in this way the apex 
is more or less lowered. 

The superficial cardiac space is increased in proportion 
19 



.218 DISEASES OF THE HEART. 

as the heart is enlarged. The extent of this increase is 
easily determined by percussion and auscultation. With- 
in this space there is notable dulness on percussion. The 
degree of dulness is greater than within the superficial 
cardiac space in health, and this degree of dulness is 
proportionate to the greater area in which the heart is 
uncovered of lung. It is sufficiently easy to delineate 
by percussion on the chest the boundary of the anterior 
border of the upper lobe of the left lung, in other words, 
of the oblique line which is the hypothenuse of the right- 
angled triangle representing the superficial cardiac space 
in health and in disease. The area of the superficial 
cardiac space is also not less readily and precisely ascer- 
tained by auscultation of the voice ; the limits of the 
lung within the prsecordia are denoted by an abrupt ces- 
sation or notable diminution of the vocal resonance. In 
women, with large mammae, auscultation is more avail- 
able for this object than percussion. The extent to which 
the superficial cardiac space is enlarged is a good crite- 
rion of the degree of the enlargement of the heart. 

In proportion as the heart is enlarged, the situation of 
the left border is without the linea mammalis. Its situa- 
tion is determined by percussion. Dulness, although not 
great, is sufficiently distinct within the deep cardiac 
space, and the line which denotes the left border of the 
heart is easily delineated on the chest. This statement 
holds true with respect to the right border of the heart ; 
but this border, even when the enlargement of the heart 
is great, is removed comparatively little to the right of 
its normal situation. By means of percussion the bound- 
aries of the praecordia as enlarged by the increased size 
of the heart, may be determined and measured. In 
making this statement it is assumed that the lungs are 



ENLARGEMENT OF THE HEART. 219 

not diseased, and that the chest is not deformed. Shrink- 
age of the upper lobe of the left lung may enlarge the 
superficial cardiac space, and cause displacement of the 
heart. The latter is an effect of the presence of pleu- 
ritic effusion, and it may follow its removal. In cases of 
deformity from spinal curvature, to determine the fact of 
enlargement of the heart, or its degree, is not always an 
easy problem. 

There is a liability to error in localizing the apex in 
some cases of enlargement. Owing to the blunted form 
of the apex-, especially when the enlargement is chiefly 
of the right side of the heart, the apex-beat may be quite 
feeble. It is liable to be overlooked, and a. stronger 
impulse in the intercostal space above the apex, mistaken 
for the apex-beat. Of course the lowest impulse is the 
apex-beat. Careful palpation, and finding by ausculta- 
tion the spot where the first sound has its maximum of 
intensity, will prevent this error. 

Enlargement of the heart, and the degree of enlarge- 
ment having been ascertained, it is to be determined 
whether hypertrophy or dilatation predominate. If the 
enlargement be slight or moderate, it may be a question 
whether hypertrophy or dilatation exist alone. As a 
rule, if either of these two forms of enlargement exist 
without the other, it is hypertrophy, for, with rare 
exceptions, hypertrophy precedes dilatation. If the 
enlargement be very great, as a rule, dilatation pre- 
dominates, for, the capability of hypertrophic increase of 
size has its limit, and an increase of size beyond this 
limit must be due to dilatation. The signs denoting, on 
the one hand, hypertrophy, and, on the other hand, 
dilatation, relate to the impulses of the heart and to the 
heart-sounds. 



220 DISEASES OF THE HEAKT. 

With a moderate enlargement, hypertrophy is to be 
inferred from an abnormal force of the apex-beat, and 
an intensification of the characters of the first sound over 
the apex. With a considerable or great enlargement, if 
hypertrophy predominate, the apex-beat may be abnor- 
mally strong and prolonged, but, as already stated, 
owing to its blunted form, the beat is sometimes weak 
and scarcely appreciable. The increased power of the 
ventricular contractions, representing the hypertrophy, 
is then to be determined by impulses in the intercostal 
spaces above the apex. These impulses are sometimes 
present in each intercostal space between the apex and 
the base ; and they are abnormally strong in proportion 
as hypertrophy predominates. Still more marked evi- 
dence of hypertrophy is sometimes obtained when the 
hand is placed over the prgecordia ; a powerful heaving 
movement is felt. The increased power of the ventricu- 
lar contractions may in some cases be in this way 
appreciated somewhat as if the heart were held in the 
hand. In cases of considerable or great enlargement, 
the intensity of the first sound, over the apex, is more or 
less increased ; it is prolonged and its booming quality is 
more marked than in health. Not infrequently it is 
accompanied by a metallic ringing sound, or tinnitus. 

Moderate enlargement by dilatation is characterized 
by abnormal weakness of the apex-beat, and of the first 
sound over the apex. Cases, however, of simple dilata- 
tion are rare. If the enlargement be considerable or 
great, and dilatation predominate, all the impulses are 
weak, as compared with the cases in which hypertrophy 
predominates, and the first sound over the apex is more 
or less divested of the characters derived from impulsion ; 
that is, the sound is feeble, short, and valvular. These 



VALVULAR LESIONS. 221 

points of distinction are marked in proportion as dilata- 
tion predominates. 

In the great majority of the cases of enlargement of 
the heart, valvular lesions coexist. These coexisting 
valvular lesions are represented by endocardial murmurs, 
and they are excluded by the absence of the latter. In 
most of the cases in which enlargement exists without 
valvular lesions, it is associated with either pulmonary 
emphysema or chronic Bright' s disease. 

Valvular Lesions. 

The physical diagnosis of valvular lesions embraces 
their localization at the different orifices within the heart, 
and ascertaining their character as giving rise to obstruc- 
tion and regurgitation, or their innocuousness in these 
respects. These objects of diagnosis involve the endo- 
cardial murmurs, and the abnormal modifications of the 
heart-sounds which were considered in the preceding 
chapter. Lesions at the different orifices, namely, the 
mitral, aortic, tricuspid, and pulmonic, will be considered 
separately. 

Mitral Lesions. — The lesions at the mitral orifice are 
represented by the mitral murmurs — the mitral direct 
murmur, the mitral regurgitant, and the mitral systolic 
non-regurgitant or intra-ventricular murmur. Mitral 
obstructive lesions exist whenever the mitral direct mur- 
mur is present, with an exception already stated and 
explained (vide p. 204), namely, this murmur is present 
in some cases in which the mitral valve is intact, aortic 
lesions, giving rise to free regurgitation, existing in these 
cases. These exceptional instances are rare, and I am 
not aware that any have been reported except by myself. 

19* 



222 DISEASES OF THE HEART. 

Mitral regurgitant lesions exist whenever a mitral 
murmur which is truly regurgitant is present. A sys- 
tolic murmur having its maximum of intensity at or near 
the apex, transmitted laterally for a certain distance 
beyond the apex on the left side of the chest, and heard 
on the back near the lower angle of the scapula, denotes 
a regurgitant current; but a systolic murmur limited to 
a small area around the apex, or to the superficial cardiac 
space, is not proof of regurgitation. A truly regurgitant 
murmur, however, may be too feeble to be transmitted 
beyond the apex; the proof of regurgitation must then 
be based on other evidence associated with the murmur, 
namely, on enlargement of the heart and abnormal modi- 
fications of the heart-sounds. 

Mitral obstruction may exist without incompetency of 
the mitral valve, as shown by the presence of a mitral 
direct, without a mitral regurgitant, murmur. The con- 
verse of this is of more frequent occurrence, that is, 
regurgitation may exist without obstruction. The absence, 
however, of a mitral direct murmur is not positive proof 
against mitral obstruction, for, as has been seen, the 
production of a characteristic mitral direct murmur, 
requires the obstruction to be caused by an adherence of 
the mitral curtains at their sides, the curtains being 
sufficiently flexible to vibrate with the passage of the 
mitral direct current of blood. Mitral obstruction and 
regurgitation not infrequently coexist, as shown by the 
presence of both the mitral direct and the mitral regurgi- 
tant murmur. 

The mitral murmurs do not, per se, denote the amount 
of obstruction or regurgitation, or of both combined. 
Information with reference to these points may be de- 
rived from a comparison of the aortic with the pulmonic 



VALVULAR LESIONS. 223 

second sound. The amount of obstruction or regurgita- 
tion, or both, is great in proportion as the aortic sound 
is Aveakened. Per contra, there can be but little ob- 
struction or regurgitation if the aortic and the pulmonic * 
second sound preserve nearly or quite their normal rela- 
tion to each other in respect of intensity. Information 
may also be obtained by analyzing the first sound as 
heard at the apex. In proportion as the function of the 
mitral valve is compromised by lesions, the valvular 
element of the first sound at the apex will be found 
deficient. In some cases the first sound in this situation 
has no valvular element, presenting only the characters 
of impulsion. 

Enlargement of the right side of the heart, which 
results from mitral obstructive and regurgitant lesions, 
is a criterion of the amount of obstruction and regurgi- 
tation taken in connection with the length of time in 
which they have existed. Hypertrophic enlargement of 
the right ventricle intensifies the pulmonic second sound, 
and allowance must be made for this modification in 
determining, by a comparison of the pulmonic and the 
aortic sound, the degree in which the latter is weakened. 

Aortic Lesions. — Lesions are localized at the aortic 
orifice by the aortic murmurs, namely, the aortic direct 
and the aortic regurgitant murmur. Aortic obstructive 
lesions give rise to an aortic direct murmur; but it must 
be considered, in the first place, that an aortic direct 
murmur may be inorganic, and, in the second place, 
that, if the murmur be organic, it may be produced by 
lesions which occasion no obstruction and are innocuous. 
The existence of obstructive lesions must be determined 
by evidence added to the presence of the murmur. This 
evidence is impairment or suppression of the aortic second 



224 DISEASES OF THE HEART. 

sound, and enlargement of the left ventricle. If the 
lesions which occasion obstruction are of a character to 
diminish or arrest the movements of the aortic valve, the 
aortic second sound will be weakened or lost. If valvular 
lesions be limited to the aortic orifice, the degree of 
enlargement of the heart is a criterion of their patholo- 
gical importance. 

Regurgitant lesions at the aortic orifice give rise to 
an aortic regurgitant murmur. This murmur, of course, 
is always proof of regurgitation ; but the murmur gives 
no definite information concerning the amount of incom- 
petency of the aortic valve. A loud murmur may be 
produced by a regurgitant stream so small as to be, for 
the time, insignificant ; and, on the other hand, a large 
regurgitant current may give rise to a feeble murmur. 
The extent to which the valve is damaged by the lesions, 
is to be determined, first, by the weakness or suppression 
of the aortic sound, and, second, by the degree of en- 
largement of the left ventricle. 

Aortic obstructive and regurgitant lesions are often 
associated. An aortic direct and an aortic regurgitant 
murmur are then both present, with a weakened aortic 
sound or its suppression, and enlargement of the left ven- 
tricle according to the amount of the obstruction and re- 
gurgitation, together with the length of time during which 
the latter have existed. These effects, and not the in- 
tensity, or the pitch, or the quality of the murmurs, con- 
stitute the criterion of their pathological importance. 

Mitral and aortic lesions often coexist, giving rise to 
two, three, or all four of the obstructive and regurgitant 
murmurs in the left side of the heart. In addition to 
the murmurs, in these cases, the effects of the combined 



TRICUSPID AND PULMONIC LESIONS. 225 

lesions are shown in the modifications of the heart-sounds, 
and enlargement of both sides of the heart. 

Tricuspid Lesions. — Tricuspid obstructive lesions are 
exceedingly rare. A few instances of the kind of ob- 
struction which is represented by a presystolic or a tri- 
cuspid direct murmur have been reported. One instance 
has fallen under my observation. In this case, as in 
the other instances which have been reported, the tricus- 
pid were associated with mitral lesions ; hence, in local- 
izing an obstructive lesion at the tricuspid orifice, the 
presence of the presystolic murmur on each side of the 
heart, that is, the coexistence of mitral and the tricuspid 
direct murmur, is to be determined. This point has 
already been considered (vide page 210). 

Tricuspid regurgitation is not uncommon. Generally 
the insufficiency is caused by dilatation of the right ven- 
tricle occurring as an effect of mitral regurgitant or ob- 
structive lesions. Tricuspid regurgitation is not always 
represented by murmur ; and when a tricuspid regurgi- 
tant murmur is present, it is to be discriminated from a 
coexisting mitral regurgitant murmur. This point has 
been considered (vide page 211). 

Pulmonic Lesions. — As compared with aortic lesions, 
these are of extremely infrequent occurrence, and they 
are generally congenital. Lesions giving rise to a pul- 
monic direct murmur may be localized by differentiating 
this murmur from the aortic direct murmur (vide page 
211). It is to be considered that an inorganic pulmonic 
direct murmur is not infrequent. Pulmonic regurgitant 
lesions can only be diagnosticated by determining that a 
murmur occurring with the second sound of the heart is 
produced at the pulmonic and not at the aortic orifice 
(vide page 212). 



226 DISEASES OF THE HEART. 

Fatty Degeneration and Softening of the Heart. — 
Fatty degeneration of the heart is not represented by any 
distinctive signs ; but, nevertheless, the physical diagno- 
sis, taking into account the clinical history, may be quite 
positive. The signs are those which denote persistent 
muscular weakness of the heart. The apex-beat, if ap- 
preciable, is feeble. The intensity of the heart-sounds is 
diminished, and especially the intensity of the first sound. 
The first sound may be even suppressed over the apex, 
the second sound being heard in this situation. The 
characters of the first sound which belong to the element 
of impulsion are especially impaired or lost, the sound 
becoming short and valvular, in these respects resembling 
the second sound. Now these evidences of weakened 
muscular power occur when the weakness is merely func- 
tional, and when the heart is enlarged by predominant 
dilatation. But functional weakness is generally tran- 
sient, and is sufficiently explained by the existence of 
other than cardiac disease. Enlargement by dilatation 
is readily determined by physical signs. If the heart be 
but little or not at all enlarged, and pathological condi- 
tions adequate to explain diminished muscular power irre- 
spective of cardiac disease, be excluded, and at the same 
time the signs being connected with diagnostic symptoms, 
the existence of fatty degeneration may be determined 
with much confidence. 

Fatty degeneration may coexist with valvular lesions 
and enlargement of the heart. The physical diagnosis 
of fatty degeneration under these circumstances is not a 
simple problem. A probable diagnosis may be made 
when the amount of enlargement seems insufficient to 
account for the signs denoting muscular weakness of the 



ENDOCARDITIS. 227 

heart, and when symptoms belonging to the clinical 
history point to fatty degeneration. 

Softening of the muscular structure of the heart, 
occurring in continued fever and other general diseases, 
is denoted by the same signs which are embraced in the 
physical diagnosis of fatty degeneration, the most marked 
evidence being notable weakness, with valvular quality, 
or suppression, of the first sound over the apex of the 
heart. 

Endocarditis. — The physical diagnosis of endocarditis 
relates almost entirely to its occurrence in connection 
with articular rheumatism. The diagnostic sign is a 
mitral systolic non-regurgitant murmur (vide page 205). 
The presence of this murmur, however, in a case of 
rheumatism is not positive proof of an existing endocar- 
ditis, more especially if the patient have previously had 
articular rheumatism, because an endocarditis developed 
in a previous attack may have left a permanent murmur. 
If the murmur be a mitral regurgitant murmur and the 
heart be enlarged, it is quite certain that endocarditis 
has previously occurred. The positive proof is the pro- 
duction of the murmur during an attack of rheumatism, 
when previous examinations, made after the commence- 
ment of the rheumatic attack, had shown that there was 
no mitral murmur. An aortic direct murmur, in cases 
of rheumatism, is not evidence of endocarditis, because 
in many cases of rheumatism this murmur occurs, and is 
to be regarded as inorganic. 

Endocarditis is probably of frequent occurrence as 
secondary to mitral and aortic valvular lesions; but, 
under these circumstances, a physical diagnosis is im- 
practicable. 



228 DISEASES OF THE HEART. 

Pericarditis. — The physical diagnosis of pericarditis 
in the first stage, that is, prior to the effusion of liquid, 
is to be based on a pericardial friction murmur. Fortu- 
nately for diagnosis, this murmur is uniformly present. 
Its characters as contrasted with endocardial murmurs 
have been stated (vide page 214). The presence of a 
pericardial friction murmur, in connection with symptoms 
denoting pericarditis, renders the diagnosis quite posi- 
tive. There is, however, one liability to error. In some 
cases of pleurisy or pneumonia with pleuritic inflamma- 
tion, the movements of the heart occasion a rubbing 
together of the roughened pleural surfaces, and in this 
way a cardiac pleural friction murmur is produced. This 
may be single or double, and when double it simulates 
the murmur produced within the pericardial sac. It is 
limited to the border of the heart, and is neither accom- 
panied nor followed by pericardial effusion. Of course, 
the error of mistaking a cardiac pleural friction murmur 
for one produced within the pericardium, can only occur 
when pleurisy exists either as a primary affection or as 
secondary to pneumonia. 

In the second stage of pericarditis, that is, after the 
effusion of liquid has taken place, the pericardial fric- 
tion murmur often, but not always, disappears. The 
physical diagnosis in this stage is then to be based on 
the signs Avhich show the presence of a greater or less 
quantity of liquid within the pericardial sac. The signs 
which denote pericardial effusion and its amount have 
been stated (vide page 194). With a moderate effusion, 
the apex of the heart is raised, and the apex-beat may 
be felt in the fourth intercostal space, and removed to 
the left of its normal situation. With considerable or 



PERICARDITIS. 229 

large effusion, the apex-beat is lost, and the sounds of 
the heart are feeble and distant. The first sound loses 
the characters which belong to the element of impulsion, 
becoming short and valvular like the second sound. 

Increase or diminution of liquid in the second stage 
of pericarditis, is readily determined by signs obtained 
by percussion and auscultation. When the quantity is 
much diminished, the friction murmur, if it have been 
suppressed, returns, and persists until the pericardial sur- 
faces become agglutinated. Not infrequently, by aus- 
cultating when the body of the patient is inclined forward, 
a friction murmur may be heard notwithstanding the 
pericardial sac contains a large quantity of liquid. 

In cases of chronic pericarditis with very large effu- 
sion, dilatation of the pericardial sac is shown by signs 
obtained by percussion and auscultation. There is no 
apex impulse ; the heart-sounds are feeble and distant, 
the first sound being short and valvular, and the prse- 
cordia may be notably projecting. 

A malignant morbid growth filling the pericardial sac 
and inclosing within it the heart, may give rise to all the 
signs of pericardial effusion. A case of this kind, in a 
young subject, has fallen under my observation. 

With reference to diagnosis, the etiological relations 
of pericarditis should be kept in mind. These are, acute 
articular rheumatism, Bright' s disease, and either pleu- 
risy or pneumonia. It rarely occurs in other connec- 
tions, and, as an idiopathic affection, it is extremely rare. 

The presence of air and liquid within the pericardial 
sac gives rise to loud splashing sounds which, occurring 
when respiration is suspended, and when pneumo- hydro- 
thorax is excluded, are at once diagnostic of pneumo- 
hydropericardium. 

20 



2-30 DISEASES OF THE HEART. 

Functional Disorders. — Of the varied forms of func- 
tional disorder of the heart, some are rare, and others 
are of frequent occurrence. A rare form is persistent 
frequency of the heart's action, the pulse being from 100 
to 120 or more per minute, for weeks, months, and even 
years. This form of disorder exists in the affection 
known as exophthalmic goitre, Graves's or Basedow's dis- 
ease. It occurs, also, without being associated with 
either prominence of the eyes or enlargement of the thy- 
roid body. In a rare form the opposite of this, the 
action of the heart is abnormally infrequent, the pulse 
falling to 50, 40, 30 or less, per minute, the infrequency 
not being an idiosyncrasy either congenital or acquired, 
and continuing for a limited period. The occurrence 
with every alternate revolution of the heart of a ven- 
tricular systole so feeble as not to be represented by a 
radial pulse, is another rare form ; and another is a want 
of synchronism in the contraction of the two ventricles, 
giving rise to reduplication of the heart-sounds. In the 
more common forms, the disorder occurs in paroxysms 
which are variable in duration and in the frequency of 
their occurrence, the heart, in the paroxysms, beating 
irregularly, and often with intermissions, the action in 
some instances being violent, and in other instances feeble 
or fluttering. These common forms are embraced under 
the name palpitation. 

As regards the physical diagnosis, all the forms of dis- 
order are in the same category; in all, the functional 
character of the affection is determined by exclusion, 
inflammatory affections and lesions being excluded by 
the absence of their diagnostic signs. In whatever way 
the action of the heart is disturbed, however great may 
be the disturbance, and let it be attended with ever so 



FUNCTIONAL DISORDERS. 231 

much distress or anxiety, if physical exploration furnish 
no evidence of endocarditis, pericarditis, valvular lesions, 
enlargement of the heart, fatty degeneration, or heart- 
clot, the affection is to be considered as functional. If 
purely functional, the affection is unattended by any 
danger, and is generally remediable, at least in the com- 
mon forms. Hence the very great importance of a posi- 
tive diagnosis. 

In one point of view, the physical diagnosis in func- 
tional disorders may be said to rest, not on negative, but 
on positive evidence. Percussion and auscultation afford 
the means, not only of excluding inflammatory affections 
and lesions, but of demonstrating the fact that the organ 
is sound, at least as regards freedom from ordinary 
lesions. That its size is normal, is shown by the situa- 
tion of the apex-beat ; by ascertaining the lateral bound- 
aries of the prsecordia and the area of the superficial 
cardiac space. That the valves are unaffected, is shown 
by the normal characters of the heart-sounds. These 
positive facts, taken in connection with the absence 
of morbid signs, render the diagnosis certain. More- 
over, the evidence, positive and negative, is readily and 
quickly obtained. Indeed, the time required for reach- 
ing a conclusion is so brief, that it is often politic to pro- 
long unnecessarily the examination in order that a posi- 
tive assurance of the soundness of the organ may have 
in the mind of the patient the weight which is desirable 
in order to secure relief from anxiety and apprehension. 

Functional disorders are not infrequently associated 
with lesions with which they have no essential patholo- 
gical connection. A patient with lesions which are 
either innocuous or attended with little, if any, inconve- 
nience, may suffer from disturbance of the action of the 



232 DISEASES OF THE HEART. 

heart produced by causes which are wholly independent 
of the lesions. There is a liability, in these cases, to 
the error of attributing the disorders to the lesions, and 
thus forming an exaggerated estimate of the importance 
of the latter. To decide how much of the disturbed 
action of the heart is due to a superadded functional 
affection, is not as easy as to determine that lesions do 
not exist. The decision must be based on the character, 
degree, or extent of the lesions, as evidenced by the 
physical signs. In this connection may be stated a 
practical maxim, which it is well to bear in mind, whether 
functional disorders exist or not, namely, valvular lesions 
rarely give rise to much inconvenience until they have 
led to enlargement of the heart ; and enlargement, either 
with or without valvular lesions, as a rule, does not lead 
to the serious effects which are characteristic of cardiac 
disease, so long as the enlargement is due to hypertrophy 
and not to dilatation. 

Thoracic Aneurism. 

The physical conditions incident to thoracic aneurism, 
which are concerned in the production of signs, are, the 
presence of a tumor within the chest, of variable size, 
formed by the aneurismal sac ; the passage of blood into 
the sac with each ventricular systole, and the expulsion 
of blood in the diastole by the recoil of the coats of 
the aneurism ; the size of the opening into the sac as 
affecting the quantity of blood which it receives with 
each systole ; the quantity of stratified fibrin which the 
sac contains ; the point of connection with the aorta of 
the aneurismal tumor, and the direction from this point 



THORACIC ANEURISM. 233 

in which the tumor extends, together with its relations 
to the lungs, the trachea, and the primary bronchi. 

With reference to diagnosis, it is well to bear in mind 
that, in the great majority of cases, an aortic aneurism 
is connected with either the ascending portion, or the 
junction of the ascending and the transverse portion of 
the arch, and that the tumor generally extends to the 
right in a lateral or antero-lateral direction. The physi- 
cal diagnosis is more easily made when the aneurismal 
tumor is thus connected. The signs are less available 
if the aneurism arise from the transverse or descending 
aorta, and especially if the tumor extends in a direction 
downward or backward. 

An aneurismal tumor which has made its way through 
the walls of the chest, or which, without perforation, 
causes a circumscribed bulging obvious to the eye and 
touch, presents the following diagnostic signs : An im- 
pulse is seen and felt which is synchronous with the 
ventricular systole. The force of the impulse is varia- 
ble, depending, aside from the force with which the 
left ventricle contracts, upon the size of the orifice be- 
tween the sac and the artery, and the quantity of fibrin 
which the sac contains. A vibration or thrill with each 
impulse is sometimes a marked sign, but is often wanting. 
Frequently, but by no means constantly, a systolic murmur 
is heard over the tumor, and there may be also a dias- 
tolic murmur produced by the passage of blood from the 
sac. The heart-sounds over the tumor are more or less 
intense. There is notable dulness on percussion over an 
area corresponding to the space within the chest which 
the tumor occupies. If the tumor be of considerable size, 
it may produce condensation of lung around it ; the area 
of dulness on percussion will be in this way extended 

20* 



234 DISEASES OF THE HEART. 

beyond the limits of the tumor. Under these circum- 
stances, bronchial respiration and bronchophony may be 
produced. If the aneurismal sac be beneath the integu- 
ment, there may be to the touch a sense of fluctuation. 

With the foregoing signs, the physical diagnosis 
scarcely admits of doubt. Some of the signs may be 
produced by a tumor, not aneurismal, which is so situated 
as to receive and conduct the aortic impulse. The 
chances of a tumor being so situated as to simulate the 
signs of an aneurism are very few. I have met with a 
case of empyema in which perforation of the chest took 
place in the second intercostal space on the right side of 
the sternum, giving rise in this situation to a fluctuating 
tumor which had a strong pulsation. On a superficial 
examination the case seemed clearly one of aneurism; 
but an examination of the chest showed the right pleural 
cavity to be filled with liquid, and a puncture in the 
axillary region gave exit to a large quantity of pus, the 
pulsating tumor disappearing after a certain quantity of 
the purulent liquid had escaped. 

When, from its small size or its situation, an aneurismal 
tumor does not come into contact with the thoracic wall, 
and when it is situated beneath the sternum, signs ob- 
tained by palpation and inspection being absent, the 
physical diagnosis is less easy. Important signs are, 
dulness within a circumscribed space situated in the 
course of the aorta; an abnormal transmission of the 
heart-sounds within this space, and the presence of mur- 
murs. These signs are not always available, and when 
present they are not sufficient for a positive diagnosis. 
Other physical evidence and the presence of certain 
symptoms render the existence of aneurism highly prob- 



THORACIC ANEURISM. 235 

able either with or without the foregoing signs. If an 
aneurismal tumor press upon the trachea, it occasions a 
tracheal sound, or stridor, together with weakness of the 
respiratory murmur on both sides of the chest. If the 
tumor press upon a primary bronchus, it occasions dimin- 
ished or suppressed respiratory murmur on one side, and 
increased respiratory murmur on the other side of the 
chest. These physical signs should always lead to a 
suspicion of aneurism in a person forty years of age. 
Symptoms which should excite this suspicion and lead to 
careful physical exploration for the physical signs of 
aneurism, are dyspnoea from spasm of the glottis, and 
aphonia or impairment of the voice without evidence of 
laryngitis, these symptoms denoting either excitation or 
pressure of the recurrent laryngeal nerve; dysphagia 
from obstruction of the oesophagus; congestion of the 
face, neck, and upper extremities from obstruction of the 
vena cava or the venae innominatae; inequality of the 
radial, carotid, and subclavian pulsation on the two sides, 
or the absence of pulsation on one side, and contraction 
of one of the pupils. These symptoms not only render 
probable the existence of aneurism, but indicate its situa- 
tion as regards the aorta and the direction in which the 
aneurismal tumor extends. 

An aneurism may be suspected when, owing to shrink- 
age of the lung, or deformity of the chest, either the 
aorta or the pulmonary artery, just above the heart, is 
removed laterally from its normal situation and brought 
into contact with the walls of the chest in the second 
intercostal space so as to give rise to an appreciable im- 
pulse. A murmur may also be present at the point of 
impulse. An error of diagnosis under these circum- 



236 DISEASES OF THE HEART. 

stances is avoided by finding an adequate explanation of 
the signs just noted, and by the absence of other signs 
and of symptoms which are diagnostic of aneurism. 

In conclusion, an aortic murmur, however intense or 
rough, is never evidence of aortic aneurism. 



INDEX. 



ADVENTITIOUS respiratory 
sounds or rales, 105 
JEgophony, 124 

Amphoric resonance on percussion, 
61 
respiration, 100 
Amphoric voice, 130 
Aneurism, thoracic, 232 
Aortic direct murmur, 206 
lesions, diagnosis of, 223 
regurgitant murmur, 208 
diastolic non-regurgitant mur- 
mur, 208 
Apex-beat of heart, modification of, 

191 
Apoplexy, pulmonary, 164 
Artery, pulmonic, and aorta, rela- 
tion of, to walls of chest, 183 
Asthma, 143 

Auscultation, definition of, 14 
in disease, 85 
in health, 65 

mediate and immediate, 66 
rules in practice of, 68 



BRONCHIAL rales, dry, 112 
moist, 107 
respiration, 92 
■whisper, increased, 127 
Bronchitis seated in large bronchial 
tubes, 138 
in small bronchial tubes 
(capillary), 140 
Broncho-cavernous respiration, 99 
Bronchophony, 122 
whispering, 124 
Broncho-vesicular respiration, 94 



CARCINOMA of lung, 168 
Cardiac space, superficial and 
deep, 181 



Cavernous rale, 116 
respiration, 97 
Chest, anatomy and physiology of, 
16 
regional divisions of, 33 
Cirrhosis of lung, 178 
Conditions, morbid physical, inci- 
dent to different diseases 
of the respiratory sys- 
tem, 19 
summary of, 25 
physical, of the heart in disease, 
189 
in health, 181 
represented by amphoric reso- 
nance. 61 
by cracked - metal reso- 
nance, 63 
by dulness, 57 
by flatness on percussion, 

55 
by tympanitic resonance, 

59 
by vesiculotympanitic re- 
sonance, 61 
Coughing, signs obtained by, 133 
Cracked- metal resonance on percus- 
sion, 63 
Crepitant rale, 114 



DIAPHRAGMATIC hernia, 179 
Diseases of the respiratory 
system, physical conditions 
incident to, 19, 135 
Dulness on percussion, 57 



ECHO, amphoric, 130 
Emphysema, pulmonary or 
vesicular, 144 
Empyema, 149 
Endocarditis, diagnosis of, 227 



238 



INDEX. 



Exocardial murmur, 213 
Expiratory sound, prolonged, 102 
Exploration, physical, different 
methods of, 13 



FLATNESS on percussion, 55 
Fremitus, normal, vocal, 77 
in different regions, 80 
Friction murmur, pericardial, 213 
pleuritic, rales, 117 



pANGRENE, pulmonary, 165 



HEART, abnormal impulses of, 
191 
diagnosis of diseases of, 215 
enlargement of, 189, 215 
fatty degeneration and soften- 
ing of, 226 
first sound of, intensified, 195 

weakened, 195 
functional disorders of, 230 
murmurs of, 200 
physical conditions of, in dis- 
ease, 189 
in health, 181 
diagnosis of diseases of, 215 
second .^ound, aortic, weakened, 
196 
pulmonic, weakened 
197 
sounds of, 184 
valvular lesions of, 192 
diagnosis of, 22 L 
Heart-sounds, abnormal modifica- 
tions of, 194 
reduplication of, 198 
Hemorrhagic infarctus, 164 
Hernia, diaphragmatic, 179 
Hydrothorax, 149 



TNDETERMINATE rales, 120 
X Infarctus, hemorrhagic, 164 
Inspiratory sound, shortened, 101 
Intensity of normal and abnormal 

sounds, differences of, 27 
Interrupted respiration, 104 



LARYNGEAL and tracheal respi 
ration, 70 
rales, 106 



Larynx and trachea, affections of, 

136 
Lesions, valvular, of heart, 192, 221 

diagnosis of, 221 
Lobular pueumonia, 140 
Lobules, pulmonary, collapse of, 

140 



METALLIC tinkling, 119, 132 
Mitral lesions, diagnosis of, 
221 
Murmur, aortic direct, 206 

diastolic or non-regurgi- 

tant, 208 
regurgitant, 208 
cardiac, 200 
mitral direct, 203 

regurgitant, 205 
normal vesicular, 72 
pericardial or friction, 213 
pulmonic direct, 211 
regurgitant, 212 
systolic non-regurgitant or 

intra ventricular, 205 
tricuspid direct, 210 
regurgitant, 211 
vesicular, diminished, 87 
increased, 87 
Murmurs, endocardial coexisting, 
209 
facts of importance relating to, 
212 



(E 



DEMA, pulmonary. 166 



PECTORILOQUY, 128 
Percussion, definition of, 13 
in health, 38 
in disease, 54 
modes of performing, 38 
objects of, 39 
respiratory, 51 
rules in practice of, 51 
signs of disease furnished by, 

54 
source of resistance in, 63 
Pericardial or friction murmur, 
213 
sac, liquid within, 193 
surfaces, roughness of, 193 
Pericarditis, diagnosis of, 228 
Phthisis, 171 
fibroid, 178 



INDEX. 



239 



Pitch of normal and abnormal 

sounds, 27 
Pleural rales, 117 
Pleurisy, acute and chronic, 149 
Pneumonia, acute lobar, 158 

circumscribed, 164 

embolic, 164 

interstitial, 178 

lobular, 140 
Pneumo-hydrothorax, 156 
Pneumo-pyothorax, 156 
Pneumothorax, 156 
Prascordia, lbl 
Pulmonary apoplexy, 164 

gangrene, 165 

oedema, 166 
Pulmonic direct murmur, 211 

lesions, diagnosis of, 225 

regurgitant murmur, 212 

QUALITY of normal and abnor- 
mal sounds, 28 
terms denoting, 30 



RALE, cavernous or gurgling, 116 
crepitant or vesicular, 114 
indeterminate, 120 
metallic tinkling, 119 
splashing or succussion, 120 
Rales, 105 

fine bubbling or subcrepitant, 

108 
dry bronchial, 112 
laryngeal and tracheal, 106 
moist bronchia], 107 
pleural or friction, 117 
Regions, division of chest into, 33 
sections of chest corresponding 
to, 34 
Resonance, amphoric, 61 
cracked-metal, 63 
diminished, or dulness, 57 
in different regions, 80 
normal, vesicular, on percus- 
sion, 40 
vocal, over larynx and 
trachea, 76 
on percussion, absence of, or 

flatness, 55 
over chest, 77 
tympanitic, 58 
variations in different regions 

of chest, 43 
vesiculotympanitic, 60 



Respiration, abnormal modifica- 
tions of, 86 
amphoric, 100 
bronchial or tubular, 92 
broncho-cavernous, 99 
broncho-vesicular, 94 
cavernous, 97 
diminished, 87 
in different regions, 74 
interrupted, 104 
normal, laryngeal, and tra- 
cheal, 70 
vesicular, murmur of, 72 
suppressed, 90 

vesicular murmur of, in- 
creased, 87 
Respiratory organs, anatomy and 
physiology of. 16 
physical conditions inci- 
dent to diseases of, 19- 
25 



SIGNS, arrangement of, 105 
by percussion in disease, 54 

in health, 39 
healthy and morbid, distinc- 
tive characters of, 26 
obtained by coughing, 133 
physical, definition of, 14 
respiratory, in disease, 86 

in health, 69 
significance of, 32 

as representing physi- 
cal conditions, 32 
vocal, in health, 76 
of disease, 121 
Sounds, differences of intensity in, 
27 
in pitch, 27 
in quality, 28 
normal and abnormal, 14 
Splashing or succussion sounds, 

120 
Stethoscope, advantages of, 66 
binaural, 66 



TRICUSPID, direct murmur, 
210 
lesions, diagnosis of, 225 
regurgitant murmur, 211 
Tuberculosis, acute, 170 
Tumor within the chest, 168 
Tussive signs, 133 



240 



INDEX. 



Tympanitic resonance on percus- 
sion, 58 



VESICULOTYMPANITIC reso- 
nance on percussion, 60 
Vocal fremitus, diminished or sup- 
pressed, 132 
increased, 125 
resonance, diminished and sup- 
pressed, 130 



Vocal resonance-^- 

increased, 125 
signs of disease, 121 
Voice, amphoric, 130 



W 



HISPER, bronchial, increased 

127 

cavernous, 128 
in different regions, 83 
normal bronchial, 82 
Whispering pectoriloquy, 129 



CATALOGUE OF BOOKS 

PUBLISHED BY 

X3IE]3Sm."5r O. LEA 

(LATE LEA & BLANCHARB.) 



The books in the annexed list will be sent by mail, post-paid, to any 
Post Office in the United States, on receipt of the printed prices. No 
risks ofthemaiJ, however, are assumed, either on money or books. Gen- 
tlemen will therefore, in most cases, find it more convenient to deal with 
the nearest bookseller. 

Detailed catalogues furnished or sent free by mail on application. An 
illustrated catalogue of 64 octavo pages, handsomely printed, mailed on 
receipt of 10 cents. Address, 

HENRY C. LEA, 
Nos. 706 and 708 Sansom Street, Philadelphia. 



PEKIODICALS 
Free of Postage. 



AMEEICAN JOURNAL OF THE MEDICAL SCIENCES. 1 p fl 
Edited by I. Minis Hays, M.D., published quarterly, | B „ nve 
about 1100 large 8vo. pages per annum, [ dollars per 

MEDICAL NEWS AND LIBRARY, monthly, 384 large . annum > 
8vo. pages per annum, J in ad ™^e. 

OR, 

AMERICAN JOURNAL OF THE MEDICAL SCIENCES, 1 
Quarterly, ! For six 

MEDICAL NEWS AND LIBRARY, monthly, [ Dollars per 

MONTHLY ABSTRACT OF MEDICAL SCIENCE, 48 ] annum, 
pages per month, or nearly 600 pages per annum. , in advance. 



M 
M 



In all, about 2100 large 8vo. pages per annum, J 

EDICAL NEWS AND LIBRARY, monthly, in advance, $1 00. 



ONTHLY ABSTRACT OF MEDICAL SCIENCE, in advance, $2 50. 

OBSTETRICAL JOURNAL. With an American Supplement, edited 
by J. V. Ingham, M. D. $5 00 per annum, in advance. -Single 
Numbers, 50 cents. Is published monthly, each number containing 
ninety-six octavo pages. 



2 HENRY C. LEA'S PUBLICATIONS. 



ALLEN (HARRISON). A SYSTEM OF HUMAN ANATOMY. 
WITH AN INTRODUCTORY CHAPTER ON HISTOLOGY, by 
E. 0. Shakespeare, M.D. In one large and handsome quarto vol., 
with numerous wood-cuts, and several hundred original illustrations 
on lithographic plates. {Preparing.) 
A SHTON (T. J.) ON THE DISEASES, INJURIES, AND MALFOR- 
ti MATIONS OF THE RECTUM AND ANUS. With remarks on 
Habitual Constipation. Second American from the fourth London 
edition, with illustrations. 1 vol. 8vo. of about 300 pp. Cloth, $3 25. 

ASHWELL (SAMUEL). A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON THE DIS- 
EASES OF WOMEN. Third American from the third London edi- 
tion. In one 8vo. vol. of 528 pages. Cloth, $3 50. 
ASHHURST (JOHN, Jr.) THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF 
SURGERY. FOR THE USE OF STUDENTS AND PRACTI- 
TIONERS. Second and revised edition. In 1 large 8vo. vol. of 
over 1000 pages, containing 542 wood-cuts. Cloth, $6 00; leather, 
$7 00. {Now ready.) 

ATTFIELD (JOHN). CHEMISTRY; GENERAL, MfiDICAL, AND 
PHARMACEUTICAL. Eighth edition, revised by the author. In 
1 vol. 12mo. of 700 pages, with 87 illustrations. Cloth, $2.50; leather, 
$3.00. {Now ready.) 

BROWNE (LENNOX). THE THROAT AND ITS DISEASES. With 
one hundred illustrations in color and fifty wood-cuts. In one hand- 
some imp. 8vo. vol., cloth, $5.00. {Just issued.) 
BROWNE (EDGAR A.) HOW TO USE THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE. 
Elementary instruction in Ophthalmoscopy for the Use of Students. 
In one small 12mo. vol , many illust. Cloth, $1. {Just issued.) 

BLOXAM (C. L) CHEMISTRY, INORGANIC AND ORGANIC. 
With Experiments. In one handsome octavo volume of 700 pages, 
with 300 illustrations. Cloth, $4 00 ; leather, $5 00. 

BRINTON (WILLIAM). LECTURES ON THE DISEASES OF THE 
STOMACH. From the second London ed. 1 vol. 8vo. Cloth, $3 25. 
BASHAM (W. R.) RENAL DISEASES ; A CLINICAL GUIDE TO 
THEIR DIAGNOSIS AND TREATMENT. With illustrations. 
1 vol. 12mo. Cloth, $2 00. 

BUMSTEAD (F. J.) THE PATHOLOGY AND TREATMENT OF 
VENEREAL DISEASES. Fourth edition, revised and enlarged, 
with illustrations. 1 vol. 8vo., of over 700 pages. {I/ipress.i 
AND CULLERIER'S ATLAS OF VENEREAL. See"CuLLERiER." 

BARLOW (GEORGE H.) A MANUAL OF THE PRACTICE OF 
MEDICINE. 1 vol. 8vo., of over 60 pages. Cloth, $2 50. 
BRISTOWE (JOHN SYER). A MANUAL OF THE PRACTICE OF 
MEDICINE. A new work, edited with additions by James H. 
Hutchinson, M.D. In one handsome 8vo. volume of over 1100 
pages. Cloth, $5 50; leather, $6 50. {Lately issued.) 

BOWMAN (JOHN E.j A PRACTICAL HAND-BOOK OF MEDICAL 
CHEMISTRY. Sixth American, from the fourth London edition. 
With numerous illustrations. 1 vol. 12mo. of 350 pp. Cloth, $2 25. 
INTRODUCTION TO PRACTICAL CHEMISTRY, INCLUD- 
ING ANALYSIS. Sixth American, from the sixth London edition, 
with numerous illustrations. 1 vol. 12mo. of 350 pp. Cloth, $2 25. 

BELLAMY'S MANUAL OF SURGICAL ANATOMY. With numerous 
illustrations. In one royal 12mo. vol. Cloth, $2 25. {Lately issued.) 
BAIRD (ROBERT). IMPRESSIONS AND EXPERIENCES OF THE 
WEST INDIES. 1 vol. royal 12mo. Cloth, 75 cents. 



HENRY C. LEA'S PUBLICATIONS. 



BRYANT (THOMAS). THE PRACTICE OF SURGERY. Second Am. 
from Second English Edition. In one handsome 8vo. vol. of over 
1000 pp., with 672 illust. Cloth, 86. 00 ; leather, $7.00. {Justready.) 

BARNES (ROBERT). A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON THE DIS- 
EASES OF WOMEN. Second American, from Second English Edn. 
In one handsome 8vo. vol. of about 784 pages, with 181 illustrations, 
cloth, $4 50 ; leather, $5 50 {Just issued.) 

BARNES (FANCOTJRT). A MANUAL OF MIDWIFRY FOR MID- 
WIVES. In one neat royal 12mo. vol., with numerous illustra- 
tions. Cloth, $125. {Now Ready.) 
BURNETT (CHARLES H.) THE EAR : ITS ANATOMY. PHYSI- 
OLOGY, AND DISEASES. A Practical Treatise for the Use of 
Students and Practitioners. In ^ne handsome 8vo vol. of 615 pp., 
with 87 illustrations. Cloth $4 50 ; leather, $5 50. 
"DLANDFORD (O. FIELDING). INSANITY AND ITS TREATMENT. 
■D With an Appendix of the laws in force in the United States on f he 
Confinement of the Insane, by Dr. Isaac Ray. In one handsome 8vo. 
vol., of 471 pages. Cloth, $3 25. 
pHARCOT (J. M.) LECTURES ON THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. With 
^ Illustrations. Publishing in the Medical News and Library. 

CLASSEN'S QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS. Translated by Edgar F. 
Smith, Ph.D. In one handsome 12mo. vol. cloth. $2. {Just issued.) 

GARTER (R BRUDENELL). A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON DIS- 
EASES OF THE EYE. With additions and test-types, by John 
Green, M.D. In one handsome 8vo. vol. of about 500 pages, with 
124 illustrations. Cloth, $3 75. 

pHAMBERS (T. K.) A MANUAL OF DIET IN HEALTH AND 
^ DISEASE. In one handsome octavo volume of 310 pages. Cloth, 
$2 75. 

RESTORATIVE MEDICINE. An Harveian Annual Oration 

delivered at the Royal College of Physicians, London, June 21, 1871. 
In one small 12mo. volume. Cloth, $1 00. 

COOPER (8. B.) LECTURES ON THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE 
OF SURGERY. In one large 8vo. vol. of 750 pages. Cloth, $2 00. 
pARPENTER (WM. B.) PRINCIPLES OF HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY. 
^ A new American, from the Eighth English Edition. In one large 
vol. 8vo., of 1083 pages. With 373 illustrations. Cloth, $5 50; 
leather, raised bands, $6 50. {Lately issued.) 

PRIZE ESSAY ON THE USE OF ALCOHOLIC LIQUORS IN 

HEALTH AND DISEASE. New Edition, with a Preface by D. F. 
Condie, M.D. 1 vol. 12mo. of 178 pages. Cloth, 60 cents. 

CLELAND (JOHN). A DIRECTORY FOR THE DISSECTION OF 
THE HUMAN BODY. In one small royal 12aio. vol. Cloth, $1 25. 
CENTURY OF AMERICAN MEDICINE.— A History of Medicine in 
America, 1776-1876. In one royal 12mo. vol. of 366 pages. Cloth 
$2 25. 

CHURCHILL (FLEETWOOD). ON THE THEORY AND PRACTICE 
OF MIDWIFERY. With notes and additions by D. Francis Condie, 
M.D. With about 200 illustrations. In one handsome 8vo. vol. of 
nearly 700 pages. Cloth, $4; leather, $5. 

ESSAYS ON THE PUERPERAL FEVER, AND OTHER DIS- 
EASES PECULIAR TO WOMEN. In one neat octavo vol. of 
about 450 pages. Cloth, $2 50. 

CHADWICK (JAMES R.) A MANUAL OF THE DISEASES PECU- 
LIAR TO WOMEN. In one neat royal 12mo. vol. 'With illustra 
tions. {Preparing.) 



HENRY C. LEA'S PUBLICATIONS. 



OORNIL (V.), AND RANVIER (L.). MANUAL OF PATHOLOGICAL 
HISTOLOGY. Translated, with Notes and Additions, by E. 0. 
Shakespeare. In one 8vo. vol. of 600 pp., with 300 illus. {In press.) 

03NDIE (D. FRANCIS). A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON THE DIS- 
EASES OF CHILDREN. Sixth edition, revised and enlarged. In 
one large 8vo. vol. of 800 pages. Cloth, $5 25 ; leather, $6 25. 

0LOWE' (FRANK). AN ELEMENTARY TREATISE ON PRAC- 
TICAL CHEMISTRY AND QUALITATIVE INORGANIC ANA- 
LYSIS. From the Second Eng. Ed. In one 12mo. vol. Cloth, $2 50. 
0ULLERIER (A.) AN ATLAS OF VENEREAL DISEASES. Trans- 
lated and edited by Freeman J. Bumste ad, M.D. A large imperial 
quarto volume, with 26 plates containing about 150 figures, beauti- 
fully colored, many of them the size of life. In one vol., strongly 
bound in cloth, $17. 

Same work, in five parts, paper covers, for mailing, $3 per part. 

HYCLOPEDIA OF PRACTICAL MEDICINE. By Dunglison, Forbes, 
^ Tweedie, and Conolly. In four large super-royal octavo volumes, of 
3254 double-columned pages, leather, raised bands, $15. Cloth, $11 . 
QHRISTISON & GRIFFITH'S DISPENSATORY. 1 vol., cloth, $4. 

CAMPBELL'S LIVES OF LORDS KENYON, ELLENBOROUGH, AND 
TENTERDEN. Being the third volume of " Campbell's Lives of 
the'Chief Justices of England." In one crown octavo vol. Cloth, $2, 
TjA-LTON (J. C.) A TREATISE ON HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY. Sixth 
*-* edition , thoroughly revised, and greatly enlarged and improved, with 
316 illustrations. In one very handsome 8vo. vol. of 830 pp. 
Cloth, $5 50; leather, $6 50. 

DAVIS (F. H.) LECTURES ON CLINICAL MEDICINE. Second 
edition, revised and enlarged. In one 12mo. vol. Cloth, $1 75. 
DON QUIXOTE DE LA MANCHA. Illustrated edition. In two hand- 
some vols, crown 8vo. Cloth, $2 50 ; half morocco, $3 70. 
DEWEES (W. P.) A TREATISE ON THE DISEASES OF FEMALES. 
With illustrations. In one 8vo. vol. of 536 pages. Cloth, $3. 
DRUITT (ROBERT). THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF MO- 
DERN SURGERY. A revised American, from the eighth London 
edition. Illustrated with 432 wood engravings. In one 8vo. vol. 
of nearly 700 pages. Cloth, $4; leather, $5. 

DUNGLISON (ROBLEY). MEDICAL LEXICON; a Dictionary of 
Medical Science. Containing a concise explanation of the various 
subjects and terms of Anatomy, Physiology, Pathology, Hygiene, 
Therapeutics, Pharmacology, Pharmacy, Surgery, Obstetrics, Medical 
Jurisprudence, and Dentistry. Notices of Climate and of Mineral 
Waters; Formulae for Officinal, Empirical, and Dietetic Preparations, 
with the accentuation and Etymology of the Terms, and the French 
and other Synonymes. In one very large royal 8vo. vol. New edi- 
tion. Cloth, $6 50; leather, $7 50. 
DE LA BECHE'S GEOLOGICAL OBSERVER. In one large 8vo. vol. 
of 700 pages, with 300 illustrations. Cloth, $4. 
DANA (JAMES D.) THE STRUCTURE AND CLASSIFICATION OF 
ZOOPHYTES. Withillust. on wood. In one imp. 4to. vol. Cloth, $4. 

ELLIS (GEORGE VINERj. DEMONSTRATIONS IN ANATOMY. 
Being a Guide to the Knowledge of the Human Body by Dissection. 
From the eighth and revised English edition. Illustrated by 248 
engravings on wood. In one very handsome 8vo. vol. of over 700 pp. 
Cloth, $4 25 ; leather, $5 25. {Now Ready.) 



HENRY C. LEA'S PUBLICATIONS. 



EMMET (THOMAS ADDIS). THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE 
OF GYNECOLOGY, for the use of Students and Practitioners. In 
one large 8vo. vol. of nearly 900 pp. and more than 100 original illus- 
trations. Cloth, $5.00; leather, $6.00. (Now Ready.) 
ERICHSEN (JOHN E.) THE SCIENCE AND ART OF SURGERY. 
A new and improved American, from the Seventh enlarged and 
revised London edition. Revised by the Author. Illustrated with 
863 engravings on wood. In two large 8vo. vols. Cloth, $8 50; 
leather, raised hands, $10 50. (Just issued .) 

ENCYCLOPEDIA OF GEOGRAPHY. In three large 8vo. vols. Illus- 
trated with 83 maps and about 1100 wood-cuts. Cloth, $5. 
FINLAYSON (JAMES) CLINICAL MANUAL FOR THE STUDY 
OF MEDICAL CASES. In one handsome 8vo. vol. with numerous 
illustrations. Cloth, $2 63. (Just issued.) 

FOTHERGILL'S PRACTITIONER'S HANDBOOK OF TREATMENT. 
In one handsome 8vo. vol. of about 550 pp. Cloth, $4. (Justissued.) 

ON THE ANTAGONISM OF THERAPEUTIC AGENTS. In 

one neat 12mo. vol. of about 200 pages. Cloth, $1. (Just issued.) 

FARQUHARSON (ROBERT). A GUIDE TO THERAPEUTICS. 
Second American edition, revised by the author. Edited, with ad- 
ditions, embracing the U. S. Pharmacopoeia, by Frank Woodbury, 
M.D. In one neat royal 12mo. volume. Cloth, $2 25. (NowReady.) 

FENWICK (SAMUEL). THE STUDENTS' GUIDE TO MEDICAL 
DIAGNOSIS. From the Third Revised and Enlarged London Edi- 
tion. In one vol. royal 12mo. Cloth, $2 25. 
FLETCHER'S NOTES FROM NINEVEH, AND TRAVELS IN MESO- 
POTAMIA, ASSYRIA, AND SYRIA. Inonel2mo.vol. Cloth, 75 cts. 
■POX (TILBURY). EPITOME OF SKIN DISEASES, with Formulae 
-t for Students and Practitioners. Second Am. Edition, revised by the 
author. In one small 12mo. vol. Cloth, $1.38. (Now ready.) 

FLINT (AUSTIN). A TREATISE ON THE PRINCIPLES AND 
PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. Fourth edition, thoroughly revised 
and enlarged. In one large 8vo. volume of 1070 pages. Cloth, $6 ; 
leather, raised bands, $7. (Lately issued.) 

CLINICAL MEDICINE. A SYSTEMATIC TREATISE ON 

THE DIAGNOSIS AND TREATMENT OF DISEASE. Designed 
for Students and Practitioners of Medicine. In one handsome 8vo. 
vol. of about 900 pages. Cloth, $4 50; leather, $5 50. (NowReady.) 

A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON THE PHYSICAL EXPLORA- 



TION OF THE CHEST, AND THE DIAGNOSIS OF DISEASES 
AFFECTING THE RESPIRATORY ORGANS. Second and revised 
edition. One 8vo. vol. of 595 pages. Cloth, $4 50. 

— APRACTICALTREATISEONTHE DIAGNOSIS ANDTREAT- 
MENT OF DISEASES OF THE HEART. Second edition, enlarged. 
In one neat 8vo. vol. of over 500 pages, $4 00. 

— ON PHTHISIS : ITS MORBID ANATOMY, ETIOLOGY, etc., 
in a series of Clinical Lectures. A new work. In one handsome 8vo. 
volume. Cloth, $3 50. 

— A MANUAL OF PERCUSSION AND AUSCULTATION; of the 
Physical Diagnosis of Diseases of the Lungs and Heart, a*nd of Tho- 
racic Aneurism. In one handsome royal 12mo. volume. Cloth, 
$1 75. 

— MEDICAL ESSAYS. In one neat 12mo. volume. Cloth, $1 38. 



FOWNES (GEORGE). A MANUAL OF ELEMENTARY CHEMISTRY. 
A new American, from the enlarged English edition. In one royal 
12mo. vol. of over 1000 pages, with 177 illustrations, and one col- 
ored plate. Cloth, $2 75 ; leather, $3 25. (Just issued.) 
* 



HENRY C. LEA'S PUBLICATIONS. 



FULLER (HENRY). ON DISEASES OF THE LUNGS AND AIR 
PASSAGES. Their Pathology, Physical Diagnosis, Symptoms, and 
Treatment. From the second English edition. In one 8vo vol. 
of about 500 pages. Cloth, $3 50. 

GALLOWAY (ROBERT), A MANUAL OF QUALITATIVE ANAL- 
YSIS. In one 12mo. vol., cloth, $2 75. 
GLUGE (GOTTLIEB). ATLAS OF PATHOLOGICAL HISTOLOGY. 
Translated by Joseph Leidy, M.D., Professor of Anatomy in the 
University of Pennsylvania, &c. In one vol. imperial quarto, with 
320 copperplate figures, plain and colored. Cloth, $4. 

GREEN ('r. HENRY). AN INTRODUCTION TO PATHOLOGY AND 
MORBID ANATOMY. Third Amer., from the fourth Lond. Ed. 
In one handsome 8vo. vol., with numerous illust. Cloth, $2 25. 

GRAY (HENRY). ANATOMY, DESCRIPTIVE AND SURGICAL. 
A new American, from the eighth and enlarged London edition. To 
which is added Holden's "Landmarks, Medical and Surgical." In one 
large imperial 8vo. vol. of nearly 1000 pages, with 522 large and elabo- 
rate engravings on wood. Cloth, $6; leather, $7. (Just issued.) 
GRIFFITH (ROBERT E.) A UNIVERSAL FORMULARY, CON- 
TAINING THE METHODS OF PREPARING AND ADMINISTER- 
ING OFFICINAL AND OTHER MEDICINES. Third and Enlarged 
Edition. Edited by John M. Maisch. In one large 8vo vol of 300 
pages, double columns. Cloth, $4 50 : leather, $5 50. 

GROSS (SAMUEL D.) A SYSTEM OF SURGERY, PATHOLOGICAL, 
DIAGNOSTIC, THERAPEUTIC, AND OPERATIVE. Illustrated 
by 1403 engravings. Fifth edition, revised and improved. In two 
large imperial 8vo. vols, of over 2200 pages, strongly bound in 
leather, raised bands, $15. 

GROSS (SAMUEL D.) A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON THE Dis- 
eases, Injuries, and Malformations of the Urinary Bladder, the Pros- 
tate Gland, and the Urethra. Third Edition, thoroughly Revised 
and Condensed, by Samuel W. Gross, M.D., Surgeon to the Phila- 
delphia Hospital. In one handsome octavo volume, with about two 
hundred illustrations. Cloth, $4 50. ( Lately issued.) 

A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON FOREIGN BODIES IN THE 

AIR PASSAGES. In one 8vo. vol. of 468 pages. Cloth, $2 75. 

GIBSON'S INSTITUTES AND PRACTICE OF SURGERY. In two 8vo. 
vols, of about 1000 pages, learner, $6 50. 
GOSSELIN (L .) CLINICAL LECTURES ON SURGERY. Delivered 
at the Hospital of La Charite. Translated from the French by Lewis 
A. Stimson, M.D., Surgeon to the Presbyterian Hospital, New York. 
With illustrations. In one handsome 8vo. vol. of 35 pages. Cloth, 
$2 50. (Lately issued.) 

HAMILTON (ALLAN McLANE). NERVOUS DISEASES, THEIR 
DESCRIPTION AND TREATMENT. In one handsome 8vo. vol. 
of 512 pages, with 53 illustrations. Cloth, $3 50. (Jtist issued.) 

HEATH (CHRISTOPHER). PRACTICAL ANATOMY ; A MANUAL 
OF DISSECTIONS. With additions, by W. W. Keen, M. D. In 1 
volume; with 247 illustrations. Cloth, $3 50; leather, $4. 

HARTSHORNE (HENRY). ESSENTIALS OF THE PRINCIPLES 
AND PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. Fourth and revised edition. 
Inonel2mo. vol. Cloth, $2 63; half bound, $2 88. (Lately issued ) 

CONSPECTUS OF THE MEDICAL SCIENCES. Comprising 

Manuals of Anatomy, Physiology, Chemistry, Materia Medica, Prac- 
tice of Medicine, Surgery, and Obstetrics. Second Edition. In one 
royal 12mo. volume of over 1000 pages, with 477 illustrations. 
Strongly bound in leather, $5 00 ; cloth. $4 25. (Lately isstied.) 

. A HANDBOOK OF ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY. In one 

neat royal 12mo. volume, with many illustrations. Cloth. $1 75. 



HENRY C. LEA'S PUBLICATIONS. 



HABERSHON (S. 0). ON THE DISEASES OF THE ABDOMEN. 
Second American, from the third English edition. In one handsome 
8vo. volume of over 500 pages, with illustrations. Cloth, $3.50. 
(Now ready.) 

HOLMES (TIMOTHY). SURGERY, ITS PRINCIPLES AND PRAC- 
TICE. In one handsome 8vo. volume of 1000 pages, Avith 411 illus- 
trations. Cloth. $6 ; leather, with raised bands, $7. {Lately issued.) 
HAMILTON (FRANK H.) A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON FRAC- 
TURES AND DISLOCATIONS. Fifth edition, carefully revised. 
In one handsome 8vo. vol. of 830 pages, with 344 illustrations. Cloth, 
$5 75 ; leather, $6 75. 

HOBLYN (RICHARD D.) A DICTIONARY OF THE TERMS USED 
IN MEDICINE AND THE COLLATERAL SCIENCES. In one 
12mo. volume, of over 500 double-columned pages. Cloth, $150; 
leather, $2. 

H OLDEN (LUTHER). LANDMARKS, MEDICAL AND SURGICAL. 
From the Second English Edition. In one royal 12mo. vol. of 128 
pages. Cloth, 88 cents. (Lately issued.) 

HUDSON (A.) LECTURES ON THE STUDY OF FEVER. 1 vol. 
8vo., 316 pages. Cloth, $2 50. 
HODGE rHUGH L.) ON DISEASES PECULIAR TO WOMEN, IN- 
CLUDING DISPLACEMENTS OF THE UTERUS. Second and 
revised edition. In one 8vo. volume. Cloth, $4 50. 
THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF OBSTETRICS. Illus- 
trated with large lithographic plates containing 159 figures from 
• original photographs, and with numerous wood-cuts. In one large 
quarto vol. of 550 double-columned pages. Strongly bound in cloth, 
$14. 

HOLLAND (SIR HENRY). MEDICAL NOTES AND REFLECTIONS. 
From the third English edition. In one 8vo. vol. of about 500 pages. 
Cloth, $3 50. 

HUGHES. SCRIPTURE GEOGRAPHY AND HISTORY, with 12 
colored maps. In 1 vol. 12mo. Cloth, $1. 
HORNER (WILLIAM E.) SPECIAL ANATOMY AND HISTOLOGY. 
Eighth edition, revised and modified. In two large 8vo. vols, of over 
1000 pages, containing 300 wood-cuts. Cloth, $6. 

HILL (BERKELEY). SYPHILIS AND LOCAL CONTAGIOUS DIS- 
ORDERS. In one 8vo. volume of 467 pages. Cloth, $3 25. 
HILLIER (THOMAS). HAND-BOOK OF SKIN DISEASES. Second 
Edition. In one neat royal 12mo. volume of about 300 pp., with two 
plates. Cloth, $2 25. 

HALL (MRS. M.) LIVES OF THE QUEENS OF ENGLAND BEFORE 
THE NORMAN CONQUEST. In one handsome 8vo. vol. Cloth, 
$2 25; crimson cloth, $2 50; half morocco, $3. 
TONES (C. HANDFIELD). CLINICAL OBSERVATIONS ON FUNC- 
" TIONAL NERVOUS DISORDERS. Second American Edition. In 
one 8vo. vol. of 348 pages. Cloth, $3 25. 

KIRKES (WILLIAM SENHOUSE). A MANUAL OF PHYSIOLOGY. 
A new American, from the eighth London edition. One vol., with 
many illus., 12mo. Cloth, $3 25; leather, $3 75. 

KNAPP (F.) TECHNOLOGY ; OR CHEMISTRY, APPLIED TO THE 
ARTS AND TO MANUFACTURES, with American additions, by 
Prof. Walter R. Johnson. In two 8vo. vols., with 500 ill. Cloth, $6. 

KENNEDY'S MEMOIRS OF THE LIFE OF WILLIAM WIRT. In 
two vols. 12mo. Cloth, $2. 



HENRY C. LEA'S PUBLICATIONS. 



T EE (HENRY) ON SYPHILIS. In one 8vo. vol. Cloth, $2 25. 

LEA (HENRY C.) SUPERSTITION AND FORCE ; ESSAYS ON THE 
WAGER OF LAW, THE WAGER OF BATTLE, THE ORDEAL, 
AND TORTURE. Third edition, thoroughly revised and enlarged. 
In one handsome royal 12mo. vol. Cloth, $2 50. (Just issued.) 

LEA (HENRY C.) STUDIES IN CHURCH HISTORY. The Rise of 
the Temporal Power — Benefit of Clergy — Excommunication. In 
one handsome 12mo. vol. of 515 pp. Cloth, $2 75. 

AN HISTORICAL SKETCH OF SACERDOTAL CELIBACY 

IN THE CHRISTIAN CHURCH. In one handsome octavo volume 
of 602 pages. Cloth, $3 75. 

LINCOLN (D. F.) ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. A Condensed Man- 
ual of Medical Electricity. In one neat royal J2mo. volume, with 
illustrations. Cloth, $1 50. 

LA ROCHE (R.) YELLOW FEVER. In two 8vo. vols, of nearly 1500 
pages. Cloth, $7. 
PNEUMONIA. In one 8vo. vol. of 500 pages. Cloth, $3. 

LEISHMAN (WILLIAM). A SYSTEM OF MIDWIFERY. Includ- 
ing the Diseases of Pregnancy and the Puerperal State. Third 
American, from the Third English Edition. With additions, by 
J. S. Parry, M.D. In one very handsome 8vo. vol. of 800 pages and 
200 illustrations. (In Press.) 

LAURENCE (J. Z.) AND MOON (ROBERT C.) A HANDY-BOOK 
OF OPHTHALMIC SURGERY. Second edition, revised by Mr. 
Laurence. With numerous illus. In one 8vo. vol. Cloth, $2 75. 

LEHMANN (C. G.) PHYSIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY. Translated by 
George F. Day, M. D. With plates, and nearly 200 illustrations. 
In two large 8vo. vols., containing 1200 pages. Cloth, $6. 

A MANUAL OF CHEMICAL PHYSIOLOGY. In one very 

handsome 8vo. vol. of 336 pages. Cloth, $2 25. 

LAWSON (GEORGE) . INJURIES OF THE EYE, ORBIT, AND EYE- 
LIDS, with about 100 illustrations. From the last English edition. 
In one handsome 8vo. vol. Cloth, $3 50. 

LUDLOW (J. L.) A MANUAL OF EXAMINATIONS UPON ANA- 
TOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, SURGERY, PRACTICE OF MEDICINE, 
OBSTETRICS, MATERIA MEDICA, CHEMISTRY, PHARMACY, 
AND THERAPEUTICS. To which is added a Medical Formulary. 
Third edition. In one royal 12mo. vol. of over 800 pages. Cloth, 
$3 25 ; leather, $3 75. 

LYNCH (W. F.) A NARRATIVE OF THE UNITED STATES EX- 
PEDITION TO THE DEAD SEA AND RIVER JORDAN. In one 
large octavo vol., with 28 beautiful plates and two maps. Cloth, $3. 
. Same Work, condensed edition. One vol. royal 12mo. Cloth, $1. 

LYONS (ROBERT D.) A TREATISE ON FEVER. In one neat 8vo. 
vol. of 362 pages. Cloth, $2 25. 
MEIGS (CHAS. D.). ON THE NATURE, SIGNS, AND TREATMENT 
OF CHILDBED FEVER. In one 8 vo. vol. of 365 pages. Cloth, $2. 
MILLER (JAMES) . PRINCIPLES OF SURGERY. Fourth American, 
from the third Edinburgh edition. In one large 8vo. vol. of 700 
pages, with 240 illustrations. Cloth, $3 75. 

THE PRACTICE OF SURGERY. Fourth American, from the 

last Edinburgh edition. In one large 8vo. vol. of 700 pages, with 
364 illustrations. Cloth, $3 75. 

MONTGOMERY (W. F.) AN EXPOSITION OF THE SIGNS AND 
SYMPTOMS OF PREGNANCY. From the second English edition . 
In one handsome 8vo. vol. of nearly 600 pages. Cloth, $3 75. 



HENRY C. LEA'S PUBLICATIONS. 



MULLER (J.) PRINCIPLES OF PHYSICS AND METEOROLOGY. 
In one large 8vo. vol. with 550 wood-cuts, and two colored plates. 
Cloth, $4 50. 
TV/TIRABEAU ; A LIFE HISTORY. In one 12mo. vol. Cloth, 75 cts. 

MACFARLAND'S TURKEY AND ITS DESTINY. In 2 vols, royal 
12mo. Cloth, $2. 
MARSH (MRS.) A HISTORY OF THE PROTESTANT REFORMA- 
TION IN FRANCE. In 2 vols, royal 12mo. Cloth, $2. 

NEILL (JOHN) AND SMITH (FRANCIS G.) COMPENDIUM OF 
THE VARIOUS BRANCHES OF MEDICAL SCIENCE. In one 
handsome l2mo. vol. of about 1000 pages, with 374 wood-cuts. 
Cloth, $4; leather, raised bands, $4 75. 

NETTLESHIP'S MANUAL OF OPHTHALMIC MEDICINE. In 
one royal 12ino. vol. of about 350 pp. (Preparing.) 
PLAYFAIR (W. S.) A TREATISE ON THE SCIENCE AND PRAC- 
TICE OF MIDWIFERY. Second Am. from the Second English 
Edition. Edited, with Additions, by R. P. Harris, M.D. In one 
handsome octavo vol. of 637 pages, with 182 illustrations and 
two plates. Cloth, $4; leather, $5. (Just issued.) 

PAVY (F. W.) A TREATISE ON THE FUNCTION OF DIGESTION, 
ITS DISORDERS AND THEIR TREATMENT. From the second 
London ed. In one 8vo. vol. of 246 pp. Cloth, $2. 
A TREATISE ON FOOD AND DIETETICS, PHYSIOLOGI- 
CALLY AND THERAPEUTICALLY CONSIDERED. In one neat 
octavo volume of about 500 pages. Cloth, $4 75. (Just issued.) 
pARRISH (EDWARD). A TREATISE ON PHARMACY. With many 
■*■ Formulae and Prescriptions. Fourth edition. Enlarged and thoroughly 
revised by Thomas S. Wiegand. In one handsome 8vo. vol. of 977 
pages, with 280 illus. Cloth, $5 50 ; leather, $6 50. 
piRRIE (WILLIAM) THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF SUR- 
J- GERY. In one handsome octavo volume of 780 pages, with 316 
illustrations. Cloth, $3 75. 

PTJLSZKY'S MEMOIRS OF AN HUNGARIAN LADY. In one neat 
royal 12mo. vol. Cloth, $1. 

PAGET'S HUNGARY AND TRANSYLVANIA. In two royal 12mo. 
vols. Cloth, $2. 

TjEYNOLDS (J. RUSSELL) A SYSTEM OF MEDICINE, with Notes 
■L" and Additions, by Henry Hartshorne, M.D. In three large 8vo. 

vols., containing about 3000 closely printed double-columned pages, 

with many illustrations, (hi Press.) 
■DEMSEN (IRA). THE PRINCIPLES OF CHEMISTRY. In one 
■" handsome 12mo. vol. Cloth, $1 50. (Just issued.) 

ROBERTS (WILLIAM). A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON URINARY 
AND RENAL DISEASES. A second American, from the second 
London edition. AVith numerous illustrations and a colored plate. 
In one very handsome 8vo. vol. of 616 pages. Cloth, $4 50. 

RAMSBOTHAM (FRANCIS H.) THE PRINCIPLES AND PRAC- 
TICE OF OBSTETRIC MEDICINE AND SURGERY. In one im- 
perial 8vo. vol. of 650 pages, with 64 plates, besides numerous wood- 
cuts in the text. Strongly bound in leather, $7. 

■DANKE'S HISTORY OF THE TURKISH AND SPANISH EMPIRES 
■*■« in the 16th and beginning of 17th Century. In one Svo. volume, 
paper, 25 cts. 



10 HENRY C. LEA'S PUBLICATIONS. 

RANXE'S HISTORY OF THE REFORMATION IN GERMANY. 
Parts I., II., III. In one vol. Cloth, $1. 
-piGBY (EDWARD). A SYSTEM OF MIDWIFERY. Second Ameri- 
-C« can edition. In one handsome 8vo. vol. of 422 pages. Cloth, $2 50. 

SEILER (CARL) HANDBOOK OF DIAGNOSIS AND TREATMENT 
OF DISEASES OF THE THROAT AND NASAL CAVITIES. In 
one small 12mo. vol, with illustrations. Cloth, $1. {Now Ready.) 

S CHAFER (EDWARD ALBERT). A COURSE OF PRACTICAL HIS- 
TOLOGY : A Manual of the Microscope for Medical Students. In 
one handsome octavo vol. With many illust. Cloth, $2. {Just Issued.) 

OMITH (HENRY H.) AND HORNER (WILLIAM E.) ANATOMICAL 
^ ATLAS. Illustrative of the structure ofthe Human Body. In one large 
imperial 8vo. vol., with about 650 beautiful figures. Cloth, $4 50. 

STIMSON (LEWIS A.) A MANUAL OF OPERATIVE SURGERY. 
In one very handsome royal 12mo volume of 488 pages, with 332 
illustrations. Cloth, $2 50. {Just issued.) 

S WAYNE (JOSEPH GRIFFITHS). OBSTETRIC APHORISMS. A 
new American, from the fifth revised English edition. With addi- 
tions by E. R. Hutchins, M. D. In one small 12mo. vol. of 177 pp., 
with illustrations. Cloth. $1 25. 

STURGES (OCTAVITJS). AN INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY 
OF CLINICAL MEDICINE. In one 12mo. vol Cloth, $1 25. 

DMITH (EUSTACE). ON THE WASTING DISEASES OF CHILDREN. 
^ Second American edition, enlarged. In one 8vo. vol. Cloth, %2 50. 

SARGENT (F. W.) ON BANDAGING AND OTHER OPERATIONS 
OF MINOR SURGERY. New edition, with an additional chapter 
on Military Surgery. In one handsome royal 12mo. vol. of nearly 
400 pages, with 184 wood-cuts. Cloth, $1 75. 

SMITH (J. LEWIS). A TREATISE ON THE DISEASES OF IN- 
FANCY AND CHILDHOOD. Fourth Edition, revised and enlarged. 
In one large 8vo. volume of 758 pages, with illustrations. Cloth, 
$4 50; leather, $5 50. {Nowready.) 

SHARPEY (WILLIAM) AND QUAIN (JONES AND RICHARD). 
HUMAN ANATOMY. . With notes and additions by Jos. Leidy, 
M.D., Prof, of Anatomy in the University of Pennsylvania. In two 
large 8vo. vols, of about 1300 pages, with 51 1 illustrations. Cloth, $6. 

SCHMITZ AND ZUMPT'S CLASSICAL SERIES. In royal 18mo. 
CORNELII NEPOTIS LIBER DE EXCELLENTIBUS DUCIBUS 
EXTERARUM GENTIUM, CUM VITIS CATONIS ET ATTICI. 
With notes, &c. Price in cloth, 60 cents; half bound, 70 cts. 
C. C. SALLUSTII DE BELLO CATILINARIO ET JUGURTHINO- 
With notes, map,&c. Price in cloth, 60 cents ; half bound, 70 cents, 

Q. CURTII RUFII DE GESTIS ALEXANDRI MAGNI LIBRI VIII. 

With notes, map, &c. Price in cloth, 80 cents ; half bound, 90 cents. 
P. VIRGILII MARONIS CARMINA OMNIA. Price in cloth, 85 

cents; half bound, $1. 
M. T. CICERONIS ORATIONES SELECTS XII. With notes, &c. 

Price in cloth, 70 cents ; half bound, 80 cents. 
ECLOG.E EX Q. HORATII FLACCI POEMATIBUS. With notes, 

&c. Price in cloth, 70 cents; half bound, 80 cents. 
ADVANCED LATIN EXERCISES, WITH SELECTIONS FOR 

READING. Revised. Cloth, price 60 cents ; half bound, 70 cents. 



HENRY C. LEA'S PUBLICATIONS. 11 



SKEY (FREDERIC C.) OPEEATIVE SURGERY. In one 8vo. vol. 
of over 650 pages, with about 100 wood-cuts. Cloth, $3 25. 
SLADE (D. D.) DIPHTHERIA ; ITS NATURE AND TREATMENT- 
Second edition. In one neat royal 12mo. vol. Cloth, $1 25. 
SMITH (EDWARD). CONSUMPTION; ITS EARLY AND REME- 
DIABLE STAGES. In one 8vo. vol. of 254 pp. Cloth, $2 25. 
STILLE (ALFRED). THERAPEUTICS AND MATERIA MEDICA. 
Fourth edition, revised and enlarged. In two large and handsome 
volumes 8vo. Cloth, $10 ; leather, $12. {Just issued.) 

STILLE (ALFRED) AND MAISCH (JOHN M.) THE NATIONAL 
DISPENSATORY: Embracing the Chemistry, Botany, Materia 
Medica, Pharmacy, Pharmacodynamics, and Therapeutics of the 
Pharmacopoeias of the United States and Great Britain. For the 
Use of Physicians and Pharmaceutists. Second edition, revised 
and enlarged. In one handsome 8vo. vol., of 1680 pages, with 239 
illustrations. Cloth, $6 75; leather, $7 50. (Now ready.) 
CjMALL BOOKS ON GREAT SUBJECTS. In 3 vols. Cloth, $1 50. 

SCHOEDLER (FEEDEEICK) AND MEDLOCK (HENEY). WONDERS 
OF NATURE. An elementary introduction to the Sciences of Physics, 
Astronomy, Chemistry, Mineralogy, Geology, Botany, Zoology, 
and Physiology. Translated from the German by H. Medlock. In 
one neat 8vo. vol., with 679 illustrations. Cloth, $3. 
TOKES (W.) LECTURES ON FEVER. In one 8vo. vol. Cloth, $2. 



S 



STRICKLAND (AGNES). LIVES OF THE QUEENS OF HENRY 
THE VIII. AND OF HIS MOTHER. In one crown octavo vol., 
extra cloth, $1; black cloth, 90 cents. 

MEMOIRS OF ELIZABETH, SECOND QUEEN REGNANT OF 

ENGLAND AND IRELAND. In onecrown octavo vol., extracloth, 
$1 40; black cloth, $1 30. 

TANNER (THOMAS HAWKES). A MANUAL OF CLINICAL MEDI- 
CINE AND PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. Third American from the 
second revised English edition. Edited by Tilbury Fox, M.D. In 
one handsome 12mo. volume of 366 pp. Cloth, $1 50. 

ON THE SIGNS AND DISEASES OF PREGNANCY. From 

the second English edition. With four colored plates and numerous 
illustrations on wood. In one vol. 8vo. of about 500 pages. Cloth 
$4 25. 

rpUKE (DANIEL HACK). INFLUENCE OF THE MIND UPON THE 
-"- BODY. In one handsome 8vo. vol. of 416 pp. Cloth, $3 25. 
""TAYLOR (ALFRED S.) MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE. Seventh 
-"- American edition. Edited by John J. Reese, M.D. In one large 
8vo. volume of 879 pages. Cloth, $5; leather, $6. (Just issued.) 
PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF MEDICAL JURISPRU- 
DENCE. From the Second English Edition. In two large Svo. 
vols. Cloth, $10; leather, $12. {Just issued.) 

ON POISONS IN RELATION TO MEDICINE AND MEDICAL 



JURISPRUDENCE. Third American from the Third London Edi- 
tion. 1 vol. 8vo. of 788 pages, with 104 illustrations. Cloth, $5 50 • 
leather, $6 50. (Just issued.) 

THOMAS (T. GAILLARD). A PRACTICAL TREATISE ON THE 
DISEASES OF FEMALES. Fourth edition, thoroughly revised. 
In one large and handsome octavo volume of 801 pages,* with 191 
illustrations. Cloth, $5 00 ; leather, $6 00. (Just issued.) 



12 HENRY C. LEA'S PUBLICATIONS. 

TODD ("ROBERT BENTLEY) . CLINICAL LECTURES ON CERTAIN 
ACUTE DISEASES. In one vol. 8vo. of 320 pp., cloth, $2 50. 
THOMPSON (SIR HENRY). THE PATHOLOGY AND TREATMENT 
OF STRICTURE OP THE URETHRA AND URINARY FISTULJE. 
From the third English edition. In one 8vo. vol. of 359 pp., with 
illustrations. Cloth, $3 50. 

THOMPSON (SIR HENRY). CLINICAL LECTURES ON DISEASES 
OF THE URINARY ORGANS. Second and revised edition. In 
one 8vo. volume, with illustrations. Cloth, $2 25. (Just issued.) 

WALSHE (W. H.) PRACTICAL TREATISE ON THE DISEASES 
OF THE HEART AND GREAT VESSELS. Third American from 
the third revised London edition. In one 8vo. vol. of 420 pages. 
Cloth, $3. 

ATSON (THOMAS). LECTURES ON THE PRINCIPLES AND 
PRACTICE OF PHYSIC. A new American from the fifth and en- 
larged English edition, with additions by H. Hartshorne, M.D. In 
two large and handsome octavo volumes. Cloth, $9 ; leather, $11. 

OHLER'S OUTLINES OF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY. Translated 
from the 8th German edition, by Ira Remsen, M.D. In one neat 
12mo. vol. Cloth, $3 00. (Lately issued.) 

ELLS (J. SOELBERG). A TREATISE ON THE DISEASES OF 
THE EYE. Third edition, revised by the author. In one large and 
handsome octavo vol., with 6 colored plates and many wood-cuts, 
also selections from the test-types of Jaeger and Snellen. (Pre- 
faring.) 

HAT TO OBSERVE AT THE BEDSIDE AND AFTER DEATH 
IN MEDICAL CASES. In one royal 12mo. vol. Cloth, $1. 

EST (CHARLES). LECTURES ON THE DISEASES PECULIAR 
TO WOMEN. Third American from the Third English edition. In 
one octavo volume of 550 pages. Cloth, $3 75 ; leather, $4 75. 

— LECTURES ON THE DISEASES OF INFANCY AND CHILD- 
HOOD. Fifth American from the sixth revised English edition. In 
one large 8vo. vol. of 670 closely printed pages. Cloth, $4 50 ; lea^ 
ther, $5 50. (Just issued.) 

— ON SOME DISORDERS OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM IN 
CHILDHOOD. From the London Edition. In one small 12mo. 
volume. Cloth, $1. 

ILLIAMS (CHARLES J. B. and C. T.) PULMONARY CONSUMP- 
TION : ITS NATURE, VARIETIES, AND TREATMENT. Id 
one neat octavo volume. Cloth, $2 50. 

ILSON (ERASMUS). A SYSTEM OF HUMAN ANATOMY. A 
new and revised American from the 1 ast English edition. Illustrated 
with 397 engravings on wood. In one handsome 8vo. vol. of over 
600 pages. Cloth, $4 ; leather, $5. 

THE STUDENT'S BOOK OF CUTANEOUS MEDICINE. In 

one handsome royal 12mo. vol. Cloth, $3 50. 

WINCXEL ON PATHOLOGY AND TREATMENT OF CHILDBED. 
With Additions by the Author. Translated by Chadwick. In one 
handsome octavo volume of 484 pages. Cloth, $4. (Just issued .) 

WOODBURY (FRANK). A HANDBOOK OF THE PRINCIPLES 
AND PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. In one royal 12mo. volume. 
{Preparing.) 



W 



W 

w 



w 
w 



w 
w 



